<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?><rss version="2.0" xmlns:dc="http://purl.org/dc/elements/1.1/" xmlns:atom="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xmlns:sy="http://purl.org/rss/1.0/modules/syndication/" xmlns:content="http://purl.org/rss/1.0/modules/content/" xmlns:googleplay="http://www.google.com/schemas/play-podcasts/1.0" xmlns:itunes="http://www.itunes.com/dtds/podcast-1.0.dtd" xmlns:podcast="https://podcastindex.org/namespace/1.0"><channel><generator>Alitu</generator><title><![CDATA[Quick Daily Podcasting Tips by Alitu]]></title><description><![CDATA[Pocket-Sized Podcasting is the ‘how to podcast’ series for busy people. You’ll get one short sharp tip delivered to your feed Monday through Friday, all aimed towards helping you build and grow your own life-changing show. Brought to you by Alitu, the Podcast Maker, it’s our aim to make the entire process of podcasting as simple and accessible as humanly possible. Find us anywhere you get your podcasts, and be sure to hit follow or subscribe so you never miss an episode!
]]></description><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Pocket-Sized Podcasting is the ‘how to podcast’ series for busy people. You’ll get one short sharp tip delivered to your feed Monday through Friday, all aimed towards helping you build and grow your own life-changing show. Brought to you by Alitu, the Podcast Maker, it’s our aim to make the entire process of podcasting as simple and accessible as humanly possible. Find us anywhere you get your podcasts, and be sure to hit follow or subscribe so you never miss an episode!
]]></itunes:summary><language>en-gb</language><podcast:medium>podcast</podcast:medium><podcast:podping usesPodping="true"></podcast:podping><podcast:guid>a57767f4-2269-5a83-810b-56199f74a441</podcast:guid><link>https://psp.alitu.com</link><atom:link href="https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/pocket-sized-podcasting-with-alitu/id1612642076" rel="external"></atom:link><atom:link href="http://twitter.com/thepodcasthost" rel="external"></atom:link><atom:link href="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958" rel="self" type="application/rss+xml"></atom:link><itunes:type>episodic</itunes:type><itunes:owner><itunes:name>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:name></itunes:owner><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author><podcast:person>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</podcast:person><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:image href="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/da63b9c6-f17b-4621-89c2-32cfbe112060.jpg?t=1660579314000"></itunes:image><itunes:category text="Business"><itunes:category text="Marketing"></itunes:category></itunes:category><itunes:category text="Business"><itunes:category text="Entrepreneurship"></itunes:category></itunes:category><itunes:category text="Technology"></itunes:category><item><guid isPermaLink="false">2c7c93ad-45f1-4ec3-be1b-0ab4e63c7a0c</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Partnering With an Event]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Partnering With an Event]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about partnering with an event. In recent episodes, you&rsquo;ve heard how you might find various events and get-togethers that are relevant to your show. Attending them is a great idea - partnering with them is an even better one. Some podcasts become the official media partner of events in their niche. Here, you might record content in the lead-up, then on the day itself too. This can also give you access to some speakers or interviewees that would&rsquo;ve been otherwise hard to reach. So again, this can be a win-win. You&rsquo;re getting loads of great new content opportunities, reaching plenty new people in your target audience, and you&rsquo;ll even save money on the price of a ticket, too. Thanks for listening to Pocket-Sized Podcasting. And remember, you can leave feedback for us quickly and easily over at [thepodcasthost.com/psp](http://thepodcasthost.com/psp)</p>]]></description><pubDate>Fri, 23 Jan 2026 17:38:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:00</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/2c7c93ad-45f1-4ec3-be1b-0ab4e63c7a0c</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/2c7c93ad-45f1-4ec3-be1b-0ab4e63c7a0c.mp3?t=1769189881000" length="962707" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Some podcasts become the official media partner of events in their niche. Here, you might record content in the lead-up, then on the day itself too. This can also give you access to some speakers or interviewees that would’ve been otherwise hard to reach. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>324</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>324</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">0b0234be-0fec-4f03-a005-6cd6eb075dcc</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Local Groups, Clubs, or Societies]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Local Groups, Clubs, or Societies]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about local and ongoing events in your niche. Face-to-face interaction goes a long way toward promoting your podcast. Other people are more likely to remember you and your work if they have met you in person. There might be some groups or societies in your area that are relevant to your podcast topic. It&rsquo;s much easier and cheaper to pop along to one of these, than it is to invest in the time and travel for a big national event. These groups tend to meet in pubs, libraries, community centres, churches, or coffee shops. They&rsquo;re a chance to socialize, make friends, and learn from one another. Meetup.com is a great way to find clubs and societies, though you can also use platforms like Eventbrite, Facebook, Craigslist, or Gumtree. Thanks for listening to Pocket-Sized Podcasting. And remember, you can leave feedback for us quickly and easily over at [thepodcasthost.com/psp](http://thepodcasthost.com/psp)</p>]]></description><pubDate>Thu, 22 Jan 2026 17:41:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:04</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/0b0234be-0fec-4f03-a005-6cd6eb075dcc</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/0b0234be-0fec-4f03-a005-6cd6eb075dcc.mp3?t=1769103661000" length="1019227" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[There might be some groups or societies in your area that are relevant to your podcast topic. It’s much easier and cheaper to pop along to one of these, than it is to invest in the time and travel for a big national event.  ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>323</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>323</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">54a36974-01bc-4d58-81ad-329d8521d7b2</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Finding Conferences in Your Niche]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Finding Conferences in Your Niche]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about finding conferences in your niche. No matter what topic you podcast about, there&rsquo;s probably a decent-sized annual event that takes place around it. This could be anything from a Comicon or board game convention, to a conference of surgeons or physicists. It might seem like a hassle or expense to travel to something like this, but it can be well worth your while. There&rsquo;s nothing more powerful than real-life in-person interactions. Obviously, you&rsquo;ll want to behave like a human, rather than a walking billboard for your show. But do take things like business cards or any other appropriate merch to help make your podcast known. This is more about finding long-term friends and relationships rather than a sheer new listeners numbers game. But, you never know what opportunities can arise from these events, and they can lead to massive podcast growth further down the line. Thanks for listening to Pocket-Sized Podcasting. And remember, you can leave feedback for us quickly and easily over at [thepodcasthost.com/psp](http://thepodcasthost.com/psp)</p>]]></description><pubDate>Wed, 21 Jan 2026 17:38:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:17</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/54a36974-01bc-4d58-81ad-329d8521d7b2</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/54a36974-01bc-4d58-81ad-329d8521d7b2.mp3?t=1769017081000" length="1236874" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[No matter what topic you podcast about, there’s probably a decent-sized annual event that takes place around it. This could be anything from a Comicon or board game convention, to a conference of surgeons or physicists. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>322</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>322</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">a0a5d64e-ff47-494b-b297-172503f6282b</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Growth Competitions]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Growth Competitions]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about running competitions to grow your show. This is a good way to reward your current listeners and spread the word about your show. Think about a big action that your podcast&rsquo;s topic includes. Is there a skill your show teaches, that you could encourage listeners to show off on social, using a certain hashtag? Or maybe you&rsquo;ll reward listeners for the most innovative use of your podcast merch out there in the wild. Like any competition, you could pick one single winner and send them a physical prize. Or, you might have some sort of digital prize you can offer to everyone who enters. Not only can this give you lots of extra marketing as well as a few new listeners, it&rsquo;s also a great way to build a sense of community and collaboration around your show, too. Your listeners will really feel like an active part of the podcast, and that can be a powerful thing. Thanks for listening to Pocket-Sized Podcasting. And remember, you can leave feedback for us quickly and easily over at [thepodcasthost.com/psp](http://thepodcasthost.com/psp)</p>]]></description><pubDate>Tue, 20 Jan 2026 17:37:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:09</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/a0a5d64e-ff47-494b-b297-172503f6282b</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/a0a5d64e-ff47-494b-b297-172503f6282b.mp3?t=1768930621000" length="1103909" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Think about a big action that your podcast’s topic includes. Is there a skill your show teaches, that you could encourage listeners to show off on social, using a certain hashtag? Or maybe you’ll reward listeners for the most innovative use of your podcast merch out there in the wild. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>321</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>321</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">38750068-6d5c-41bb-aa35-1578530a51f4</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Personal Outreach to ‘True Fans’]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Personal Outreach to ‘True Fans’]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about reaching out to a handful of your dedicated fans. If you can find 3-5 people who you know listen to every single word of every single episode you put out, then it&rsquo;s well worth your time asking them to get on a call with you. You can almost use this as a sort of focus group for your content. The info you get from them can be gold when it comes to growing your podcast, too. You&rsquo;ll want to ask them questions like how they discovered the show, why they initially hit play, why they subscribed, and what keeps them listening. Identifying what you&rsquo;re doing well means you can really zone in on that, going forward. And, you can also get some critical feedback, too. Is there anything they&rsquo;re not keen on, or would like to see added or removed from the show? This stuff can all be invaluable when it comes to planning the future direction of your show. Thanks for listening to Pocket-Sized Podcasting. And remember, you can leave feedback for us quickly and easily over at [thepodcasthost.com/psp](http://thepodcasthost.com/psp)</p>]]></description><pubDate>Mon, 19 Jan 2026 17:37:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:09</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/38750068-6d5c-41bb-aa35-1578530a51f4</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/38750068-6d5c-41bb-aa35-1578530a51f4.mp3?t=1768844221000" length="1106431" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[If you can find 3-5 people who you know listen to every single word of every single episode you put out, then it’s well worth your time asking them to get on a call with you. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>320</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>320</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">14998c29-9f03-4764-a573-b9f4de8fa341</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Help Crowdfund Another Podcast]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Help Crowdfund Another Podcast]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about helping to crowdfund another podcast. If there&rsquo;s one thing 99% of podcasts have in common, it&rsquo;s in asking their listeners for financial support. Commonly, this is done through crowdfunding platforms like Patreon. And in exchange for supporting them, many shows will offer reward tiers that can help promote the work of the patron. If you have some disposable cash to spare, there are worse ways to spend it. You&rsquo;re helping to support a fellow creative, and have the opportunity to grow your own show in exchange. So what are your favourite podcasts in your niche? Do they ask for any kind of financial support? And if so, do they offer any rewards? This could be things like; 1. Putting a link to your website on their own site 2. Mentioning you on their show 3. Playing your trailer on their show This is yet another win-win situation for all involved. Thanks for listening to Pocket-Sized Podcasting. And remember, you can leave feedback for us quickly and easily over at [thepodcasthost.com/psp](http://thepodcasthost.com/psp)</p>]]></description><pubDate>Fri, 16 Jan 2026 21:29:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:10</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/14998c29-9f03-4764-a573-b9f4de8fa341</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/14998c29-9f03-4764-a573-b9f4de8fa341.mp3?t=1768598941000" length="1126063" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[If there’s one thing 99% of podcasts have in common, it’s in asking their listeners for financial support.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>319</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>319</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">17773b65-28d7-4fff-b1c0-88c0f1b67bd1</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Write a Guest Post]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Write a Guest Post]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about writing a guest post. A popular way to promote your podcast is to do a guest post on a site with a similar target audience. With a guest post, you're creating insightful and helpful content for their readers, and in turn, are able to link back to your own content. So, have a think about some sites that create good content in your niche. What topics do they cover? And how might you be uniquely placed to write something useful and interesting for their readers? A lot of websites have guidelines around guest posts, but if not, they&rsquo;ll at least have a contact page. Remember, make your pitch all about *them* and their audience. This is all about delivering value. You&rsquo;ll get your link back, and you&rsquo;ll get to mention your show, but that isn&rsquo;t something you want to lead with. Thanks for listening to Pocket-Sized Podcasting. And remember, you can leave feedback for us quickly and easily over at [thepodcasthost.com/psp](http://thepodcasthost.com/psp)</p>]]></description><pubDate>Thu, 15 Jan 2026 21:28:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:05</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/17773b65-28d7-4fff-b1c0-88c0f1b67bd1</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/17773b65-28d7-4fff-b1c0-88c0f1b67bd1.mp3?t=1768512481000" length="1044401" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[A popular way to promote your podcast is to do a guest post on a site with a similar target audience. With a guest post, you're creating insightful and helpful content for their readers, and in turn, are able to link back to your own content.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>318</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>318</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">034f836f-27b4-4ee5-a806-cc2e90d13b1c</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Support a Charity]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Support a Charity]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about supporting a charity. Getting behind a charity that&rsquo;s close to your heart - as well as your podcast topic - can build a great win-win scenario for all involved. This support could be financial, but it may be more useful to both parties for you to promote and spotlight the work of the organisation. If you do an interview show, this might give you access to folks who&rsquo;d love to do an episode with you. And if you&rsquo;re creating good content around a charity, they&rsquo;ll likely want to share and promote your podcast to their wider audience, as well. A couple of examples here could be; - A tabletop wargaming podcast supporting a veterans charity. - Or a writers' show supporting an organisation that helps fund books for kids in socially deprived neighbourhoods. Obviously, with charities, it'll be more of a long-term reciprocity thing, rather than a direct transaction. You'll need to be respectful here, and be aware that this is an ongoing relationship, rather than a service. Thanks for listening to Pocket-Sized Podcasting. And remember, you can leave feedback for us quickly and easily over at [thepodcasthost.com/psp](http://thepodcasthost.com/psp)</p>]]></description><pubDate>Wed, 14 Jan 2026 21:30:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:19</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/034f836f-27b4-4ee5-a806-cc2e90d13b1c</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/034f836f-27b4-4ee5-a806-cc2e90d13b1c.mp3?t=1768426201000" length="1264217" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Getting behind a charity that’s close to your heart - as well as your podcast topic - can build a great win-win scenario for all involved.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>317</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>317</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">bbe9e33c-8a2e-4d19-814c-94af1d52fd27</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Create a Sponsored Resource]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Create a Sponsored Resource]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about creating a sponsored resource. Podcast sponsorship doesn&rsquo;t always involve money changing hands. Instead, you can have a &ldquo;content partnership&rdquo; with a company where visibility is more important than cash. A sponsored resource is basically something you can create for a business. It should be something that their customers will find useful, or enjoy. In exchange, the resource - and the business itself - will promote your podcast and send new listeners your way. A couple of examples might be; - An outdoors podcast who create a PDF resource for a popular walking boot company - &ldquo;The Top 20 Walking Trails in Scotland&rdquo; - Or, A ketogenic diet podcast that creates a PDF resource or infographic, for a cheese or butter company, with 20 exciting recipes to try. So can you think of any companies you&rsquo;d love to partner with? If so, reach out to their marketing department with your proposal and media kit. It could be the start of a fruitful relationship for both. Thanks for listening to Pocket-Sized Podcasting. And remember, you can leave feedback for us quickly and easily over at [thepodcasthost.com/psp](http://thepodcasthost.com/psp)</p>]]></description><pubDate>Tue, 13 Jan 2026 21:26:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:18</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/bbe9e33c-8a2e-4d19-814c-94af1d52fd27</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/bbe9e33c-8a2e-4d19-814c-94af1d52fd27.mp3?t=1768339561000" length="1254632" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[A sponsored resource is basically something you can create for a business. It should be something that their customers will find useful, or enjoy. In exchange, the resource - and the business itself - will promote your podcast and send new listeners your way. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>316</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>316</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">dd9c4e4c-a428-418d-b374-95c75948d71d</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Create a ‘Best Podcasts in Your Niche’ Roundup]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Create a ‘Best Podcasts in Your Niche’ Roundup]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about creating a &lsquo;best podcasts&rsquo; roundup. Lists, or &lsquo;roundups&rsquo;, are one of the most shareable (and searchable) forms of content on the planet. A great way to utilise them to grow your audience, is to create a &lsquo;Best Podcasts&rsquo; roundup in your niche. This could either be done as a podcast episode, or blog post (or both!). For each show, answer questions like &ldquo;what&rsquo;s it about?&rdquo;, &ldquo;who&rsquo;s it by?&rdquo; why you like it, how it&rsquo;s been useful to you, and why you recommend others go and check it out. Make sure you provide links to each show&rsquo;s website too. When you&rsquo;ve published your roundup, email and tag each of the podcasts mentioned. Tell them about their inclusion on the list, and ask them if they wouldn't mind sharing it with their audience too. This is a great win-win where you shine a light on other podcasts, but also end up with a lot of your target audience visiting your site. For an example, see our &lsquo;Best Space Podcasts&rsquo; roundup at [thepodcasthost.com/spacepodcasts](http://thepodcasthost.com/spacepodcasts)</p>]]></description><pubDate>Mon, 12 Jan 2026 21:27:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:10</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/dd9c4e4c-a428-418d-b374-95c75948d71d</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/dd9c4e4c-a428-418d-b374-95c75948d71d.mp3?t=1768253221000" length="1119168" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Lists, or ‘roundups’, are one of the most shareable (and searchable) forms of content on the planet.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>315</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>315</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">afcc82b4-05cc-41ae-b6a3-293166580bd8</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Creating a Montage Episode]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Creating a Montage Episode]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about creating a montage episode. A montage episode is a piece of audio content, made up of clips from different contributors. A tried and tested way of creating one is to build the episode around a single topic or question. Here, each participant records their answer to the question, and sends over their audio to the creator. You can collect clips from anyone from the general public, to your podcast listeners. In this particular instance, we want to create one with fellow podcasters in our niche. Some examples of montage episodes could include An episode of a travel podcast, where contributors talk about their favourite holiday destination An episode of a sound design podcast, where contributors talk about their favourite audio production software Or, an episode of a health podcast, where contributors talk about their morning routines When you&rsquo;ve published a montage episode, be sure to reach out to everyone involved and ask them to share it with their own listeners. Everyone&rsquo;s podcast can grow with this strategy, on top of it being great content for the collective audience. Everyone wins! For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to http://thepodcasthost.com/montage</p>]]></description><pubDate>Fri, 09 Jan 2026 18:13:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:26</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/afcc82b4-05cc-41ae-b6a3-293166580bd8</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/afcc82b4-05cc-41ae-b6a3-293166580bd8.mp3?t=1767982381000" length="1377540" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[A montage episode is a piece of audio content, made up of clips from different contributors.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>314</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>314</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">a15eb91e-1e2c-44a6-a698-1bd1b8b820f5</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Creating a Crossover Episode]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Creating a Crossover Episode]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about running a co-hosted episode. Teaming up with another podcast in your niche to do a special co-hosted episode can be a great way to expand your reach and share your audiences. These &ldquo;crossover&rdquo; episodes can bring fresh and engaging content to the listeners of both shows. They can also help listeners find new, relevant, and enjoyable content that they might not have already been aware of. Can you think of a podcast that's at a similar level to your own show, in terms of influence and following. One with a similar topic, or some sort of overlap in subject matter. If so, reach out to them and propose a special co-hosted episode on a topic that&rsquo;ll benefit both your audiences. Be sure to sell the benefits to them. You think your audience will love their content, and this is an opportunity to grow their reach. Publish this special episode on both your feeds, making it clear throughout that this is a co-hosted episode between podcast X and podcast Y. Thanks for listening to Pocket-Sized Podcasting. And remember, you can leave feedback for us quickly and easily over at http://thepodcasthost.com/psp</p>]]></description><pubDate>Thu, 08 Jan 2026 18:17:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:23</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/a15eb91e-1e2c-44a6-a698-1bd1b8b820f5</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/a15eb91e-1e2c-44a6-a698-1bd1b8b820f5.mp3?t=1767896221000" length="1326831" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Teaming up with another podcast in your niche to do a special co-hosted episode can be a great way to expand your reach and share your audiences. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>313</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>313</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">984f244f-5e2b-4858-9671-5842291c56b0</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Contributing to an Existing Community]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Contributing to an Existing Community]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about contributing constructively to an existing community. Whether or not you run your own community, there&rsquo;s no harm in getting involved in others within your topic, too. This doesn&rsquo;t mean going around spamming everywhere about your podcast. It&rsquo;s about being a positive, pro-active, and helpful person. For example, you can offer answers to questions, or you could even ask some of your own. Kicking off an ongoing weekly conversation can be a great idea too. For example &ldquo;hey fellow writers, what&rsquo;s everyone been working on this week?&rdquo;, or, &ldquo;alright photographer pals, let&rsquo;s see your best shot from the past seven days&rdquo;. This positive community involvement means people get to know you - and, by default - your podcast. Some will become listeners, but even those who don&rsquo;t will appreciate the positive contribution you&rsquo;re making in your space. For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to http://thepodcasthost.com/buildingcommunity</p>]]></description><pubDate>Wed, 07 Jan 2026 18:14:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:14</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/984f244f-5e2b-4858-9671-5842291c56b0</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/984f244f-5e2b-4858-9671-5842291c56b0.mp3?t=1767809641000" length="1193722" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Whether or not you run your own community, there’s no harm in getting involved in others within your topic, too. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>312</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>312</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">88d3523b-299c-4821-9382-184cde96775e</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Starting an Online Community Around Your Show]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Starting an Online Community Around Your Show]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about starting an online community around your podcast. This lets you engage in discussion with your podcast audience. It allows you to get feedback, and generate enthusiasm. It even allows listeners to meet and get to know one another, and this is a powerful thing. There are a few plugins that let you build your community on your own WordPress site. A couple of good options here are bbPress and CM Answers. If you and your listeners are on Facebook, then you can start a group there. Discord is also an increasingly popular option amongst podcasters, too. Regardless of where you create your community, be sure to mention it in your Calls to Action, and to link clearly to it in your shownotes and website. For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to http://thepodcasthost.com/buildingcommunity</p>]]></description><pubDate>Tue, 06 Jan 2026 18:14:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:01</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/88d3523b-299c-4821-9382-184cde96775e</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/88d3523b-299c-4821-9382-184cde96775e.mp3?t=1767723241000" length="975951" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[This lets you engage in discussion with your podcast audience. It allows you to get feedback, and generate enthusiasm. It even allows listeners to meet and get to know one another, and this is a powerful thing. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>311</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>311</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">b99dcd5f-2ba8-4fde-a11e-842765ae3dcf</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Creating Memorable & Immortal Links As podcaste]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Creating Memorable & Immortal Links As podcaste]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about creating memorable and immortal links. As podcasters, we&rsquo;ll usually try to send the listener to some link or resource at least once per episode. By the way, have you taken our feedback survey yet at [thepodcasthost.com/psp](http://thepodcasthost.com/psp) ? But see, that type of link&rsquo;s exactly what I&rsquo;m talking about. It&rsquo;s short and memorable. And you can always change where it points to, further down the line. A classic example of this is a podcaster sending folks to their Patreon for 100 episodes, then, moving to a new funding platform. They now have this back catalogue full of out-of-date links. If they&rsquo;d instead used a shortlink like their podcast dot com slash support, they could&rsquo;ve just updated where that points to. If you use WordPress, then PrettyLinks is a great plugin for this. And Podpage has its own version too, if you&rsquo;re using that. So, again, that link is http://thepodcasthost.com/psp - and, when you click on that, which of course you will, look at the URL it actually goes to, and imagine me trying to read that out. Maybe that could be a review prize incentive, actually&hellip;</p>]]></description><pubDate>Mon, 05 Jan 2026 18:15:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:26</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/b99dcd5f-2ba8-4fde-a11e-842765ae3dcf</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/b99dcd5f-2ba8-4fde-a11e-842765ae3dcf.mp3?t=1767636901000" length="1373755" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[As podcasters, we’ll usually try to send the listener to some link or resource at least once per episode. So make those links as memorable and as easy to type out as you can. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>310</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>310</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">1b669634-adc7-4ea7-9256-412d7727ac11</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Tweeting About Another Podcast]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Tweeting About Another Podcast]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about tagging another podcast in a positive tweet. I know that &ldquo;positive tweet&rdquo; sounds like an oxymoron. But there apparently was a time when people acted reasonably to one another on that platform. So if you&rsquo;re on twitter, and so is a podcast in your niche that you really like, why not post a nice tweet about them? Here, you might talk a wee bit about why you like it so much. Maybe the show was also a big inspiration behind starting your own, and that&rsquo;s definitely worth mentioning too. If the podcast interacts with your tweet, it&rsquo;s going to be seen by many of their followers, some of which are going to want to check out your own show. So make sure you get a clear link to it in your bio, too. By the way, you can always tweet this show @thepodcasthost. I mean, I won&rsquo;t see it. But I&rsquo;d like to think our admin would at least tell me about it. I&rsquo;m sure they would.</p>]]></description><pubDate>Fri, 26 Dec 2025 22:19:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:00:57</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/1b669634-adc7-4ea7-9256-412d7727ac11</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/1b669634-adc7-4ea7-9256-412d7727ac11.mp3?t=1766787541000" length="914745" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[If you’re on Twitter, and so is a podcast in your niche that you really like, why not post a nice tweet about them? ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>309</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>309</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">9a364e2c-56f6-494b-af6d-97fc77266120</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Podcast Review ‘In-Content’ Incentives]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Podcast Review ‘In-Content’ Incentives]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking, again, about podcast review incentives. This time around, though, you&rsquo;re incentivising the content. So how does that look? Well, you might announce that when you hit a certain number of reviews - let&rsquo;s say, 25 - you&rsquo;ll do something a bit out of the ordinary. That could be a unique, highly-produced episode, an interview with a top-tier guest, or a live broadcast from somewhere that resonates. Depending on your niche or topic you could even vow to personally do something like run a marathon, do a parachute jump, or fast for a week. Your audience will also feel like they&rsquo;re part of something, chipping in their own reviews to edge forwards towards a collective goal. This isn&rsquo;t just a great way of getting more reviews, it&rsquo;s also a way of building community and engagement too. For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to http://thepodcasthost.com/morereviews</p>]]></description><pubDate>Thu, 25 Dec 2025 22:19:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:03</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/9a364e2c-56f6-494b-af6d-97fc77266120</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/9a364e2c-56f6-494b-af6d-97fc77266120.mp3?t=1766701141000" length="1009184" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[When incentivising the content, you might announce that when you hit a certain number of reviews - let’s say, 25 - you’ll do something a bit out of the ordinary. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>308</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>308</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">f237cbd9-5bf7-4edf-970b-5fb8dcf4c838</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Podcast Review ‘Prizes for All’ Incentives]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Podcast Review ‘Prizes for All’ Incentives]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about podcast review incentives. Another way to incentivise podcast reviews amongst your audience is to offer a prize for everyone, rather than one listener taking all in a prize draw. The same principles apply here. Listeners screenshot and email their reviews to you - that way, you know who they are, and how to get in touch with them. And they get something in return straight away. Obviously, it&rsquo;s better if this is a digital incentive. An ebook, access to a course, or a private bonus episode. You don&rsquo;t want to be posting bottles of wine all around the world, do you? Again, mention this on your episodes, but nowhere else. A bunch of low-value generic reviews will only make it look like you&rsquo;ve used a click farm to get them. And that&rsquo;s going to put more people off your content than attract them in. For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to http://thepodcasthost.com/morereviews</p>]]></description><pubDate>Wed, 24 Dec 2025 22:18:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:01</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/f237cbd9-5bf7-4edf-970b-5fb8dcf4c838</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/f237cbd9-5bf7-4edf-970b-5fb8dcf4c838.mp3?t=1766614681000" length="986224" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Another way to incentivise podcast reviews amongst your audience is to offer a prize for everyone, rather than one listener taking all in a prize draw. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>307</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>307</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">6ac519fc-23a2-4d23-bed7-421e0c23f14a</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Podcast Review Competitions]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Podcast Review Competitions]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about podcast review competitions. Here, you&rsquo;d ask each person who&rsquo;s reviewed your podcast to email you a screenshot of that review, and enter them into a prize draw. It&rsquo;s perfectly legit to incentivise reviews this way. The big caveat, though, is that this is open to your listening audience only. Not the general public. How do you ensure that? You only mention it on your episodes. That way, only your listeners will hear it. Yes you could potentially get more if you splashed it all over the internet - especially if you&rsquo;re offering a lucrative prize. But any extra reviews you get here are going to be low value. Who wants a &ldquo;great show, five stars&rdquo; comment from someone who&rsquo;s never even listened before? For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to http://thepodcasthost.com/morereviews</p>]]></description><pubDate>Tue, 23 Dec 2025 22:20:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:00:57</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/6ac519fc-23a2-4d23-bed7-421e0c23f14a</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/6ac519fc-23a2-4d23-bed7-421e0c23f14a.mp3?t=1766528401000" length="909140" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[It’s perfectly legit to incentivise reviews this way. The big caveat, though, is that this is open to your listening audience only. Not the general public. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>306</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>306</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">10adbd7c-9f1b-4cec-96c6-634ea66def49</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Asking Individual Listeners to Review Your Podcast]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Asking Individual Listeners to Review Your Podcast]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about asking individual listeners to review your podcast. Don&rsquo;t panic. This isn&rsquo;t a week-long task of sending out a personalised email to every single listener you have. Instead, it&rsquo;s about approaching three to five people who you know listen to every single episode you put out. These could be folks you&rsquo;ve heard from before via email or social media. Or, they might be active in the same online community as you. In any case, it&rsquo;s worth reaching out to them personally to ask if they fancied writing a short and honest review for your show. Most people will be only too happy to help. You can even add these reviews to your own website, and, if your listener creates any content of their own, give a link back to them. For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to http://thepodcasthost.com/morereviews</p>]]></description><pubDate>Mon, 22 Dec 2025 22:21:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:00:57</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/10adbd7c-9f1b-4cec-96c6-634ea66def49</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/10adbd7c-9f1b-4cec-96c6-634ea66def49.mp3?t=1766442061000" length="917535" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Don’t panic. This isn’t a week-long task of sending out a personalised email to every single listener you have. Instead, it’s about approaching three to five people who you know listen to every single episode you put out. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>305</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>305</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">07c9364d-fa23-41c6-b5ed-6c039b67b603</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[How to Get More Podcast Reviews]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[How to Get More Podcast Reviews]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about how to encourage podcast reviews. As we mentioned on the last episode, podcast reviews can be great &ldquo;social proof&rdquo; that you can use in your marketing and promotion. There are a few approaches and angles here, so we&rsquo;d like to spend the next few episodes running through them. But the starting point is, of course, to ask your audience. Ask them at the end of each episode, in your Call to Action. Send them to a link or page on your website where you list all the platforms they can leave a review. For example, Podchaser, Apple Podcasts, and Castbox. You might even create a few wee tutorial videos to show them how, too. This is the low-hanging fruit of getting more reviews, but there&rsquo;s more you can do too, and we&rsquo;re going to talk about them next week. For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to http://thepodcasthost.com/morereviews</p>]]></description><pubDate>Fri, 19 Dec 2025 16:57:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:04</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/07c9364d-fa23-41c6-b5ed-6c039b67b603</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/07c9364d-fa23-41c6-b5ed-6c039b67b603.mp3?t=1766163421000" length="1031264" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[As we mentioned on the last episode, podcast reviews can be great “social proof” that you can use in your marketing and promotion. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>304</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>304</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">1a14a084-dcf9-4a1c-ace0-09ae82fa32f8</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Leaving a Positive Review for Another Show in Your Niche]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Leaving a Positive Review for Another Show in Your Niche]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about leaving a positive review for another podcast. Have you ever heard the term &ldquo;a rising tide lifts all boats&rdquo;? Well, this can be true in your own podcasting niche. There are probably other podcasts out there that you enjoy, that cover similar topics, or have similar target audiences to you. Don&rsquo;t see these shows as competition. In fact, leaving a positive review for them on a platform like Podchaser can be a win-win for you both. Lots of podcasters share their reviews publicly because they&rsquo;re great &ldquo;social proof&rdquo;. So if you leave one that also happens to mention your own show, then you can end up with a few new listeners heading your way. Of course, it goes without saying that your review should focus on the podcast you&rsquo;re reviewing, rather than your own. For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to http://thepodcasthost.com/writingreviews</p>]]></description><pubDate>Thu, 18 Dec 2025 16:54:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:03</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/1a14a084-dcf9-4a1c-ace0-09ae82fa32f8</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/1a14a084-dcf9-4a1c-ace0-09ae82fa32f8.mp3?t=1766076841000" length="1006291" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Have you ever heard the term “a rising tide lifts all boats”? Well, this can be true in your own podcasting niche. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>303</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>303</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">24bb7e5e-bb0a-4bd8-beab-f9014378d545</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Growing Your Podcast Audience]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Growing Your Podcast Audience]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about growing your podcast audience. On Pocket-Sized Podcasting so far, we&rsquo;ve covered everything you need to plan and create your show. We&rsquo;ve also made sure that your podcast is optimised for growth. But now that you&rsquo;ve launched a podcast on solid foundations, how can we take things to the next level? Despite what the internet might have you believe, there&rsquo;s no &ldquo;one simple trick&rdquo; to growing a podcast audience. And it&rsquo;s certainly not the sort of thing that happens overnight. Instead, it&rsquo;s a cumulative effect of doing multiple small things over a period of time - in conjunction with the most important factor of all - creating great content. As we switch over to growth mode over the next few months, you&rsquo;re going to get one quick podcast promotion tip every day of the week. So please do make sure you&rsquo;re subscribed or following Pocket-Sized Podcasting on your listening app of choice. And, remember, we always love to hear your feedback and suggestions, which you can leave for us at http://thepodcasthost.com/psp</p>]]></description><pubDate>Wed, 17 Dec 2025 16:57:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:11</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/24bb7e5e-bb0a-4bd8-beab-f9014378d545</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/24bb7e5e-bb0a-4bd8-beab-f9014378d545.mp3?t=1765990621000" length="1141189" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[As we switch over to growth mode over the next few months, you’re going to get one quick podcast promotion tip every day of the week. So please do make sure you’re subscribed or following Pocket-Sized Podcasting on your listening app of choice.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>302</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>302</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">976a610d-724b-4d8a-8aa6-534bd7ff09e0</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Creating a ‘Start Here’ Page]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Creating a ‘Start Here’ Page]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about adding a &lsquo;Start Here&rsquo; page to your website. As podcasters, we can become desensitized to all of the content we&rsquo;ve created over a given time. You might think that your podcast, blog, coaching service, books, and other products all make perfect logical sense. But for someone landing on your site for the very first time, it can be confusing and overwhelming. Creating a &lsquo;Start Here&rsquo; page is a great way of gently introducing folks to your content. You might combine elements from your &lsquo;About&rsquo; page and full episode list. Or, you might decide to scrap the other two completely, so there&rsquo;s less confusion. Ultimately, it&rsquo;s all about managing that early journey of potential new listeners. Give them something clear and easy that feels like a quick win for them. Then, show them how to get more. For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to http://thepodcasthost.com/websitetips</p>]]></description><pubDate>Tue, 16 Dec 2025 16:55:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:03</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/976a610d-724b-4d8a-8aa6-534bd7ff09e0</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/976a610d-724b-4d8a-8aa6-534bd7ff09e0.mp3?t=1765904101000" length="1011332" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Creating a ‘Start Here’ page is a great way of gently introducing folks to your content. You might combine elements from your ‘About’ page and full episode list. Or, you might decide to scrap the other two completely, so there’s less confusion. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>301</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>301</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">d292f496-ac0d-453f-b5d5-9172b9494f7d</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Website Sharing Buttons]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Website Sharing Buttons]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about adding social sharing buttons to your website. If you&rsquo;re using a WordPress website, then it&rsquo;s worth installing a social media sharing plugin. There are plenty of good ones out there, and you can browse through them all in your &lsquo;Add New Plugins&rsquo; section. When you&rsquo;ve installed and activated one of these plugins, you&rsquo;ll see a wee row of social media icons at the bottom of each post and page, and they&rsquo;ll make it easy for anyone to share your episodes to places like Twitter and Facebook with one single click. It&rsquo;s worth mentioning, too, that if you&rsquo;re using a Podpage website, these buttons will appear on your posts automatically. Whatever route you go down, though, the main thing is that you&rsquo;re making it easy for your listeners to share your show with others. Over time, this word-of-mouth marketing can have a great impact on your overall podcast growth. For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to http://thepodcasthost.com/websitetips</p>]]></description><pubDate>Mon, 15 Dec 2025 16:52:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:04</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/d292f496-ac0d-453f-b5d5-9172b9494f7d</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/d292f496-ac0d-453f-b5d5-9172b9494f7d.mp3?t=1765817521000" length="1023179" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[If you’re using a WordPress website, then it’s worth installing a social media sharing plugin. There are plenty of good ones out there, and you can browse through them all in your ‘Add New Plugins’ section. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>300</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>300</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">d06e34ff-d08f-4831-bdf0-e0e46f9ebc1f</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Creating a ‘Contact’ Page]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Creating a ‘Contact’ Page]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about creating a &lsquo;Contact&rsquo; page on your podcast website. Every podcaster likes listener feedback, but almost every podcaster feels they rarely if ever hear from anyone. In a lot of cases, this is simply because they&rsquo;ve not made it easy enough. So instead of reading out your email address, twitter handle, and Facebook page out in your Call to Actions, just send them to yourwebsite dot com slash contact to find every way they can connect with you. You might use a contact form or survey software to better structure and organise your feedback. You could even embed a voice feedback widget from a tool like Telbee or Speakpipe here. This lets you easily collect voice questions and comments that you can use on future episodes, too. For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to http://thepodcasthost.com/websitetips</p>]]></description><pubDate>Fri, 12 Dec 2025 16:53:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:01</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/d06e34ff-d08f-4831-bdf0-e0e46f9ebc1f</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/d06e34ff-d08f-4831-bdf0-e0e46f9ebc1f.mp3?t=1765558381000" length="978501" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Every podcaster likes listener feedback, but almost every podcaster feels they rarely if ever hear from anyone. In a lot of cases, this is simply because they’ve not made it easy enough.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>299</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>299</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">4e526837-da1d-4f80-b8cf-ea2c74e184e2</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Creating a List of Podcast Episodes]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Creating a List of Podcast Episodes]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about creating a list of podcast episodes on your website. Some podcasters like to offer a full list of every episode they&rsquo;ve published to-date. Others prefer to curate a &lsquo;Best Of&rsquo; list that can help pull in new listeners. You can do this manually by embedding episode players on a page. Or, your hosting provider might have a feature where you can create this in your podcast player itself. Captivate, for example. You might even choose to create themed pages; for example, here are our listener Q&amp;A episodes, here are our how-to episodes, and here are our quick tip episodes. Ultimately, you want to turn casual listeners on these pages into subscribers, too. So remember to link to your dedicated &lsquo;Subscribe&rsquo; page as much as possible, here. For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to http://thepodcasthost.com/websitetips</p>]]></description><pubDate>Thu, 11 Dec 2025 17:09:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:05</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/4e526837-da1d-4f80-b8cf-ea2c74e184e2</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/4e526837-da1d-4f80-b8cf-ea2c74e184e2.mp3?t=1765472941000" length="1035428" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Some podcasters like to offer a full list of every episode they’ve published to-date. Others prefer to curate a ‘Best Of’ list that can help pull in new listeners.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>298</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>298</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">f9078088-7aba-4b04-a025-dd5fa81c5292</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Creating a ‘Subscribe’ Page]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Creating a ‘Subscribe’ Page]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about creating a &lsquo;Subscribe&rsquo; page on your podcast website. As we&rsquo;ve mentioned many times before, your podcast might be consumed in over 100 different places. So sending your listeners to yourwebsite dot com slash subscribe is better than trying to list them all in your Call to Action. First and foremost, a subscribe page could simply say &ldquo;find us wherever you get your podcasts&rdquo;. It doesn&rsquo;t hurt to provide links to some of the bigger platforms, too. Platforms like Apple, Spotify, and Google Podcasts. If your target audience falls into the &ldquo;non-techy&rdquo; bracket, you might also want to go into some detail about what podcasts are, how they work, and how to subscribe to them. Some podcasters even create wee &lsquo;how to subscribe&rsquo; tutorial videos for the bigger listening platforms, too. Subscribers are the lifeblood of your show, so make this as clear and as easy as possible for them, and you&rsquo;re sure to reap the benefits in the long run. For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to http://thepodcasthost.com/sharing</p>]]></description><pubDate>Wed, 10 Dec 2025 17:09:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:13</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/f9078088-7aba-4b04-a025-dd5fa81c5292</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/f9078088-7aba-4b04-a025-dd5fa81c5292.mp3?t=1765386541000" length="1171716" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[As we’ve mentioned many times before, your podcast might be consumed in over 100 different places. So sending your listeners to yourwebsite dot com slash subscribe is better than trying to list them all in your Call to Action.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>297</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>297</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">718567f5-95ac-402d-be47-9bc8c8a14151</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Creating an ‘About’ Page]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Creating an ‘About’ Page]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about creating an &lsquo;About&rsquo; page on your podcast website. The &lsquo;About&rsquo; page is traditionally the most viewed page of any website, so it&rsquo;s a good idea to take advantage of this. It should never be done as an afterthought. At first glance, you&rsquo;d think this would be all about you and your podcast. But the trick here is that it&rsquo;s actually all about your listener. This is where you can pose questions or problems that they&rsquo;re struggling with - and that you&rsquo;re uniquely set up to solve. On top of listening the benefits of what they&rsquo;ll get from listening to your podcast, you might also want to create a playlist of your most popular episodes to get them started. Of course, you will want to add a wee bit in about you, too. Credibility and personality are important. They&rsquo;re just not the things you&rsquo;d want to lead with. Again, make it about your listener first, and that&rsquo;s the best way to win them over. For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to http://thepodcasthost.com/websitetips</p>]]></description><pubDate>Tue, 09 Dec 2025 17:07:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:08</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/718567f5-95ac-402d-be47-9bc8c8a14151</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/718567f5-95ac-402d-be47-9bc8c8a14151.mp3?t=1765300021000" length="1092256" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[The ‘About’ page is traditionally the most viewed page of any website, so it’s a good idea to take advantage of this. It should never be done as an afterthought.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>296</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>296</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">64631077-8e7a-42f3-8e7f-b7678fbaf8d4</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Podcast Episode Show Notes]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Podcast Episode Show Notes]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about podcast episode show notes. Show notes are basically the blog posts that accompany your podcast episodes. Many podcasters find this stage of podcasting a bit of a chore, but there are benefits to spending a bit of time and effort on your show notes. They can help attract new listeners through search traffic, offer a handy summary of what&rsquo;s covered, and provide links and resources to anything mentioned in the episodes. That said, your podcast needs to be sustainable, or you&rsquo;ll stop doing it. So if you only have the time or energy to do a quick bullet-point summary for each episode, then that&rsquo;s absolutely fine too. Some podcasters even outsource their show notes to a professional copy writer. So you can still get all the benefits of detailed show notes without writing them yourself, if you have a bit of budget available. For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to http://thepodcasthost.com/shownotes</p>]]></description><pubDate>Mon, 08 Dec 2025 17:10:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:03</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/64631077-8e7a-42f3-8e7f-b7678fbaf8d4</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/64631077-8e7a-42f3-8e7f-b7678fbaf8d4.mp3?t=1765213801000" length="1012560" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Show notes are basically the blog posts that accompany your podcast episodes.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>295</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>295</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">ea2e0d0b-d1e6-43be-9198-28692b6e845b</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Podcast Episode Pages]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Podcast Episode Pages]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about podcast episode pages. It&rsquo;s good practice to create a page or blog post for each podcast episode you release. This gives you one handy place to share each episode, and it means all of the traffic is coming to your own platform, too. Here, the title of your episode would also be the title of your page or post. You&rsquo;d embed the episode player, preferably near the top. Whilst most folks don&rsquo;t listen to full episodes this way, it&rsquo;s good to give them a taster, and point them off to a few dedicated podcast listening platforms in the process. You&rsquo;d also add in your shownotes, containing links to anything mentioned in that episode. And you can add some episode-specific graphics or images to these pages, too. For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to http://thepodcasthost.com/websitetips</p>]]></description><pubDate>Fri, 05 Dec 2025 08:03:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:01</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/ea2e0d0b-d1e6-43be-9198-28692b6e845b</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/ea2e0d0b-d1e6-43be-9198-28692b6e845b.mp3?t=1764921781000" length="982249" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[It’s good practice to create a page or blog post for each podcast episode you release. This gives you one handy place to share each episode, and it means all of the traffic is coming to your own platform, too. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>294</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>294</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">b75b95d7-de7d-438d-8077-78511c4f9ac7</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Podcast Website Domain Names]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Podcast Website Domain Names]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about domain names for podcast websites. Whether you&rsquo;re using a default hosting provider website, a Podpage site, or a self-hosted WordPress site, you can buy and use a domain name. Domain names are, most famously, dot coms. But you can buy local variations, dot nets, or dot pretty much anything else these days. Whatever you opt for, just try to make it memorable, easy to read out, and most of all, easy to type in. Avoid things like hyphens in your domain name, too. If you&rsquo;ve got your heart set on one that is going to be tricky to punch in, then you might want to buy a few variations of it and point those to your site, too. An example of this might be a domain name with a number in it. You&rsquo;d buy one version with the number, and another version with the number spelled out. But do try your best to avoid these situations in the first place. For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to http://thepodcasthost.com/websites</p>]]></description><pubDate>Thu, 04 Dec 2025 08:05:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:08</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/b75b95d7-de7d-438d-8077-78511c4f9ac7</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/b75b95d7-de7d-438d-8077-78511c4f9ac7.mp3?t=1764835501000" length="1083223" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Whether you’re using a default hosting provider website, a Podpage site, or a self-hosted WordPress site, you can buy and use a domain name. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>293</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>293</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">c8954d31-25cd-4407-8fa8-807a4b672c1b</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Podpage Podcast Websites]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Podpage Podcast Websites]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about Podpage websites. Podpage is a service that can build you a website for your show in less than five minutes. And you don&rsquo;t need to know the slightest thing about web design, either. You can use Podpage for free, but their excellent value paid tiers offer a whole suite of additional tools for SEO, community, and monetisation. To give you a hint of the types of features at your disposal, you can keep track of ratings and reviews, get listener comments and voicemails, build a mailing list, offer memberships, and track analytics. Sure, Podpage is a third-party service so you don&rsquo;t have that 100% control and ownership as you would with a WordPress site. But for most podcasters, the pros far outweigh the cons here. And there&rsquo;s actually very little you can&rsquo;t do with a Podpage site. For a full review of the service, head on over to http://thepodcasthost.com/podpagereview</p>]]></description><pubDate>Wed, 03 Dec 2025 08:00:01 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:03</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/c8954d31-25cd-4407-8fa8-807a4b672c1b</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/c8954d31-25cd-4407-8fa8-807a4b672c1b.mp3?t=1764748802000" length="1015836" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Podpage is a service that can build you a website for your show in less than five minutes. And you don’t need to know the slightest thing about web design, either. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>292</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>292</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">cf6612ae-3a98-4b5f-a76c-53ee5efd897c</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[WordPress Podcast Websites]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[WordPress Podcast Websites]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about WordPress websites. If you&rsquo;re looking for 100% full control, ownership, and customisation options, then WordPress is for you. Here, you can use all sorts of plugins and tools to make your site do pretty much anything. You can run your entire business on there. However, all of this flexibility comes at a cost. There are always things that can break or go wrong. If you don&rsquo;t have the expertise to run a site like this, then you&rsquo;ll need to hire someone who does. There&rsquo;s nothing worse than waking up in the morning to see that your site has gone down overnight. So, is there a middle ground between a fully-fledged WordPress site and the default website given to you as part of your podcasting hosting account? Yes there is. And that&rsquo;s what we&rsquo;re going to cover on the next episode of Pocket-Sized Podcasting. For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to http://thepodcasthost.com/websites</p>]]></description><pubDate>Tue, 02 Dec 2025 08:03:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:02</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/cf6612ae-3a98-4b5f-a76c-53ee5efd897c</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/cf6612ae-3a98-4b5f-a76c-53ee5efd897c.mp3?t=1764662581000" length="990830" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[If you’re looking for 100% full control, ownership, and customisation options, then WordPress is for you. Here, you can use all sorts of plugins and tools to make your site do pretty much anything. You can run your entire business on there. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>291</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>291</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">a10ed63a-cd14-4bd5-84cc-0c322a3cd57c</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Do I Need a Podcast Website?]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Do I Need a Podcast Website?]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re asking the question &ldquo;Do I need a podcast website?&rdquo; The short answer here is &ldquo;no&rdquo;. You don&rsquo;t *need* a website for your podcast. But, the benefits of having one are almost too good to ignore. For starters, just having that one central place to send people means your podcast is a lot more shareable. We already know that podcast listening happens in hundreds of different places, so it simplifies things when you can just say &ldquo;find us on my podcast dot com&rdquo;, or whatever the url happens to be. Running your own website then means you have full control over your branding, and if you plan to sell products or services in the future too, then this is going to give you a massive head start. Your hosting provider does create a basic website for you by default. Some of these are actually pretty decent, and getting better all the time. However, there are a couple of options that can help you take it to the next level, and we&rsquo;re going to cover them on the next two episodes of Pocket-Sized Podcasting!</p>]]></description><pubDate>Mon, 01 Dec 2025 08:04:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:07</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/a10ed63a-cd14-4bd5-84cc-0c322a3cd57c</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/a10ed63a-cd14-4bd5-84cc-0c322a3cd57c.mp3?t=1764576241000" length="1071714" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[The short answer here is “no”. You don’t *need* a website for your podcast. But, the benefits of having one are almost too good to ignore. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>290</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>290</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">bc9e6496-4ff9-4716-92f3-a3c5c988c5c6</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[What Is Bit Depth?]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[What Is Bit Depth?]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about bit depth. So each audio sample &ndash; those little dots in your waveform &ndash; has a &lsquo;bit depth&rsquo;, which determines the quality of the sound. Some tools will ask you to select a bit depth prior to recording. The most common bit depths are 16, 24, and 32. As is often the case, the higher the number, the higher the quality. Higher bit depths are better at handling noise with substantial differences between its quietest and loudest parts. But this is much more relevant to musicians than it is to those of us recording the spoken word. So if you&rsquo;re asked, just opt for 16, and set your levels so nobody is at risk of peaking or clipping. Bit depth is yet another thing Alitu handles behind the scenes, too. At this rate it&rsquo;s going to be making you a cup of coffee and a sandwich, eh? Get a free trial at alitu.com - sandwiches not included. Yet.</p>]]></description><pubDate>Fri, 28 Nov 2025 17:09:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:05</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/bc9e6496-4ff9-4716-92f3-a3c5c988c5c6</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/bc9e6496-4ff9-4716-92f3-a3c5c988c5c6.mp3?t=1764349741000" length="1041275" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Some tools will ask you to select a bit depth prior to recording. The most common bit depths are 16, 24, and 32.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>289</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>289</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">2243ddf0-4cbc-4629-bc63-9722d4404db8</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[What Are Hz and Sample Rates?]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[What Are Hz and Sample Rates?]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about sample rates. Sample rates are measured in hertz, or &ldquo;Hz&rdquo;. Like bitrates, sample rates in audio determine audio quality and file size. You could compare them to pixels in a photograph. Some platforms and tools will ask you to set a sample rate prior to hitting record. The most common sample rate, and one we&rsquo;d recommend, is 44,100Hz. If you were to load up your audio in your DAW and zoom right in as far as you can, you&rsquo;d see your audio represented as little dots. The more dots per second, the higher the sample rate. Again, these are just like pixels. So next time you record in your DAW, choose 44,100Hz. Or, just use Alitu and yet again, you won&rsquo;t need to worry about this at all. For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to http://thepodcasthost.com/samplerates</p>]]></description><pubDate>Thu, 27 Nov 2025 17:08:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:05</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/2243ddf0-4cbc-4629-bc63-9722d4404db8</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/2243ddf0-4cbc-4629-bc63-9722d4404db8.mp3?t=1764263281000" length="1047840" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Like bitrates, sample rates in audio determine audio quality and file size. You could compare them to pixels in a photograph.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>288</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>288</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">55007179-02f7-4c04-9f77-05ad9e77d01e</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[What Are Bitrates in MP3s?]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[What Are Bitrates in MP3s?]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about bitrates. Bitrates represent a sliding scale of quality and size when it comes to the MP3 file format. They&rsquo;re measured in kbps, or, kilobits per second. Common bitrates for music files are 128 and 192kbps. As most podcasts are purely spoken-word content, we probably don&rsquo;t need to go this high, though. With our own shows, we tend to opt for 96kbps, but some go as low as 64kbps - most famously, Marc Maron. And he does alright, eh? If setting your bitrates manually, you&rsquo;ll also need to choose between Constant Bitrate and Variable Bitrate. For podcasting, you should always choose &ldquo;constant&rdquo;. These are options you&rsquo;ll find in any DAW when you&rsquo;re exporting your episode to MP3 form. And, surprise surprise, your pal Alitu just gets on with it and does it all for you. For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to http://thepodcasthost.com/bitrates</p>]]></description><pubDate>Wed, 26 Nov 2025 17:11:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:13</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/55007179-02f7-4c04-9f77-05ad9e77d01e</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/55007179-02f7-4c04-9f77-05ad9e77d01e.mp3?t=1764177061000" length="1170488" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Bitrates represent a sliding scale of quality and size when it comes to the MP3 file format. They’re measured in kbps, or, kilobits per second. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>287</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>287</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">e881ce42-b557-4386-871e-f84ddab203e2</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[What’s the Difference Between a WAV and an MP3?]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[What’s the Difference Between a WAV and an MP3?]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about the difference between WAV and MP3 files. The major difference between WAVs and MP3s are size and quality. WAV files contain more detail, but are also much bigger. Think of a WAV file as an original painting, and MP3 files as prints of that painting. Podcast episodes are almost always released in MP3 form because it has a good file size to quality ratio. MP3s have their own size and quality scale too. They&rsquo;re called bitrates, and we&rsquo;re going to talk about them on the next episode. WAVs are known as a &ldquo;lossless&rdquo; format because they contain the full detail of the original recording. But only a handful of people in the world could listen to spoken-word content both in its WAV form, and on a good MP3 version of it, and be able to tell the difference. MP3s keep storage and costs down for you and your listeners. And you won&rsquo;t be shocked to learn that Alitu exports your episodes in MP3 form for you, automatically. Remember, as ever, you get a free trial at http://alitu.com</p>]]></description><pubDate>Tue, 25 Nov 2025 17:10:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:12</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/e881ce42-b557-4386-871e-f84ddab203e2</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/e881ce42-b557-4386-871e-f84ddab203e2.mp3?t=1764090601000" length="1162393" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[The major difference between WAVs and MP3s are size and quality. WAV files contain more detail, but are also much bigger. Think of a WAV file as an original painting, and MP3 files as prints of that painting. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>286</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>286</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">1f23f86e-e48e-4670-a70d-6457b61b80ed</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[How Loud Should a Podcast Be?]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[How Loud Should a Podcast Be?]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re asking the question &ldquo;how loud should a podcast be?&rdquo; We&rsquo;ve talked about having consistent volume levels throughout your episodes. But what about the overall volume level of your show compared to other podcasts? Audio loudness is measured in something called &ldquo;LUFS&rdquo;, which means &ldquo;Loudness Units relative to Full Scale&rdquo;. Sound exciting, eh? Recommended podcast loudness varies, depending on who you ask, and whether your episode is mono or stereo. But a good ballpark to aim for is between -16 and -21 LUFS. You can set this process up in a DAW like Adobe Audition. Or, it&rsquo;s yet another factor that Alitu takes care of for you automatically, without you having to know anything about it. However you go about it though, your listeners will be grateful when they land on your episode after listening to another show. For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to http://thepodcasthost.com/loudness</p>]]></description><pubDate>Mon, 24 Nov 2025 17:08:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:10</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/1f23f86e-e48e-4670-a70d-6457b61b80ed</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/1f23f86e-e48e-4670-a70d-6457b61b80ed.mp3?t=1764004081000" length="1126683" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[We’ve talked about having consistent volume levels throughout your episodes. But what about the overall volume level of your show compared to other podcasts? ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>285</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>285</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">0a5efc6d-e949-4776-9c96-f0b1ced73729</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[What Is Compression?]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[What Is Compression?]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re asking the question &ldquo;what is compression?&rdquo;. No, this isn&rsquo;t about blowing your car tyres up. Compression is an audio production technique where you take the loudest bits and quietest bits of a conversation, and bring them all closer together. It&rsquo;s all about achieving volume-level consistency. Compression allows you to have loud laughter and soft whispering in your episode, and, if done well, your listener won&rsquo;t even need to adjust the volume dial. Just like noise reduction, compression needs a subtle touch, though, and it&rsquo;s easy to go overboard. We can teach you how to do it, free with Audacity, at http://thepodcasthost.com/audacitycompressor Or, once again, you can simply have Alitu do it all for you automatically without needing to know the slightest thing about how it works. Head on over to http://alitu.com to start your 7-day free trial.</p>]]></description><pubDate>Fri, 21 Nov 2025 08:01:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:04</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/0a5efc6d-e949-4776-9c96-f0b1ced73729</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/0a5efc6d-e949-4776-9c96-f0b1ced73729.mp3?t=1763712061000" length="1021219" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[No, this isn’t about blowing your car tyres up. Compression is an audio production technique where you take the loudest bits and quietest bits of a conversation, and bring them all closer together. It’s all about achieving volume-level consistency. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>284</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>284</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">44ce07d4-e11c-429b-8293-9f6643e93c5b</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Noise Reduction & Audio Clean Up]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Noise Reduction & Audio Clean Up]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about noise reduction and cleanup. Some types of background noise can be cleaned up in the post-production phase. The constant hiss of a fan, or the low static hum of a microphone, for example. Audio software has the ability to recognise this and strip it out, whilst leaving the vocals intact. Of course, it&rsquo;s easy to go overboard with this and ruin the vocals themselves. Working with noise reduction is a bit like walking a tightrope. Or, using magic in a high fantasy novel. We can teach you how to do it, free with Audacity, at http://thepodcasthost.com/audacitynoise On, if you&rsquo;re using Alitu, it&rsquo;s all done for you automatically, so you don&rsquo;t need to know a single thing about it. One final note on background noise - the environmental stuff like phones ringing and dogs barking aren&rsquo;t going to be removed by standard noise reduction processes. So always make sure you&rsquo;re recording the best possible source material. Noise reduction can help good audio to sound great, but it can never make terrible audio sound good. For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to http://thepodcasthost.com/noise</p>]]></description><pubDate>Thu, 20 Nov 2025 08:01:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:18</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/44ce07d4-e11c-429b-8293-9f6643e93c5b</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/44ce07d4-e11c-429b-8293-9f6643e93c5b.mp3?t=1763625661000" length="1252065" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Some types of background noise can be cleaned up in the post-production phase. The constant hiss of a fan, or the low static hum of a microphone, for example. Audio software has the ability to recognise this and strip it out, whilst leaving the vocals intact. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>283</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>283</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">c9027df6-2ad3-48ff-b728-2390cef80e32</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Minimum Effective Podcast Editing]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Minimum Effective Podcast Editing]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about the minimum effective podcast editing approach. Remember we talked about making mistakes during recording? Our tip was to pause, click your fingers three times into the mic, then start again. Well, now you have a quick and easy way to spot anything that needs chopping out. Aside from that, you&rsquo;ll want to &ldquo;top and tail&rdquo; your recording, cutting any preamble at the start and drawn-out goodbyes at the end. Then it&rsquo;s the cleanup and volume levelling stuff which you can either learn to do in a DAW. Or, have Alitu take care of that for you, automatically. Piece together any segments, music, or other clips in your editing software or Alitu&rsquo;s episode builder, and you&rsquo;ll be ready to export and publish. Podcast editing doesn&rsquo;t need to be a slog, especially with the right planning, processes, and tools at your disposal. For a deeper dive on our minimum effective editing approach, head on over to http://thepodcasthost.com/mee</p>]]></description><pubDate>Wed, 19 Nov 2025 08:03:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:09</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/c9027df6-2ad3-48ff-b728-2390cef80e32</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/c9027df6-2ad3-48ff-b728-2390cef80e32.mp3?t=1763539381000" length="1112970" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Remember we talked about making mistakes during recording? Our tip was to pause, click your fingers three times into the mic, then start again. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>282</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>282</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">7b1c9457-d8cb-4101-a479-6abecfc5e2ed</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[How Much Editing Should I Do?]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[How Much Editing Should I Do?]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re asking the question &ldquo;how much editing should I do?&rdquo;. As is often the case in podcasting, the answer is &ldquo;it depends&rdquo;. As we&rsquo;ve covered before, there are loads of different types of podcast. So a one-minute scripted solo show is going to need a lot less editing than a two-hour documentary-style epic. Unless you enjoy editing - and most podcasters don&rsquo;t - then you just need to do enough to make your show sound good. And then, leave it at that. Two big keys to podcasting success are consistency and sustainability. So if you find yourself spending a tonne of time bogged down in your editing software, chances are, you&rsquo;re not going to enjoy it. It won&rsquo;t be long before you convince yourself there are better things to be doing. So, how do you strike that balance between &ldquo;enough&rdquo; and &ldquo;not too much&rdquo;? On the next episode of Pocket-Sized Podcasting we&rsquo;re going to show you our Minimum Effective Editing approach, so make sure you&rsquo;re subscribed or following us on your listening app of choice.</p>]]></description><pubDate>Tue, 18 Nov 2025 08:05:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:09</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/7b1c9457-d8cb-4101-a479-6abecfc5e2ed</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/7b1c9457-d8cb-4101-a479-6abecfc5e2ed.mp3?t=1763453101000" length="1112758" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[As is often the case in podcasting, the answer is “it depends”. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>281</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>281</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">0d5b99c6-5a08-4145-a261-90df5f061099</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Editing & Producing Your Podcast]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Editing & Producing Your Podcast]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about editing and producing your podcast. This is the phase of podcasting where you chop out all your mistakes and cut the fat from your conversations. You can also clean up your audio to remove any background hiss and level it to make everything consistently loud enough. Then, you can mix in things like music, transitions, and pre-recorded segments. Naturally, this is the part of podcasting that puts tonnes of people off. Very few folks have ever used audio editing software, which is often complex and designed predominantly for musicians. But remember, this is exactly why we built Alitu. Its episode builder and editing tools are simpler than your average social media app. And as for all that cleanup and loudness stuff? That all happens automatically, so you don&rsquo;t even need to know a thing about it. Why not see for yourself, and grab a 7-day free trial? You can do just that at alitu.com</p>]]></description><pubDate>Mon, 17 Nov 2025 08:04:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:08</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/0d5b99c6-5a08-4145-a261-90df5f061099</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/0d5b99c6-5a08-4145-a261-90df5f061099.mp3?t=1763366641000" length="1088151" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[This is the phase of podcasting where you chop out all your mistakes and cut the fat from your conversations. You can also clean up your audio to remove any background hiss and level it to make everything consistently loud enough.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>280</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>280</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">eb4b089b-7bab-4ec4-8bf5-e5069d82a5af</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Where to Buy Podcast Music]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Where to Buy Podcast Music]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about where to buy podcast music. You *can* buy song licenses outright. But the most common route is to pay a monthly subscription for a service where you can use anything on there for the duration of that subscription. These libraries usually include sound effects, too. Many services grant you a lifetime license here, so you don&rsquo;t need to go back and remove music from previous episodes after you&rsquo;ve cancelled your subscription, and there are rarely download limits, either. Obviously, you should always check the Ts and Cs of any platform you decide to use, though. Two of our favourite places to buy podcast music are Epidemic and Shutterstock. If you head on over to http://ThePodcastHost.com/music we regularly have coupon code deals for them, too. Music Radio Creative are another great service that can produce voice-branded intros and outros for your show. And you&rsquo;ll also find a link to them over at http://ThePodcastHost.com/music</p>]]></description><pubDate>Fri, 14 Nov 2025 08:03:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:13</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/eb4b089b-7bab-4ec4-8bf5-e5069d82a5af</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/eb4b089b-7bab-4ec4-8bf5-e5069d82a5af.mp3?t=1763107381000" length="1172262" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[You can buy song licenses outright. But the most common route is to pay a monthly subscription for a service where you can use anything on there for the duration of that subscription. These libraries usually include sound effects, too. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>279</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>279</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">7ba19fdf-afc3-4e44-88e8-8846b9db317b</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Where to Find Free Podcast Music]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Where to Find Free Podcast Music]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about finding free podcast music. There&rsquo;s no shortage of tracks out there that you can use 100% free of charge, so long as you credit and link back to the creator in your show notes. We run a free podcast music library ourselves, and you&rsquo;re totally welcome to pick something from there. Head on over to http://ThePodcastHost.com/freemusic for a look. http://Incompetech.com is probably the most famous creative commons music resource on the web, too. There&rsquo;s tonnes of top-quality stuff over there. The big downside of free music is that a lot of other podcasters are using it. And it can be hard to build a memorable brand if your theme tune pops up again and again on countless other shows. If that&rsquo;s is a concern for you, then we&rsquo;ll cover paid options in our next episode. For our free music library though, that link once again is http://ThePodcastHost.com/freemusic</p>]]></description><pubDate>Thu, 13 Nov 2025 08:04:03 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:06</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/7ba19fdf-afc3-4e44-88e8-8846b9db317b</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/7ba19fdf-afc3-4e44-88e8-8846b9db317b.mp3?t=1763021044000" length="1063911" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[There’s no shortage of tracks out there that you can use 100% free of charge, so long as you credit and link back to the creator in your show notes. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>278</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>278</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">b58d70e3-850f-405c-b328-13e1b118334e</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[So, What Music CAN I Use in My Podcast?]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[So, What Music CAN I Use in My Podcast?]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re asking the question &ldquo;so, what music CAN I use in my podcast?&rdquo;. Whilst Harry Styles&rsquo; latest track is strictly off-limits there are plenty of music options that are safe, legal, and - in some cases - free to use on your podcast. Two terms you&rsquo;ll often come across are &ldquo;Creative Commons&rdquo; and &ldquo;Royalty-Free&rdquo;. Creative Commons usually means you can use music for free, so long as you credit and link back to the creator. Royalty-Free, on the other hand, usually means that you&rsquo;ve paid up-front for a license to use a piece of music, going forward. There are variations on Creative Commons and Royalty-Free licenses - for example, commercial and non-commercial - so our definitions shouldn&rsquo;t be taken as blanket terms. On the next couple of episodes we&rsquo;ll point you towards some resources for actually finding music for your show. In the meantime, though, be sure to check out our full guide at http://ThePodcastHost.com/music</p>]]></description><pubDate>Wed, 12 Nov 2025 08:04:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:07</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/b58d70e3-850f-405c-b328-13e1b118334e</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/b58d70e3-850f-405c-b328-13e1b118334e.mp3?t=1762934641000" length="1069956" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Whilst Harry Styles’ latest track is strictly off-limits there are plenty of music options that are safe, legal, and - in some cases - free to use on your podcast. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>277</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>277</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">be1f4433-429f-4e74-82aa-f5f7e4c02208</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Can I Use ANY Music in My Podcast?]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Can I Use ANY Music in My Podcast?]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re asking the question &ldquo;can I use ANY music in my podcast?&rdquo; The short answer here is &ldquo;no&rdquo;. And any music you hear on the radio or on your favourite Spotify playlist is probably off-limits. Be wary of myths like &ldquo;it&rsquo;s fine if it&rsquo;s less than seven seconds&rdquo; and &ldquo;it&rsquo;s okay so long as you&rsquo;re not making money with your podcast&rdquo;. &ldquo;Fair Use&rdquo; gets quoted a lot, too. Fair use is a defence you can use if you get in trouble. But who wants to get in trouble? In short, avoid this altogether. Your podcast isn&rsquo;t going to live or die based on whether you have Bohemian Rhapsody as your theme tune. And if it does? Well, then we need to get back to the content planning stages, don&rsquo;t we? For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to http://ThePodcastHost.com/Copyright</p>]]></description><pubDate>Tue, 11 Nov 2025 08:05:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:00:56</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/be1f4433-429f-4e74-82aa-f5f7e4c02208</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/be1f4433-429f-4e74-82aa-f5f7e4c02208.mp3?t=1762848301000" length="899173" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[The short answer here is “no”. And any music you hear on the radio or on your favourite Spotify playlist is probably off-limits. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>276</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>276</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">4fd70723-57aa-48a8-9a84-89a37e49c9e6</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Do I Need Podcast Music?]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Do I Need Podcast Music?]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re asking the question &ldquo;do I need podcast music?&rdquo; There&rsquo;s no rule to say that your show&nbsp;*must*&nbsp;have music. But many podcasters stick some at the beginning and end of the show to add that extra layer of professionalism and identity. Just be wary of letting music play on its own for any longer than ten seconds on your podcast. Whilst TV and film can get away with this because of their visual elements, it doesn&rsquo;t work that way in audio. Your listeners are plugging in to hear from you - not an extended version of your theme tune. You can also use music as transitions in-between segments, or as &ldquo;beds&rdquo; underneath speech. For most podcasters though, this is overkill, and you run the risk of annoying your listener rather than impressing them. For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to http://ThePodcastHost.com/music</p>]]></description><pubDate>Mon, 10 Nov 2025 08:05:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:06</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/4fd70723-57aa-48a8-9a84-89a37e49c9e6</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/4fd70723-57aa-48a8-9a84-89a37e49c9e6.mp3?t=1762761901000" length="1051288" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[There’s no rule to say that your show must have music. But many podcasters stick some at the beginning and end of the show to add that extra layer of professionalism and identity.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>275</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>275</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">780b929e-f083-40ff-8834-88870f069e13</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Encouraging Guests to Share Your Episodes]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Encouraging Guests to Share Your Episodes]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about encouraging guests to share your episodes. Whether we like it or not, no guest is obliged to share your content with their audience. But if you follow the advice in the previous episodes, your chat should be memorable enough to make them want to. The key is to ask nicely, and to make it easy for them. Be sure to succinctly remind them why you think the conversation will be interesting and valuable to *their* audience. Some podcasters even pre-write a tweet so all the groundwork is done for them. If you go the extra mile and create some nice blog and social graphics around the interview, that&rsquo;s going to make it more shareable, too. Oh, and one final tip - why not have some branded podcast swag sent over to them via a service like GuestBoxLove? For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to http://ThePodcastHost.com/GuestSharing</p>]]></description><pubDate>Fri, 07 Nov 2025 08:06:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:18</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/780b929e-f083-40ff-8834-88870f069e13</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/780b929e-f083-40ff-8834-88870f069e13.mp3?t=1762502761000" length="1244375" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Whether we like it or not, no guest is obliged to share your content with their audience. But if you follow the advice in the previous episodes, your chat should be memorable enough to make them want to. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>274</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>274</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">eb454e9b-91f5-4002-a46a-337aeb9b26bc</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Powerful Podcast Interview Questions]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Powerful Podcast Interview Questions]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about &ldquo;super&rdquo; podcast interview questions. When you cover the basics well, you can go the extra mile to help make your guest stand out from everyone else. Here are some fun questions that can entertain your listener whilst still leaving them with a few useful insights, too. - What are you NOT Very Good at? - Tell me something that&rsquo;s true&nbsp;that almost nobody agrees with you on. - When did you last change your mind about something? - Room, desk and car &ndash; which do you clean first? - What&rsquo;s the very first thing you think about when you wake up in the morning? These questions allow for that essential human touch. They can throw up humility, authenticity, wisdom, and even, a wee bit of controversy. They&rsquo;ll leave a lasting impression in the minds of your listeners, and that&rsquo;s ultimately what gets them sharing your content, and keeps them coming back for more. For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to http://ThePodcastHost.com/questions</p>]]></description><pubDate>Thu, 06 Nov 2025 08:04:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:12</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/eb454e9b-91f5-4002-a46a-337aeb9b26bc</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/eb454e9b-91f5-4002-a46a-337aeb9b26bc.mp3?t=1762416241000" length="1147295" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[When you cover the basics well, you can go the extra mile to help make your guest stand out from everyone else. Here are some fun questions that can entertain your listener whilst still leaving them with a few useful insights, too. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>273</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>273</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">f393c9bd-253c-4df1-acc2-ea19b3a8dcdc</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Asking Core Questions About the Topic]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Asking Core Questions About the Topic]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about core questions around the conversation topic. Here we can dig in and explore by asking your guest some seemingly provocative questions. They&rsquo;ll usually be glad to answer these as it gives them a chance to counter claims they&rsquo;ll hear a lot. &ldquo;So, you&rsquo;re a Vegan Baking Specialist &ndash; isn&rsquo;t it really hard to bake without eggs?&rdquo; Or &ldquo;Doesn&rsquo;t home schooling just deprive kids of making friends?&rdquo; Here, you can pick out some common myths or misconceptions to talk through and clarify. You might also want to ask a question like &ldquo;what&rsquo;s the most common reason people fail at this?&rdquo; which sounds negative, but can throw up some really actionable answers. Then there&rsquo;s the classic &ldquo;what&rsquo;s the one thing you wish you knew when you were just getting started?&rdquo; which puts a much better spin on the old &ldquo;advice for folks just starting out&rdquo; question. For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to http://ThePodcastHost.com/questions</p>]]></description><pubDate>Wed, 05 Nov 2025 08:06:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:16</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/f393c9bd-253c-4df1-acc2-ea19b3a8dcdc</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/f393c9bd-253c-4df1-acc2-ea19b3a8dcdc.mp3?t=1762329961000" length="1224333" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Here we can dig in and explore by asking your guest some seemingly provocative questions. They’ll usually be glad to answer these as it gives them a chance to counter claims they’ll hear a lot. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>272</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>272</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">5772e6af-9671-4ece-875b-548bed8e6f5c</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Asking Core Questions About the Guest]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Asking Core Questions About the Guest]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about core questions to ask your guest. This is another wing to your storytelling angle. It lets the listener focus on the guest themselves. People love to hear things in context, after all. &ldquo;Believe in yourself and never give up!&rdquo; is all well and good. But people often can&rsquo;t see that applying to them&hellip; until they hear a story about it happening to someone else. Here are some examples of questions that can lead to engaging and insightful podcast interviews. - Which hurdles did you personally face and how did&nbsp;you overcome them? - Was it obvious or did you stumble upon the answers? - How did you get started? Talk me through it. - What compelled you to become a screenwriter? Again, this gives your listener a peek behind the curtain and shows them that the guest was once in a similar position as they are now. And what could be more encouraging than that? For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to http://ThePodcastHost.com/questions</p>]]></description><pubDate>Tue, 04 Nov 2025 08:06:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:20</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/5772e6af-9671-4ece-875b-548bed8e6f5c</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/5772e6af-9671-4ece-875b-548bed8e6f5c.mp3?t=1762243561000" length="1280994" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[This is another wing to your storytelling angle. It lets the listener focus on the guest themselves. People love to hear things in context, after all.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>271</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>271</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">752dd78f-f1cc-418b-9cfc-8c28f025a68e</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Seek Out Stories in Your Interviews]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Seek Out Stories in Your Interviews]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about seeking out stories in podcast interviews. As we&rsquo;ve mentioned on the show before, stories are the original and best type of shareable content. There&rsquo;s a subtle but powerful difference between &ldquo;here&rsquo;s how to grow a business&rdquo; and &ldquo;here&rsquo;s how *I* grew *my* business&rdquo;. Stories are never just straightforward routes to success either. They&rsquo;re littered with setbacks, conflicts, emotions, and even seemingly &ldquo;all is lost&rdquo; moments. Your listener wants to live through these with you and learn from the experiences, not just the end product. It&rsquo;s worth asking your guest if they have any interesting or entertaining stories before you hit the record button, too. Don&rsquo;t let them actually tell you the story there and then. All you need is a heads up so you can prompt them about it during their interview, then, introduce it naturally. For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to ThePodcastHost.com/interviewprep</p>]]></description><pubDate>Mon, 03 Nov 2025 08:05:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:20</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/752dd78f-f1cc-418b-9cfc-8c28f025a68e</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/752dd78f-f1cc-418b-9cfc-8c28f025a68e.mp3?t=1762157101000" length="1280218" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[There’s a subtle but powerful difference between “here’s how to grow a business” and “here’s how I grew my business”. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>270</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>270</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">25d5184a-69e9-4dc8-a716-3b555c1703a2</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Should I Send Questions in Advance?]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Should I Send Questions in Advance?]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re asking the question &ldquo;should I send questions over to guests in advance?&rdquo; You&rsquo;ll probably have a list of pre-written questions as a framework for your interviews. But as we&rsquo;ve covered already, you won&rsquo;t want to ask these in a linear &lsquo;game show host&rsquo; style. On top of that, sending a guest a list of questions in advance can cause them to overthink and rehearse answers. This doesn&rsquo;t make for a very engaging or authentic conversation. Certain questions *are* worth pre-warning about, though. These are what&rsquo;s known as &ldquo;thinkers&rdquo;. An example might be something like &ldquo;what&rsquo;s your favourite book?&rdquo; or &ldquo;what advice do you have for someone just starting out?&rdquo;. It&rsquo;s unlikely anyone can give genuine answers to questions like these on the spot, so they&rsquo;re definitely worth a heads up in advance. But - these are the exception to the rule. For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to http://ThePodcastHost.com/interviewprep</p>]]></description><pubDate>Fri, 31 Oct 2025 08:29:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:00:46</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/25d5184a-69e9-4dc8-a716-3b555c1703a2</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/25d5184a-69e9-4dc8-a716-3b555c1703a2.mp3?t=1761899341000" length="738619" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[You’ll probably have a list of pre-written questions as a framework for your interviews. But as we’ve covered already, you won’t want to ask these in a linear ‘game show host’ style. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>269</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>269</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">7731ffb6-3986-4353-9df5-e1db5f8ff19f</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Asking Follow-Up Questions]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Asking Follow-Up Questions]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about asking follow-up questions. So your guest just finishes telling you they built a time machine, travelled back 70 million years, and shot a T-Rex. You take a look at your next question and ask &ldquo;so, what&rsquo;s your favourite WordPress plugin?&rdquo;. Interviewers who actually listen to their guests and ask good follow-up questions often find the real gold. Questions like &ldquo;why do you think that?&rdquo; &ldquo;what was that like?&rdquo; Or, &ldquo;could you explain what this means?&rdquo; can lead you to some fantastic content. Sure, have a list of pre-written questions. But use these as a framework or backup if things fall flat. Always pick up on threads that seem interesting or curious. Even if you know the answer, your listener might not. And you&rsquo;re here to bring value to them, not to make them feel dumb, left out, or wanting more. For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to http://ThePodcastHost.com/podcastinterviews</p>]]></description><pubDate>Thu, 30 Oct 2025 08:27:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:00:56</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/7731ffb6-3986-4353-9df5-e1db5f8ff19f</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/7731ffb6-3986-4353-9df5-e1db5f8ff19f.mp3?t=1761812821000" length="897275" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Interviewers who actually listen to their guests and ask good follow-up questions often find the real gold. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>268</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>268</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">56db6e4b-2dcf-4c8b-9d60-235c00d84b61</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Introducing Podcast Guests]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Introducing Podcast Guests]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about introducing your podcast guests. It&rsquo;s those dreaded words &ldquo;so, tell us a bit about yourself&rdquo; that can lead to you waking up, six hours later, listening to an interviewee ramble on about his toy car collection. This isn&rsquo;t the guest's fault. They&rsquo;ve just been handed the mic and let off the leash with no real direction. They don&rsquo;t know your audience. But you do. And it&rsquo;s your job to succinctly introduce your guest to them with a quick rundown of who they are, and *why they&rsquo;re here.* Remember we talked about the value your guest will bring? Well, let your listener know that as soon as possible. Keep them engaged and tuned in. Sure, there&rsquo;s room to explore personal and off-topic stuff, but that should be done towards the end - after you&rsquo;ve given your listener the content they&rsquo;ve been promised. For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to http://ThePodcastHost.com/podcastinterviews</p>]]></description><pubDate>Wed, 29 Oct 2025 08:29:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:00:55</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/56db6e4b-2dcf-4c8b-9d60-235c00d84b61</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/56db6e4b-2dcf-4c8b-9d60-235c00d84b61.mp3?t=1761726541000" length="890178" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[It’s those dreaded words “so, tell us a bit about yourself” that can lead to you waking up, six hours later, listening to an interviewee ramble on about his toy car collection. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>267</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>267</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">17bc36b7-ba08-4d27-bb77-aae3c62085b5</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Why Is This Guest on My Show?]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Why Is This Guest on My Show?]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re asking the question &ldquo;why is this guest on my show?&rdquo;. Now that might sound a little rude, but don&rsquo;t worry, this is the question we ask ourselves *before* we even invite someone onto our podcast. In order to answer this question, you need to put yourself in the shoes&hellip; or earbuds&hellip; of your audience. Ask yourself &ldquo;what value can this person bring to my listener?&rdquo;. Will they teach them something? Motivate them? Make them laugh? Your listener&rsquo;s attention is precious, and you&rsquo;re one of the few people they trust with it. So once you know *why* you&rsquo;re bringing a person onto your show, you can prepare properly to make sure they get the maximum value from that time. Everyone wins here - your audience enjoys it, your guest sounds great, and your show has its desired impact which helps it to grow. For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to http://ThePodcastHost.com/podcastinterviews</p>]]></description><pubDate>Tue, 28 Oct 2025 08:29:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:00:55</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/17bc36b7-ba08-4d27-bb77-aae3c62085b5</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/17bc36b7-ba08-4d27-bb77-aae3c62085b5.mp3?t=1761640141000" length="886792" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[In order to answer this question, you need to put yourself in the shoes… or earbuds… of your audience. Ask yourself “what value can this person bring to my listener?”. Will they teach them something? Motivate them? Make them laugh? ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>266</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>266</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">014a0ced-ecb3-4e5d-80cf-a578dca5658f</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Finding Podcast Guests]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Finding Podcast Guests]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about finding podcast guests. If you run an interview podcast, it can be challenging to get folks to come on your show at first. A great starting point is to approach other podcasters in your niche. They already know how it all works, and you know they&rsquo;ll sound great, too. On top of that, if they share the episode with their own audience it&rsquo;s going to send some early traffic your way. Then, there are YouTubers, bloggers, or authors who&rsquo;re typically always up for a chat, too. There are even dedicated services to help you find interviewees. Or even, to get booked as a guest on other shows, too. Check out Podchaser Connect, PodcastGuests.com, or Matchmaker FM for three of our favourites. Or, get our full guide to this topic including links to the sites mentioned here, head on over to http://ThePodcastHost.com/guests</p>]]></description><pubDate>Mon, 27 Oct 2025 08:28:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:00:59</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/014a0ced-ecb3-4e5d-80cf-a578dca5658f</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/014a0ced-ecb3-4e5d-80cf-a578dca5658f.mp3?t=1761553681000" length="946738" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[If you run an interview podcast, it can be challenging to get folks to come on your show at first. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>265</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>265</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">0e705f7d-6870-44e1-92c0-c63975cb920a</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Organising Guests or Co-Hosts]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Organising Guests or Co-Hosts]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about organising guests or co-hosts. If you think tech and equipment can be challenging, then you should try wrangling humans. Your guests or co-hosts could live in any time zones around the globe. They might be super-organised, but they might also be pretty shambolic, easily distracted, and forgetful. Then, there&rsquo;s the conversations themselves. How do you make people sound their best on your show? Even if they&rsquo;re giving you little more than one-word answers. OR, aren&rsquo;t letting you get a word in edgeways? On the next few episodes we&rsquo;re going to give you some essential tips on organising and talking to your guests and co-hosts, so make sure you&rsquo;re subscribed to Pocket-Sized Podcasting on your listening app of choice. You won&rsquo;t want to miss this. Finally, we always love to hear your feedback on the show. What do you like about it? And what might we do to make it even better? Be sure to let us know, quickly and easily, over at http://ThePodcastHost.com/PSP</p>]]></description><pubDate>Fri, 24 Oct 2025 07:28:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:04</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/0e705f7d-6870-44e1-92c0-c63975cb920a</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/0e705f7d-6870-44e1-92c0-c63975cb920a.mp3?t=1761290881000" length="1022319" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[If you think tech and equipment can be challenging, then you should try wrangling humans. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>264</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>264</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">c0268ff0-66f4-4d44-9796-43cdca3a75a5</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Booking Tools for Guests or Co-Hosts]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Booking Tools for Guests or Co-Hosts]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about booking tools for organising guests or co-hosts. Different time zones and scheduling conflicts can drop you into an endless cycle of messages where days and times are suggested but never agreed upon. If you&rsquo;re regularly trying to arrange suitable dates and times with others, it&rsquo;s well worth using a tool like Calendly or Book Like a Boss. These platforms can show folks all the times you&rsquo;re available, and they simply need to pick a slot that suits them. Another great tool is Doodle which comes in handy for organising groups of three or more. A Doodle poll lets people pick all their available times, and then you&rsquo;ll see - at a glance - the ones that everyone can manage. Again, those three tools are Doodle, Calendly, and Book Like a Boss. For a deeper dive on this topic, and for links to the platforms mentioned, head on over to ThePodcastHost.com/booking</p>]]></description><pubDate>Thu, 23 Oct 2025 07:31:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:00:55</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/c0268ff0-66f4-4d44-9796-43cdca3a75a5</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/c0268ff0-66f4-4d44-9796-43cdca3a75a5.mp3?t=1761204661000" length="879995" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[If you’re regularly trying to arrange suitable dates and times with others, it’s well worth using a tool like Calendly or Book Like a Boss. These platforms can show folks all the times you’re available, and they simply need to pick a slot that suits them. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>263</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>263</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">3f928ed4-aa55-4e20-a499-ac910a282c23</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[What if I Make a Mistake When Recording?]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[What if I Make a Mistake When Recording?]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about making mistakes during recording. Stumbles and stammers are natural. But, if you always stop and start again, thinking &ldquo;I&rsquo;ll just edit that out&rdquo;, then your podcast is going to become time-consuming or expensive to create. With minor mistakes, just quickly correct yourself, make light of it, and press on. Of course, there are times when you&rsquo;ll want to get something spot on. Maybe you&rsquo;re presenting a fact, or making a very serious point. When you make a mistake here, just pause, click your fingers three times in front of the mic, then start again. If you do this, you&rsquo;ll quickly and easily spot essential edit points in the production phase. And as for the minor stuff, just let it go. You&rsquo;ll grow into a much more accomplished presenter over time this way, as opposed to the folks who use editing as a crutch in an attempt to make them sound flawless. For a deeper dive on this topic, head over to https://www.thepodcasthost.com/editfaster</p>]]></description><pubDate>Wed, 22 Oct 2025 07:28:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:06</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/3f928ed4-aa55-4e20-a499-ac910a282c23</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/3f928ed4-aa55-4e20-a499-ac910a282c23.mp3?t=1761118081000" length="1062447" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Stumbles and stammers are natural. But, if you always stop and start again, thinking “I’ll just edit that out”, then your podcast is going to become time-consuming or expensive to create. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>262</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>262</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">7d1e8096-b18e-4561-b1a6-ebd11a959880</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Mic Technique]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Mic Technique]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about how it&rsquo;s not the size or the shape that matters, but how you use it. We&rsquo;re talking, of course, about mic technique. The optimal positioning of a mic depends on your own unique voice and style. A good starting point, though, is the distance between the tips of your thumb and pinkie on an outstretched hand. Then, adjust accordingly. Always try to mount your mic in a stand or boom arm, rather than holding it. This will give you a lot more consistency of sound, and prevent unwanted handling noise. Finally, use a windshield or pop filter on your mic, especially if you prefer to get right up close to it when talking. Using your mic well in a treated environment means you&rsquo;ll get good audio even with the most low-cost setup. So follow these quick steps and your podcast will sound much more professional. For a deeper dive on this topic, head over to http://thepodcasthost.com/mictechnique</p>]]></description><pubDate>Tue, 21 Oct 2025 07:30:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:04</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/7d1e8096-b18e-4561-b1a6-ebd11a959880</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/7d1e8096-b18e-4561-b1a6-ebd11a959880.mp3?t=1761031801000" length="1027950" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[We’re talking about how it’s not the size or the shape that matters, but how you use it. 

We’re talking, of course, about mic technique.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>261</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>261</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">5fb70444-4f39-4690-bdca-a65491fb58ba</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Minimising Recording Interruptions]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Minimising Recording Interruptions]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about minimising interruptions to your recording session. These are the low-hanging fruits of making your podcast easier to edit, sound better, and generally cause you less frustration. To deal with the digital side of things, you should close any apps that are going to ping or distract you when you&rsquo;re recording. I&rsquo;m looking at you, Slack. Then, it&rsquo;s worth telling anyone you live with that you&rsquo;re going to be recording for the next hour or so. An extreme measure might be a &ldquo;do not disturb&rdquo; sign on your door, but most people will only need a quick heads up. Finally, get that phone on silent and keep it away from you during the show. These are three quick and simple tips, but they really can make a world of difference. For a deeper dive on this topic, head over to http://thepodcasthost.com/noise</p>]]></description><pubDate>Mon, 20 Oct 2025 07:31:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:00:55</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/5fb70444-4f39-4690-bdca-a65491fb58ba</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/5fb70444-4f39-4690-bdca-a65491fb58ba.mp3?t=1760945461000" length="875715" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[These are the low-hanging fruits of making your podcast easier to edit, sound better, and generally cause you less frustration.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>260</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>260</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">af86dfbf-3610-4935-8a82-7544cd3c57f4</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Should I Eat Before Recording?]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Should I Eat Before Recording?]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about what you should eat before a recording session. It&rsquo;s worth saying right away, that, unless you run an ASMR podcast, you probably want to avoid eating *during* a recording session. Some podcasters feel they have more energy if they&rsquo;re in a bit of a fasted state when they get behind the mic. Others will snack beforehand on foods that aren&rsquo;t likely to dry out their mouth or cause brain fog. Many voice coaches swear by green apples for hydrating the mouth. Some other podcasters we know use liquorice to soothe their throats. Nuts and seeds also make for useful pre-recording snacks, whilst common things to avoid are dairy, overly-salty foods, and refined sugars. But, you should always get to know your own body and your own reaction to foods. Everyone&rsquo;s different, after all. So only ever do what works best for you. And, for a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to http://ThePodcastHost.com/food</p>]]></description><pubDate>Fri, 17 Oct 2025 07:29:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:09</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/af86dfbf-3610-4935-8a82-7544cd3c57f4</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/af86dfbf-3610-4935-8a82-7544cd3c57f4.mp3?t=1760686141000" length="1104931" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[It’s worth saying right away, that, unless you run an ASMR podcast, you probably want to avoid eating during a recording session. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>259</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>259</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">c3dd5b20-4ca0-44b5-b2cc-fb34848b8a3e</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[What Should I Drink Before or During Recording?]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[What Should I Drink Before or During Recording?]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about what you should drink before or during recording. Getting behind the mic whilst dehydrated is a bad idea for a couple of reasons. Firstly, you&rsquo;re just going to have less energy and feel a bit groggy. Secondly, you&rsquo;re going to make more dry lip-smacking mouth noises that&rsquo;ll have your listener reaching for the &lsquo;unsubscribe&rsquo; button. So be sure to have some water before and during your session. Don&rsquo;t go overboard, though, as over-hydration can lead to excessive mouth noises, too. Plus, There&rsquo;s nothing worse than needing a pee ten minutes into an engaging interview. For some podcasters, coffee is their superpower. For others, it can really dry out their mouths. Only you&rsquo;ll know best what camp you fall into here. In summary, though, a moderate amount of water before and during recording works best for the vast majority of podcasters. But, for a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to http://ThePodcastHost.com/drink</p>]]></description><pubDate>Thu, 16 Oct 2025 07:30:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:07</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/c3dd5b20-4ca0-44b5-b2cc-fb34848b8a3e</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/c3dd5b20-4ca0-44b5-b2cc-fb34848b8a3e.mp3?t=1760599801000" length="1070380" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Getting behind the mic whilst dehydrated is a bad idea for a couple of reasons. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>258</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>258</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">1e216839-6a08-4292-9bc1-a9c631ef610c</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Pre-Recording Practicalities]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Pre-Recording Practicalities]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about pre-recording practicalities. This is the less glamorous but still vitally important side of recording. Your gear and environment aren&rsquo;t the only factors that&rsquo;ll determine whether you sound like a seasoned pro or a complete beginner. As the old saying goes - &ldquo;failing to prepare is preparing to fail&rdquo;. Or, here&rsquo;s a good one to test your mic&rsquo;s pop filter - &ldquo;prior preparation prevents poor performance.&rdquo; On the next few episodes, we&rsquo;ll take a look at things like mic technique, minimising interruptions, and even how what you eat or drink can affect your show&rsquo;s audio quality. Finally, we always love to hear your feedback on Pocket-Sized Podcasting. What do you like about the show? And what might we do to make it even better? Be sure to let us know, quickly and easily, over at http://ThePodcastHost.com/PSP</p>]]></description><pubDate>Wed, 15 Oct 2025 07:29:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:01</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/1e216839-6a08-4292-9bc1-a9c631ef610c</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/1e216839-6a08-4292-9bc1-a9c631ef610c.mp3?t=1760513341000" length="976937" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[This is the less glamorous but still vitally important side of recording. Your gear and environment aren’t the only factors that’ll determine whether you sound like a seasoned pro or a complete beginner. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>257</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>257</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">db0e5114-9cc6-4a50-b4c6-68e120c6a757</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[What Makes a Good Podcast Outro?]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[What Makes a Good Podcast Outro?]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about what to include in your podcast outro. Just like the podcast intro, there are no &ldquo;rules&rdquo; as such, but if you want to close your episode effectively, think about the following. Send them to ONE place - your website. Here they can find show notes with links to everything mentioned in the episode. Put transcriptions and follow-up resources here, too. Next, include ONE &lsquo;Call to Action&rsquo; - for example, &ldquo;subscribe to the podcast&rdquo;. If you give them too much to do, chances are, they won&rsquo;t do any of it. Other CTA options might be things like &ldquo;tell a friend&rdquo;, &ldquo;buy the book&rdquo;, or &ldquo;support the show&rdquo;. Finally, if possible, offer them a teaser for the next episode. Whet their appetite for what&rsquo;s in store, and keep your show fresh in their mind until a new one drops. For a deeper dive on this topic, head over to http://thepodcasthost.com/outros</p>]]></description><pubDate>Tue, 14 Oct 2025 07:29:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:06</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/db0e5114-9cc6-4a50-b4c6-68e120c6a757</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/db0e5114-9cc6-4a50-b4c6-68e120c6a757.mp3?t=1760426941000" length="1053556" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Just like the podcast intro, there are no “rules” as such, but if you want to close your episode effectively, think about the following. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>256</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>256</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">c5c10ba0-07af-4756-96f2-6a3309822919</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[What Makes a Good Podcast Outro?]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[What Makes a Good Podcast Outro?]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re asking the question &ldquo;what makes a good podcast outro?&rdquo;. The final minute or two of your episode goes towards creating a lasting impression in the mind of your listener. You might have done a great job with the intro and main content. But if the show ends poorly, this can be the difference between a new listener hitting subscribe or not. The job of the outro is essentially to thank the listener for their time. Then, point them in the direction of any vital resources mentioned in the episode. It&rsquo;s also the part where you can ask for something in return. If a listener has stayed to the end they&rsquo;ve probably enjoyed the episode, so they might be more willing to respond to your request for something like a rating, review, or even a sale. For a deeper dive on this topic, head over to http://thepodcasthost.com/outros</p>]]></description><pubDate>Mon, 13 Oct 2025 07:30:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:00:57</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/c5c10ba0-07af-4756-96f2-6a3309822919</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/c5c10ba0-07af-4756-96f2-6a3309822919.mp3?t=1760340601000" length="907044" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[The final minute or two of your episode goes towards creating a lasting impression in the mind of your listener.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>255</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>255</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">835afa33-10d8-40fe-a9cd-1ba7e605dc21</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Using Cold Opens]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Using Cold Opens]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about the &ldquo;Cold Open&rdquo;. You know when you sit down to watch your favourite TV show and the episode starts before you&rsquo;ve even opened your bag of Doritos? Then, after about five minutes, the intro kicks in? Well, that&rsquo;s what&rsquo;s known as a &ldquo;cold open&ldquo;. Many podcasters use cold opens at the beginning of their episodes. You&rsquo;ve probably heard them before. You hit play and immediately seem to have landed bang in the middle of a guest explaining &ldquo;&hellip;so it was at this point I decided to wear a diving suit made of sirloin steaks and go swimming with sharks.&rdquo; Obviously, the idea is that you think &ldquo;wait, how is this idiot still alive to tell the tale? I need to get the full story.&rdquo; And you keep on listening. Cold opens can be a compelling way to hook listeners. And, for a deeper dive on how to get the best from them, head over to http://ThePodcastHost.com/ColdOpens</p>]]></description><pubDate>Fri, 10 Oct 2025 07:22:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:01</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/835afa33-10d8-40fe-a9cd-1ba7e605dc21</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/835afa33-10d8-40fe-a9cd-1ba7e605dc21.mp3?t=1760080921000" length="979981" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[You know when you sit down to watch your favourite TV show and the episode starts before you’ve even opened your bag of Doritos? Then, after about five minutes, the intro kicks in? Well, that’s what’s known as a “cold open“.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>254</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>254</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">e3ad009e-356c-4a51-a42c-f382be486152</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Hooking Your Listener Early]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Hooking Your Listener Early]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about hooking your listener early. Podcast listeners are selfish. I don&rsquo;t mean that in a bad way. It&rsquo;s just that everyone tunes into content with one question in mind - &ldquo;what&rsquo;s in this for me?&rdquo;. If anything is drawn out, confusing, or ambiguous, it&rsquo;s easy for them to lose interest and switch off. You always have creative freedom with your podcast. But here&rsquo;s a template you can use as a starting point. &ldquo;Hello and welcome to the *blank* Podcast. This is the show for *blank*, all about *blank*, and on this episode, have you ever struggled with *blank*? Well, that&rsquo;s exactly what we&rsquo;re going to help you with on this week&rsquo;s show, where you&rsquo;ll learn how to *blank*&rdquo; Your target listener hears this and thinks &ldquo;this is exactly what I&rsquo;ve been looking for&rdquo;. And then, all you need to do is deliver on your promise... For a deeper dive on this topic, head over to https://www.thepodcasthost.com/strongstarts</p>]]></description><pubDate>Thu, 09 Oct 2025 07:22:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:06</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/e3ad009e-356c-4a51-a42c-f382be486152</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/e3ad009e-356c-4a51-a42c-f382be486152.mp3?t=1759994521000" length="1056622" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Podcast listeners are selfish. I don’t mean that in a bad way. It’s just that everyone tunes into content with one question in mind - “what’s in this for me?”. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>253</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>253</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">6d0a5f2e-7959-4216-873a-b184f9ee3ecf</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[What to Include in Your Episode Intros]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[What to Include in Your Episode Intros]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about what to include in your episode intros. There are few &ldquo;rules&rdquo; in podcasting - it&rsquo;s a creative medium, after all. With that said, you can really optimise the intro of your episodes if you include the following things. Firstly, let the listener know who they&rsquo;re talking to. So, whether you go by your real name or a nickname - introduce yourself. Next, - the title of the show. You might assume they already know it. But they might be working through a huge playlist of new podcasts they&rsquo;re trying out. Then, crucially, tell them who it's for and what&rsquo;s in it for them. So, the overall podcast topic might be &ldquo;to learn Spanish&rdquo;, and the subject of this episode might be &ldquo;ordering at a restaurant&rdquo;. We&rsquo;re going to cover this in more detail on the next episode when we talk about hooking your listeners early. For a deeper dive on this topic, head over to https://www.thepodcasthost.com/strongstarts</p>]]></description><pubDate>Wed, 08 Oct 2025 07:23:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:06</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/6d0a5f2e-7959-4216-873a-b184f9ee3ecf</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/6d0a5f2e-7959-4216-873a-b184f9ee3ecf.mp3?t=1759908181000" length="1051122" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[There are few “rules” in podcasting - it’s a creative medium, after all. With that said, you can really optimise the intro of your episodes if you include the following things. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>252</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>252</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">706f9447-0161-440c-a418-6a17980ae2a6</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Introducing & Ending Your Episodes]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Introducing & Ending Your Episodes]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about introducing and ending your episodes. Obviously, the most important part of any podcast episode is its main content. But the way you open and close your episodes is vital when it comes to listeners even getting to that stage. Think about it, each episode you release is going to be someone&rsquo;s first impression of your show. On top of that, you only have five minutes to &ldquo;hook&rdquo; a third of all podcast listeners. That&rsquo;s according to recent data from our Podcast Discoverability survey. So you need to leave them in absolutely no doubt that this episode is a must-listen. Then, after you&rsquo;ve delivered on your promise, you need to finish strongly enough that they&rsquo;ll come back for more. On the following episodes, we&rsquo;ll have some tips and pointers to help you do just that. For a deeper dive on this topic, head over to https://www.thepodcasthost.com/strongstarts And, remember to leave your feedback for Pocket-Sized Podcasting at http://ThePodcastHost.com/PSP</p>]]></description><pubDate>Tue, 07 Oct 2025 07:24:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:09</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/706f9447-0161-440c-a418-6a17980ae2a6</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/706f9447-0161-440c-a418-6a17980ae2a6.mp3?t=1759821841000" length="1112200" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Obviously, the most important part of any podcast episode is its main content. But the way you open and close your episodes is vital when it comes to listeners even getting to that stage.  ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>251</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>251</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">32f7e87b-8fd8-4e88-8e1d-1066d0632e0b</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Rough Podcast Scripts]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Rough Podcast Scripts]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about the rough podcast script. This one is near the &lsquo;make-it-up-as-you-go-along&rsquo; end of the scripting spectrum. Here, you&rsquo;ll mainly use bullet points to remind you where you&rsquo;re going. You&rsquo;re relying on your expert knowledge on the subject to fill in the gaps. This leads to the most conversational type of podcast and is often the most engaging. When you&rsquo;re speaking from experience, your voice becomes a lot more active, and a lot less monotone. The problem, of course, is that there&rsquo;s a chance that you&rsquo;ll miss stuff out or maybe even get something wrong. So the time you might&rsquo;ve saved in doing a more detailed script can easily be spent on extra editing or re-recording. For an in-depth look at podcast scripting, go to http://ThePodcastHost.com/scripting And on top of that, we&rsquo;d love your feedback on Pocket-Sized Podcasting, which you can quickly and easily leave for us at http://ThePodcastHost.com/PSP</p>]]></description><pubDate>Mon, 06 Oct 2025 07:24:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:06</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/32f7e87b-8fd8-4e88-8e1d-1066d0632e0b</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/32f7e87b-8fd8-4e88-8e1d-1066d0632e0b.mp3?t=1759735441000" length="1066559" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[This one is near the ‘make-it-up-as-you-go-along’ end of the scripting spectrum. 
Here, you’ll mainly use bullet points to remind you where you’re going. You’re relying on your expert knowledge on the subject to fill in the gaps.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>250</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>250</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">4deb67a2-79e3-45d6-915f-b927ef008d9c</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Detailed Podcast Scripts]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Detailed Podcast Scripts]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about the &lsquo;detailed episode plan&rsquo; podcast script. This is the most common way of scripting a podcast. It&rsquo;s a great alternative to the word-for-word method. Here, you can write down every point you want to hit, every resource you want to mention, and every story you want to cover. You&rsquo;re not trying to script every single word, though, so you still have that freedom to talk naturally *with* your listener, instead of reading *at* them. Your personality can shine through here, without the risk of going off-track or forgetting something. For an in-depth look at podcast scripting, go to http://ThePodcastHost.com/scripting On top of that, we&rsquo;d love your feedback on Pocket-Sized Podcasting, which you can quickly and easily leave for us at http://ThePodcastHost.com/PSP</p>]]></description><pubDate>Fri, 03 Oct 2025 07:25:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:00:56</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/4deb67a2-79e3-45d6-915f-b927ef008d9c</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/4deb67a2-79e3-45d6-915f-b927ef008d9c.mp3?t=1759476301000" length="905288" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[This is the most common way of scripting a podcast. It’s a great alternative to the word-for-word method. Here, you can write down every point you want to hit, every resource you want to mention, and every story you want to cover. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>249</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>249</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">86d86e24-70c8-4d45-bc17-5ef32c038e4f</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Word-For-Word Podcast Scripts]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Word-For-Word Podcast Scripts]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about the word-for-word podcast script. This method is great because you&rsquo;ll never forget or leave anything out. It can also help a lot if you lack the confidence to speak for any length of time. But, there are big cons, too. Scripting a show this way takes ages. Few podcasters can also pull off word-for-word reading and make it sound conversational. You run the risk of your episodes being a bit flat and monotone. By all means, give it a shot. But it&rsquo;s likely not going to be the best option for you in the long run. For an in-depth look at podcast scripting, go to http://ThePodcastHost.com/scripting On top of that, we&rsquo;d love your feedback on Pocket-Sized Podcasting, which you can quickly and easily leave for us at http://ThePodcastHost.com/PSP</p>]]></description><pubDate>Thu, 02 Oct 2025 07:21:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:00</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/86d86e24-70c8-4d45-bc17-5ef32c038e4f</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/86d86e24-70c8-4d45-bc17-5ef32c038e4f.mp3?t=1759389661000" length="970430" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[This method is great because you’ll never forget or leave anything out. It can also help a lot if you lack the confidence to speak for any length of time.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>248</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>248</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">1727a2a1-472d-4f1f-b2fb-4c0d34b4b588</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Writing a Podcast Script]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Writing a Podcast Script]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about writing a podcast script. Podcast scripting is&nbsp;a very personal thing. Some hosts script their whole show, word for word. Other hosts write down the episode title and just ad-lib it from there.&nbsp;Neither way is right or wrong and, in reality, most people go for something in-between. Scripting can be viewed as a spectrum, with `fully-scripted` and `not-even-slightly-scripted` covering each end. That means it&rsquo;s impossible to tell you exactly how to do it. But, we can tell you a&nbsp;*few ways*&nbsp;to do it. You can try each way out, and tweak them for your needs. With a bit of trial and error, you&rsquo;ll find the type of scripting that best suits you. We&rsquo;ll cover the three main options for scripting your show in the following episodes, so be sure to subscribe to Pocket-Sized Podcasting and get new tips delivered daily!</p>]]></description><pubDate>Wed, 01 Oct 2025 07:24:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:00:59</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/1727a2a1-472d-4f1f-b2fb-4c0d34b4b588</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/1727a2a1-472d-4f1f-b2fb-4c0d34b4b588.mp3?t=1759303441000" length="942181" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Podcast scripting is a very personal thing. Some hosts script their whole show, word for word. Other hosts write down the episode title and just ad-lib it from there. Neither way is right or wrong and, in reality, most people go for something in-between.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>247</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>247</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">a4f15a9f-aa50-4f8f-8d9f-e03b7324ece1</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[The How-To - Creating Shareable Content]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[The How-To - Creating Shareable Content]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about the how-to method, when it comes to creating shareable content. This is the classic problem-solution pairing. What are your audience struggling with? What do they need help with? You might already have a decent idea of this, based on our recent &lsquo;Question Research&rsquo; episode. Starting your title with, &ldquo;How to&rdquo; is arguably the most effective way of getting folks to click on it. You might say &ldquo;well, that&rsquo;s just clickbait&rdquo;. But is it really &ldquo;just clickbait&rdquo; if it delivers what it promises? Some examples of &lsquo;how-to&rsquo; episodes that&rsquo;ll have their target audience hitting play without a second thought are - &lsquo;How to become a scratch golfer&rsquo; - &lsquo;How to improve your sleep quality&rsquo; - &lsquo;How to talk to your kids about grief&rsquo; - And, &lsquo;How to pass your driving test&rsquo; For an in-depth look at creating shareable content, head on over to http://ThePodcastHost.com/shareable</p>]]></description><pubDate>Tue, 30 Sep 2025 07:20:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:00</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/a4f15a9f-aa50-4f8f-8d9f-e03b7324ece1</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/a4f15a9f-aa50-4f8f-8d9f-e03b7324ece1.mp3?t=1759216801000" length="968856" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[This is the classic problem-solution pairing. What are your audience struggling with? What do they need help with?]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>246</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>246</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">949e3876-146f-46c1-8b3e-a8835fc4b3a7</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Case Studies - Creating Shareable Content]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Case Studies - Creating Shareable Content]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about the case study method, when it comes to creating shareable content. Case studies use examples of people doing things, or events taking place. For example, a biking podcast might do a deep dive into how one rider prepared for and won a big tournament. Or a football podcast might chronicle the journey of a team of underdogs from a small village who won a national trophy. You can almost think of it as a movie. It&rsquo;s a great opportunity to tell a story - and stories are the ultimate and oldest form of shareable content. Try to answer questions like &ldquo;what&rsquo;s their main motivation?&rdquo;, &ldquo;what are their biggest obstacles?&rdquo;, and &ldquo;what are they doing differently?&rdquo;. This is going to leave your listener feeling clued up, motivated, and inspired! For an in-depth look at creating shareable content, head on over to http://ThePodcastHost.com/shareable</p>]]></description><pubDate>Mon, 29 Sep 2025 07:21:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:04</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/949e3876-146f-46c1-8b3e-a8835fc4b3a7</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/949e3876-146f-46c1-8b3e-a8835fc4b3a7.mp3?t=1759130461000" length="1031752" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Case studies use examples of people doing things, or events taking place. 

For example, a biking podcast might do a deep dive into how one rider prepared for and won a big tournament.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>245</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>245</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">271b28df-1a7d-46d7-892b-c63a38e71870</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Costs - Creating Shareable Content]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Costs - Creating Shareable Content]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about the cost method, when it comes to creating shareable content. When people buy things these days, they do their research online first. So here&rsquo;s where you can help your target audience get the info they need. What cost-related questions do you think they might commonly type into Google? For example, a nutritional therapy podcast might run an episode titled &ldquo;how much does a food intolerance test cost?&rdquo;. Or a show about living off-grid might run one about, &ldquo;how much does a wood burning stove cost?&rdquo;. You might even do a costs list where you compare your own product or service to your competitors. This honest approach can help build trust and authority, too. To sum up, cost episodes are helpful, discoverable, and highly shareable. For an in-depth look at creating shareable content, head on over to http://ThePodcastHost.com/shareable</p>]]></description><pubDate>Fri, 26 Sep 2025 07:05:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:01</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/271b28df-1a7d-46d7-892b-c63a38e71870</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/271b28df-1a7d-46d7-892b-c63a38e71870.mp3?t=1758870301000" length="974422" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[When people buy things these days, they do their research online first. So here’s where you can help your target audience get the info they need. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>244</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>244</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">4d3e2ea5-5e16-486c-94a6-078c6d756d8d</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[The Comparison - Creating Shareable Content]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[The Comparison - Creating Shareable Content]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about the comparison method, when it comes to creating shareable content. Mac versus PC, Pepsi versus Cola, Nike versus Adidas. This is the celebrity death match episode format where you&rsquo;re going to throw two rivals into the arena and see who comes out on top. Here, you&rsquo;d tend to look at key relevant factors such as cost, quality, and ease of use. This is almost like the review method but you&rsquo;re looking at two things, rather than one. We&rsquo;ve created these ourselves in the past where we&rsquo;ve had showdowns between popular mics or audio software programmes. Again, this is totally topic dependent. Do you podcast about mountain biking? Well, let&rsquo;s hear your take on the two most popular brands of tyres. Are you more of a business coach? Then maybe your listeners would like your help deciding on one of two popular types of accounting software. For an in-depth look at creating shareable content, head on over to http://ThePodcastHost.com/shareable</p>]]></description><pubDate>Thu, 25 Sep 2025 07:00:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:07</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/4d3e2ea5-5e16-486c-94a6-078c6d756d8d</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/4d3e2ea5-5e16-486c-94a6-078c6d756d8d.mp3?t=1758783601000" length="1077900" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Mac versus PC, Pepsi versus Cola, Nike versus Adidas. This is the celebrity death match episode format where you’re going to throw two rivals into the arena and see who comes out on top. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>243</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>243</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">e45bc9c9-d9a4-4e0b-8d66-fb5807d72b67</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[The Review - Creating Shareable Content]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[The Review - Creating Shareable Content]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about the review method, when it comes to creating shareable content. Before people try or buy things themselves, they generally like to hear the opinions of others. You probably do this yourself each time you nip on to Amazon. Reviewing products, services, or other topic-relevant things can help your listeners to make more informed decisions. They&rsquo;ll really appreciate you for this, and they&rsquo;ll want to share these episodes with others each time they see this particular thing being discussed in future, too. It&rsquo;ll always depend on exactly what you&rsquo;re reviewing, but common points to hit are factors like cost, quality, and ease of use. Can you write up a list of four or five things you think would make for great review episodes on your own show? This is another super-shareable type of content, and it can be handy for SEO, too. For an in-depth look at creating shareable content, head on over to http://ThePodcastHost.com/shareable</p>]]></description><pubDate>Wed, 24 Sep 2025 07:02:04 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:05</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/e45bc9c9-d9a4-4e0b-8d66-fb5807d72b67</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/e45bc9c9-d9a4-4e0b-8d66-fb5807d72b67.mp3?t=1758697325000" length="1036878" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Before people try or buy things themselves, they generally like to hear the opinions of others. You probably do this yourself each time you nip on to Amazon. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>242</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>242</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">7d183690-8ad9-4828-ac08-7b80b3a069c9</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[The List - Creating Shareable Content]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[The List - Creating Shareable Content]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about the list method, when it comes to creating shareable content. Let&rsquo;s face it, we all love lists. There&rsquo;s something compelling about content that promises knowledge like &ldquo;the top 7 guitarists of all time&rdquo;, or &ldquo;the best 11 beers in the world right now&rdquo;. So it&rsquo;s just a case of taking this method and re-working it for your own topic. You can base this on products your listeners might use, places they might visit, recipes they might cook-up, or movies they might watch. Don&rsquo;t get overly hung up on the word &ldquo;best&rdquo;, too. Just be clear that this is your personal opinion, and that you welcome all feedback and differing viewpoints. The engagement these episodes brings is all part of the fun - and, the wider benefit! For an in-depth look at creating shareable content, head on over to http://ThePodcastHost.com/shareable</p>]]></description><pubDate>Tue, 23 Sep 2025 07:04:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:00:59</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/7d183690-8ad9-4828-ac08-7b80b3a069c9</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/7d183690-8ad9-4828-ac08-7b80b3a069c9.mp3?t=1758611041000" length="943953" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Let’s face it, we all love lists. There’s something compelling about content that promises knowledge like “the top 7 guitarists of all time”, or “the best 11 beers in the world right now”.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>241</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>241</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">4dea37cf-ef1f-41bd-88e4-b00677f97aff</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[How to Create Shareable Content]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[How to Create Shareable Content]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about how to create shareable content. Word of mouth is one of the most effective ways to grow your podcast. According to our Discoverability survey, over 33% of listeners find new shows to listen to based on what others have shared or recommended. So how do you make your podcast episodes shareable, or &ldquo;recommendable&rdquo;? There are actually six frameworks you can build your episode around. And, after hearing them, your listeners will be dying to tell others about them, too. These frameworks are - lists, comparisons, reviews, case studies, how-tos, and costs. Over the next six episodes, we&rsquo;re going to take a look at each one and see how you might best use it in your own podcast. So make sure you&rsquo;re subscribed to or following Pocket-Sized Podcasting in your app of choice - trust me, you won&rsquo;t want to miss these! And, for an in-depth look at creating shareable content, head on over to http://ThePodcastHost.com/shareable</p>]]></description><pubDate>Mon, 22 Sep 2025 07:02:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:08</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/4dea37cf-ef1f-41bd-88e4-b00677f97aff</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/4dea37cf-ef1f-41bd-88e4-b00677f97aff.mp3?t=1758524521000" length="1096624" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[So how do you make your podcast episodes shareable, or “recommendable”? There are actually six frameworks you can build your episode around. And, after hearing them, your listeners will be dying to tell others about them, too. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>240</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>240</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">4880a9b1-506e-489e-bf98-d44e4b8787d4</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Doing Question Research]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Doing Question Research]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about doing question research. One of the best ways to come up with episode ideas is simply to answer the common questions your audience is asking. But what if you don&rsquo;t have an audience yet? Well, there are a couple of handy and free ways to find these questions. The first is simply to type something you think your avatar would ask into google, then scroll down to the bottom and you&rsquo;ll see suggestions of what they&rsquo;re also asking. Another is a service called http://Answerthepublic.com - here, you just type in your main topic, let&rsquo;s say, &ldquo;sharks&rdquo;, and it&rsquo;ll spit out every single question people ask around that thing. From &ldquo;what do sharks eat?&rdquo; and &ldquo;where sharks are found&rdquo;, to &ldquo;how sharks sleep&rdquo; and &ldquo;were sharks before dinosaurs?&rdquo;. Your listeners will love these episodes, and they&rsquo;ll throw up some great compelling episode titles, too. By the way, are you enjoying Pocket-Sized Podcasting so far? If so, could we ask a quick favour that you give us a rating and review on your listening app of choice? That would really make our day, here at this humble wee podcast. Cheers!</p>]]></description><pubDate>Fri, 19 Sep 2025 07:03:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:36</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/4880a9b1-506e-489e-bf98-d44e4b8787d4</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/4880a9b1-506e-489e-bf98-d44e4b8787d4.mp3?t=1758265381000" length="1533863" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[One of the best ways to come up with episode ideas is simply to answer the common questions your audience is asking. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>239</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>239</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">e81a42b0-a7a0-40fa-8018-54e2772cdc6a</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Coming Up With Episode Ideas]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Coming Up With Episode Ideas]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about coming up with episode ideas. As is often the case in podcasting, this depends a lot on your topic. But there are some common themes we see with podcasters coming up with episode ideas. Maybe a recent personal experience or funny anecdote can tie in to your subject or topic. Maybe there&rsquo;s a lesson to be learned from a book you&rsquo;ve just read, or a movie you&rsquo;ve just watched. Or maybe there&rsquo;s something in the news right now that your audience would be interested to hear your take on. It&rsquo;s a good idea to keep a document of all the evergreen episode ideas you think of, too. That way, you know you&rsquo;ve always got something to fall back on if you go through a challenging creative period in the future. For a deeper dive on how to come up with fresh podcast episode ideas, go to http://ThePodcastHost.com/ideas</p>]]></description><pubDate>Thu, 18 Sep 2025 07:04:02 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:00:58</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/e81a42b0-a7a0-40fa-8018-54e2772cdc6a</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/e81a42b0-a7a0-40fa-8018-54e2772cdc6a.mp3?t=1758179043000" length="923791" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[As is often the case in podcasting, this depends a lot on your topic. But there are some common themes we see with podcasters coming up with episode ideas.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>238</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>238</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">dc556e1c-745f-422f-bd21-3cf7b6bcd63b</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Planning Your Episodes]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Planning Your Episodes]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about planning your episodes. Great podcasters and terrible podcasters both have one thing in common - they make it sound like they haven&rsquo;t planned their episodes. For the great podcasters, it&rsquo;s because they plan them so well. For the terrible podcasters, it&rsquo;s because they don&rsquo;t plan them at all. An episode plan doesn&rsquo;t need to be an in-depth dissertation or treatment. It&rsquo;s more about asking some top-level questions like &ldquo;Why this topic right now?&rdquo;, &ldquo;What problem will this solve for my audience?&rdquo;, and &ldquo;How will this provide value?&rdquo;. When we cover scripting, we&rsquo;ll talk more about how you bring that plan to the recording booth. But before then, we want to take a look in the next few episodes about fleshing out those ideas. You want to create compelling and shareable content that your listeners will love, right? Well, make sure you&rsquo;re subscribed to Pocket-Sized Podcasting in your listening app of choice, and those episodes will drop into your feed the minute they&rsquo;re published!</p>]]></description><pubDate>Wed, 17 Sep 2025 07:05:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:16</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/dc556e1c-745f-422f-bd21-3cf7b6bcd63b</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/dc556e1c-745f-422f-bd21-3cf7b6bcd63b.mp3?t=1758092701000" length="1211826" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Great podcasters and terrible podcasters both have one thing in common - they make it sound like they haven’t planned their episodes. 

For the great podcasters, it’s because they plan them so well. 

For the terrible podcasters, it’s because they don’t plan them at all.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>237</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>237</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">21724fae-864b-435a-8b8b-9938843fa1b5</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[How to Link to and Share Your Podcast]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[How to Link to and Share Your Podcast]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about how to link to and share your podcast. This is a big mistake many podcasters make when they promote their content - they share a link to somewhere like Apple or Spotify. Sure, these places are where a lot of podcast listening happens. But remember, there are hundreds of other apps and directories, too. You definitely can&rsquo;t link to them all, especially not in a tweet, so what do you do? Quite simply, you send them to one place - your website. We&rsquo;re going to take a deeper dive into making your podcast website on a future episode, but you already have one as soon as you&rsquo;ve signed up for your hosting account. You can even buy a domain name and have it point to that whilst you work on setting up something a bit more personalised. And, for an in-depth look at how to link to your show, head on over to http://ThePodcastHost.com/sharing</p>]]></description><pubDate>Tue, 16 Sep 2025 07:03:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:13</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/21724fae-864b-435a-8b8b-9938843fa1b5</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/21724fae-864b-435a-8b8b-9938843fa1b5.mp3?t=1758006181000" length="1172090" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[This is a big mistake many podcasters make when they promote their content - they share a link to somewhere like Apple or Spotify.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>236</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>236</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">51076c96-72d3-4158-8df0-9a2402ea85bf</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Getting Listed in All Other Podcast Directories]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Getting Listed in All Other Podcast Directories]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about getting listed in any directories and apps your show isn&rsquo;t yet appearing in. As we mentioned before, the fact that you&rsquo;re in Apple Podcasts means you&rsquo;re automatically in a hundred other places. Google Podcasts will start noticing you without you needing to do anything, either. Well, they are in the search business, after all! But, there are three other platforms you&rsquo;ll want to log in to or create an account for, in order to submit your RSS feed to. Those are Stitcher, TuneIn, Amazon, and Audible. I know, I know, that&rsquo;s actually four. But if you&rsquo;re in Amazon, you&rsquo;re in Audible, and vice-versa. We&rsquo;ve got full guides on submitting to each of these platforms, which you can find at http://ThePodcastHost.com/directories</p>]]></description><pubDate>Mon, 15 Sep 2025 07:01:01 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:13</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/51076c96-72d3-4158-8df0-9a2402ea85bf</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/51076c96-72d3-4158-8df0-9a2402ea85bf.mp3?t=1757919662000" length="1167361" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[As we mentioned before, the fact that you’re in Apple Podcasts means you’re automatically in a hundred other places. Google Podcasts will start noticing you without you needing to do anything, either. Well, they are in the search business, after all!  ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>235</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>235</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">470481cd-5f07-404e-9036-993d2b08a8bc</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Getting Your Show in Spotify]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Getting Your Show in Spotify]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about getting listed in Spotify. Spotify is hot on the heels of Apple when it comes to global podcast consumption. You&rsquo;ll definitely want to get your show listed here. And, it&rsquo;s even easier than submitting to their fruit-loving rivals. Most hosting providers have simple one-click &ldquo;submit to Spotify&rdquo; buttons in their distribution sections. What&rsquo;s more, some of our recently launched shows have appeared on Spotify less than an hour after submitting. You can easily submit manually, too, if your host doesn&rsquo;t have a one-click button. Just copy your RSS feed link, go to http://podcasters.spotify.com and paste it to the &lsquo;Add a Podcast&rsquo; section. The novel thing about the Spotify podcasters portal is that you&rsquo;ll see some data on what music your listeners tend to enjoy. Can you imagine the irony of your death metal podcast throwing up &ldquo;favourite artists&rdquo; like The Cheeky Girls and S Club 7? By the way - if that happens to you, please let us know! And, for a deeper dive on submitting your show to Spotify, go to http://ThePodcastHost.com/getonspotify</p>]]></description><pubDate>Fri, 12 Sep 2025 07:04:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:17</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/470481cd-5f07-404e-9036-993d2b08a8bc</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/470481cd-5f07-404e-9036-993d2b08a8bc.mp3?t=1757660641000" length="1239070" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Spotify is hot on the heels of Apple when it comes to global podcast consumption. You’ll definitely want to get your show listed here. And, it’s even easier than submitting to their fruit-loving rivals. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>422</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>422</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">dabe2484-1597-44b0-9e25-867855b64085</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Getting Your Show in Apple Podcasts (AKA iTunes)]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Getting Your Show in Apple Podcasts (AKA iTunes)]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about getting listed in Apple Podcasts - AKA, iTunes. Apple has always been - and remains - the number one place where podcasts are consumed. We also know that, by being listed here, your show will automatically pop up in a trillion other apps you&rsquo;ve never heard of. To submit to Apple you just need to create a free Apple ID. Or, you might have one already. Bottom line, you need to log in to [PodcastsConnect.Apple.com](http://PodcastsConnect.Apple.com) and click on the &lsquo;Add&rsquo; button. Then, just copy and paste your RSS feed from your hosting account, check the details, and submit. It can take 2-3 days for your podcast to appear in Apple Podcasts, so don&rsquo;t panic if you don&rsquo;t see it in there right away. Apple will email you if there&rsquo;s any issues, too! For a deeper dive on submitting to iTunes, including screenshots and a video, go to http://ThePodcastHost.com/ApplePodcasts</p>]]></description><pubDate>Thu, 11 Sep 2025 07:00:02 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:07</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/dabe2484-1597-44b0-9e25-867855b64085</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/dabe2484-1597-44b0-9e25-867855b64085.mp3?t=1757574004000" length="1070248" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Apple has always been - and remains - the number one place where podcasts are consumed. We also know that, by being listed here, your show will automatically pop up in a trillion other apps you’ve never heard of.  ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>421</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>421</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">066db619-bbd0-4a0d-9e6d-7bc24dca1234</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Getting Listed in Podcast Directories]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Getting Listed in Podcast Directories]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about getting listed in podcast directories. People listen to podcasts on hundreds of different apps and platforms. In a previous episode, we learned that you only need to upload your content to one place - your hosting account - and it&rsquo;ll appear in all these places automatically. But how do we make sure these directories know our podcast exists in the first place? For this, we use a unique URL called an RSS feed. You&rsquo;ll get one of these when you create your show in your hosting account. You can easily submit this to any directory or app you like. And because Apple Podcasts and Spotify account for about 65% of global podcast listening, you&rsquo;re over halfway there simply by being listed in those two. And there&rsquo;s more good news. Being listed in Apple Podcasts means you&rsquo;ll automatically be listed in almost all of the other apps and directories out there. So what initially might&rsquo;ve looked like a mammoth task is really just a few minutes of work! For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to ThePodcastHost.com/directories</p>]]></description><pubDate>Wed, 10 Sep 2025 07:02:01 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:15</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/066db619-bbd0-4a0d-9e6d-7bc24dca1234</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/066db619-bbd0-4a0d-9e6d-7bc24dca1234.mp3?t=1757487722000" length="1203423" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[On this episode, we’re talking about getting listed in podcast directories. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>420</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>420</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Matthew McLean</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">c44dd965-5909-46e3-8c92-7244e941caa4</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Is My Podcast “Launch” Important?]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Is My Podcast “Launch” Important?]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about the myth of the podcast &ldquo;launch&rdquo;. The term &ldquo;launch&rdquo; is ambiguous, because, creating your show and publishing your first episode means you&rsquo;re &ldquo;launching&rdquo; your podcast. But we might also think of our launch as something glitzy and hyped-up, like the release of the latest iPhone or Xbox console. When new tech, or even new books are released, they only have a few weeks to &ldquo;sink or swim&rdquo; because of how sales and charts work in these fields. The good news? This has absolutely nothing in common with podcasting whatsoever. Some of the most successful podcasters spent months or even years talking to tiny audiences, before their consistency and hard work eventually paid off. So, sure, promote and market your new pod as best you can when it&rsquo;s released. But the most important thing isn&rsquo;t how much hype you drum up - it&rsquo;s how soon you get back to work on your next episode! For a deeper dive on your podcast launch, head on over to http://ThePodcastHost.com/yourlaunch</p>]]></description><pubDate>Tue, 09 Sep 2025 07:00:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:11</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/c44dd965-5909-46e3-8c92-7244e941caa4</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/c44dd965-5909-46e3-8c92-7244e941caa4.mp3?t=1757401201000" length="1139880" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[The term “launch” is ambiguous, because, creating your show and publishing your first episode means you’re “launching” your podcast. But we might also think of our launch as something glitzy and hyped-up, like the release of the latest iPhone or Xbox console. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>419</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>419</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">9d34c674-56a9-43d9-a032-c5fd5a5e5a38</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Why Make an Episode Zero?]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Why Make an Episode Zero?]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about why you might make an &lsquo;Episode Zero&rsquo;. This is the name given to a type of introductory or &ldquo;pre-launch&rdquo; podcast episode. It isn&rsquo;t&nbsp;*essential*&nbsp;to create an Episode Zero. But many podcasters do &ndash; and there&rsquo;s a few good reasons why it might be worth considering for your own show. An Episode Zero can be similar to a promo trailer in the way it introduces your show and your topic. The main difference is length. An Episode Zero would ideally still err on the shorter side of, say, 3-6 minutes. But that still gives you a lot more time than a 30-second trailer. One of the biggest benefits of an Episode Zero is that it gives you that &ldquo;one published episode&rdquo; needed to submit your show everywhere. That means your podcast can be fully set up and ready to go by the time you publish your first &ldquo;proper&rdquo; episode. For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to http://ThePodcastHost.com/epzero</p>]]></description><pubDate>Mon, 08 Sep 2025 07:00:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:07</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/9d34c674-56a9-43d9-a032-c5fd5a5e5a38</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/9d34c674-56a9-43d9-a032-c5fd5a5e5a38.mp3?t=1757314801000" length="1076190" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[This is the name given to a type of introductory or “pre-launch” podcast episode. It isn’t essential to create an Episode Zero. But many podcasters do – and there’s a few good reasons why it might be worth considering for your own show.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>418</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>418</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">1f9f2129-bd9b-48b2-97ba-9bd380ae7b1c</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[How to Create a Podcast Trailer]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[How to Create a Podcast Trailer]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about creating a trailer for your show. A promo trailer can help you win over potential new listeners by giving them a flavour of your podcast. They can easily be played on other shows, too, which can help you grow your audience. A podcast trailer should be between 30 seconds and 1 minute. The shorter, the better. There are certain things you *definitely* want to mention in your podcast trailer. What&rsquo;s the show called? What&rsquo;s it about? Who is it for? And where can we find it? If you can add a bit of creative tone, personality, and production, too, then great. But these things are &ldquo;icing&rdquo; and shouldn&rsquo;t go in at the expense of the key details. A podcast trailer is also useful because you need at least one published episode on your feed before you can list your show in places like Spotify and Apple. As far as these platforms are concerned, even a short trailer counts as &ldquo;an episode&rdquo;. Another option here is to create an Episode Zero, which we&rsquo;re going to look at next. In the meantime, for a deeper dive on creating your trailer, go to http://ThePodcastHost.com/promotrailer</p>]]></description><pubDate>Fri, 05 Sep 2025 07:03:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:17</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/1f9f2129-bd9b-48b2-97ba-9bd380ae7b1c</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/1f9f2129-bd9b-48b2-97ba-9bd380ae7b1c.mp3?t=1757055781000" length="1227389" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[A promo trailer can help you win over potential new listeners by giving them a flavour of your podcast.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>417</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>417</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">447e5e69-addc-417e-a873-17178bf9a08e</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Where to Publish Your Podcast]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Where to Publish Your Podcast]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about podcast hosting options. Your podcast hosting provider - also known as your &ldquo;podcast host&rdquo; - is *the* place you create your show and upload all of your episodes to. There are plenty great hosting options out there catering to all needs and budgets. Hosting providers will offer you stats so you can see how popular your show is. Some of these go really in-depth and can give you geographic and device stats, too. Hosting providers will also give you a basic website for your show. Some offer tools for monetization, growth, and even for creating private &ldquo;members only&rdquo; podcasts. A few of our favourite podcast hosts are Captivate, Transistor, and Castos. You&rsquo;ll find a full rundown of these services and their offerings at [http://ThePodcastHost.com/Hosting](http://thepodcasthost.com/Hosting) And, our podcast-maker tool Alitu also has hosting included in your subscription. That means you only need one login to record, edit, and publish your podcast, which keeps things cost-effective, and super simple. Thanks very much for listening to Pocket-Sized Podcasting. And, for a deeper look at podcast hosting, and a full range of options, features, and prices, head on over to [http://ThePodcastHost.com/Hosting](http://thepodcasthost.com/Hosting)</p>]]></description><pubDate>Thu, 04 Sep 2025 07:00:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:24</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/447e5e69-addc-417e-a873-17178bf9a08e</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/447e5e69-addc-417e-a873-17178bf9a08e.mp3?t=1756969201000" length="1341776" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Your podcast hosting provider - also known as your “podcast host” - is the place you create your show and upload all of your episodes to. There are plenty great hosting options out there catering to all needs and budgets. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>416</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>416</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">86d0a3b8-9c18-4781-9b0d-c32caddb7e11</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[How to Publish Your Podcast]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[How to Publish Your Podcast]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about publishing your podcast. This stage can cause some confusion for new podcasters. You might think that you need to upload your episodes to listening platforms like Apple and Spotify, but that isn&rsquo;t the case. Instead, you create an account with a podcast hosting provider. That&rsquo;s the place your podcast &ldquo;lives&rdquo;. Your cover art, your show description, and your episodes all go in there. Then, there are a couple of small steps needed to &ldquo;tell&rdquo; platforms like Spotify and Apple that your podcast exists. After that, your show will be listed there, as will each episode you publish within your podcast hosting account. So you only ever need to upload to one single place to have your episodes pushed out to hundreds of listening platforms. To use an analogy, if your podcast was a magazine, your hosting provider would be the printing press, whilst all of the listening apps and directories would be the shops that your magazine could be found in. For a deeper dive on how to publish a podcast, head on over to http://ThePodcastHost.com/upload</p>]]></description><pubDate>Wed, 03 Sep 2025 07:01:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:13</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/86d0a3b8-9c18-4781-9b0d-c32caddb7e11</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/86d0a3b8-9c18-4781-9b0d-c32caddb7e11.mp3?t=1756882861000" length="1170427" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[This stage can cause some confusion for new podcasters. You might think that you need to upload your episodes to listening platforms like Apple and Spotify, but that isn’t the case. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>415</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>415</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">56f4e531-5102-4651-b7cb-7ff55095c94c</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Where to Get Your Podcast Transcribed]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Where to Get Your Podcast Transcribed]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about where to get your podcast transcribed. There are two types of transcription service out there - human, and AI. The AI options are cheaper, but generally less accurate, especially if you speak with a Scottish accent. An AI transcription might take a wee bit more time to run through and correct manually. Our podcast-maker tool Alitu now automatically generates transcriptions of all your episodes, so that&rsquo;s one single place you can go to record, edit, publish, and transcribe your show. Alternatively, if it&rsquo;s human transcription you&rsquo;re after, then our favourite option here is Rev, which you can find at [ThePodcastHost.com/rev](http://thepodcasthost.com/rev) Obviously, with any human service, it&rsquo;ll take up to a few days to get your transcriptions back, whereas, AI can do it almost immediately. There&rsquo;s no right or wrong approach here, though. Only what works best for you. For a deeper dive on podcast transcriptions, with a full range of options, head on over to [http://ThePodcastHost.com/transcription](http://thepodcasthost.com/transcription)</p>]]></description><pubDate>Tue, 02 Sep 2025 07:05:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:11</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/56f4e531-5102-4651-b7cb-7ff55095c94c</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/56f4e531-5102-4651-b7cb-7ff55095c94c.mp3?t=1756796701000" length="1137858" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[There are machine learning options out there that’ll do transcriptions for a few cents a minute. Some will even do it for free. This is a big bonus if you’ve little or no budget. The downside is that the accuracy can be quite low - especially if you speak with a Scottish accent! So be warned that these AI transcriptions can take a bit of time to go through and correct manually.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>414</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>414</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">0a238b3a-45e3-438e-ab89-842cd2e437b1</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Why Use Transcription?]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Why Use Transcription?]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about why you should be providing transcriptions of your episodes. Podcasting *is* predominantly an audio medium, and so, word-for-word episode transcriptions were traditionally seen as a luxury form of bonus content. These days, however, things are different. Podcasters should *always* be providing transcripts for each new episode they publish. This is for two main reasons. Firstly - accessibility. Millions of people out there are deaf or hard of hearing. Providing a transcription means that you&rsquo;re not shutting them out from any insights or info on your show that could potentially benefit them. Secondly - you&rsquo;re keeping yourself on the right side of the law. We&rsquo;ve seen recent examples of podcasters facing legal action over their failure to provide transcriptions. It goes without saying that you don&rsquo;t want to risk joining that club. Transcriptions can be pasted directly into your shownotes, or, you can link clearly to them on a separate page on your site. Some hosting providers even offer dedicated sections where you can publish your transcriptions. Fortunately, there are plenty of options for getting your show transcribed, too - as we&rsquo;re going to cover on the next episode. In the meantime, for a deeper dive on this, head on over to http://ThePodcastHost.com/transcription</p>]]></description><pubDate>Mon, 01 Sep 2025 07:04:02 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:27</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/0a238b3a-45e3-438e-ab89-842cd2e437b1</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/0a238b3a-45e3-438e-ab89-842cd2e437b1.mp3?t=1756710243000" length="1393251" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Podcasting is predominantly an audio medium, and so, word-for-word episode transcriptions were traditionally seen as a luxury form of bonus content. These days, however, things are different. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>413</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>413</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">bb0eae4c-bf94-4de1-a306-ad60e9fcf6fa</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[‘Podcast Maker’ Tools]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[‘Podcast Maker’ Tools]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about, funnily enough, Podcast Maker tools. A &lsquo;Podcast Maker&rsquo; is basically an app or tool that brings everything like recording, editing, production, and publishing together into one place. They can be less flexible and powerful than having a dedicated tool for every job, but so much more simpler, convenient, and cost-effective. Naturally, because we run Alitu, we&rsquo;re a bit biased and think it&rsquo;s the best option out there. We certainly strive to be. But that said, we recognise that there are a few other great options out there too, and we always want to help you make up your own mind. Podcast hosting giants Podbean, Spreaker, and Anchor each have their own Podcast Maker tools. Their editing and production options can be a bit more limited, but they really shine for those looking to do live shows with real-time audience interaction. We can&rsquo;t speak for the other platforms here, but we&rsquo;re constantly working on new tools and features in Alitu to make it the world&rsquo;s best all-in-one podcasting software. We&rsquo;d love you to be part of this journey too, so be sure to try us out free for 7 days by going to [Alitu.com](http://Alitu.com) And, for a deeper dive on all the best Podcast Maker options, go to http://ThePodcastHost.com/maker</p>]]></description><pubDate>Fri, 29 Aug 2025 07:00:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:39</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/bb0eae4c-bf94-4de1-a306-ad60e9fcf6fa</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/bb0eae4c-bf94-4de1-a306-ad60e9fcf6fa.mp3?t=1756450801000" length="1581690" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[A ‘Podcast Maker’ is basically an app or tool that brings everything like recording, editing, production, and publishing together into one place. They can be less flexible and powerful than having a dedicated tool for every job, but so much more simpler, convenient, and cost-effective. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>412</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>412</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">ba219879-ae56-41be-b773-f9d2ade15777</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[What Are DAWs? Digital Audio Workstations]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[What Are DAWs? Digital Audio Workstations]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re going to talk about Digital Audio Workstations, AKA - DAWs. A DAW is a term used to describe software that you use to record, edit, and produce audio. Most of them are designed and built with music production in mind, but can work brilliantly to create spoken-word content if you know what you&rsquo;re doing. A famous free DAW is Audacity. Audacity is popular because of its price, or lack of one. It has everything you need to record and produce a podcast, but it suffers from looking a bit clunky and dated. Adobe Audition, Reaper, and Hindenburg are 3 other popular options amongst podcasters. These are all paid DAWs, but they&rsquo;re a definite improvement on Audacity. The downside of DAWs tends to be their steep learning curve. Because they&rsquo;re so powerful and flexible, they can take a lot of time and effort to learn, at even a basic level. Most DAWs don&rsquo;t work as remote call recorders either, unless you have lots of extra equipment. If you&rsquo;re looking for the simplest DAW that&rsquo;s designed with the spoken-word in mind, then Hindenburg is worth checking out. Or, if you&rsquo;d prefer to avoid DAWs altogether, then be sure to have a go with our very own Alitu &lsquo;Podcast Maker&rsquo;. For a deeper dive into DAWs, go to http://ThePodcastHost.com/DAWS</p>]]></description><pubDate>Thu, 28 Aug 2025 07:02:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:43</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/ba219879-ae56-41be-b773-f9d2ade15777</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/ba219879-ae56-41be-b773-f9d2ade15777.mp3?t=1756364521000" length="1644002" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[A DAW is a term used to describe software that you use to record, edit, and produce audio. Most of them are designed and built with music production in mind, but can work brilliantly to create spoken-word content if you know what you’re doing. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>411</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>411</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">1d4ff273-b77c-490f-b63f-e2e513f5269a</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Remote Call Recording Options]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Remote Call Recording Options]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking remote recording software. Many podcasters run interview or co-hosted shows, and with call recording software, location is no barrier to who you can chat with. Online call recorders do exactly what they say on the tin. Two of the most popular options out there are Squadcast and Riverside. These are what&rsquo;s known as &ldquo;double ender&rdquo; tools which record each participant locally, on their own computer. This makes them safer from wonky wifi connections, crashes, and the sound quality is generally better, too. They also both record video, as well as audio. On top of that, our own Alitu has a call recorder feature - one that we&rsquo;re constantly working on and improving. The big benefit of using Alitu is that it handles all of the syncing, processing, cleaning up, and volume levelling automatically. Its editing tools are also powerful, but at the same time, stupidly simple to use. Of course, everyone on the planet has spent the past few years using Zoom, and you can use that to record remote calls too. You just need to have the right software and know-how to edit and produce them into decent-sounding episodes, afterwards. Why not give Alitu&rsquo;s call recorder a spin on your next podcast episode, though? You can try it out free for 7 days by going to [Alitu.com](http://Alitu.com) And, for a deeper look at remote recording software options, go to http://ThePodcastHost.com/Onlinerecording</p>]]></description><pubDate>Wed, 27 Aug 2025 07:00:02 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:47</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/1d4ff273-b77c-490f-b63f-e2e513f5269a</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/1d4ff273-b77c-490f-b63f-e2e513f5269a.mp3?t=1756278003000" length="1714455" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Online call recorders do exactly what they say on the tin. Two of the most popular options out there are Squadcast and Riverside. These are what’s known as “double ender” tools which record each participant locally, on their own computer. This makes them safer from wonky wifi connections, crashes, and the sound quality is generally better, too. They also both record video, as well as audio. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>410</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>410</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">e9c5ec18-1ced-4b7e-844d-ba4ba1fc0665</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Podcast Software]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Podcast Software]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re going to start thinking about podcasting software. The term &ldquo;podcast software&rdquo; is pretty general. It could be used to describe the programme or app you use to record, edit, or publish your episodes. Some platforms only focus on one of these aspects, whilst others will do all 3. It&rsquo;s common for editing software to double up as recording software. Prime examples of these are Audacity, Adobe Audition, and our own Alitu. Many online call recorders don&rsquo;t have editing functions though - or, if they do, they tend to be really basic. Podcast publishing or hosting software might also offer some basic recording and editing features. We&rsquo;re going to take a deeper dive into some options here in a future episode. Transcription is also important from an accessibility and legal point of view. There&rsquo;s plenty of software options on that front, too, as we&rsquo;ll soon find out. You might even think of your project management or scheduling tools as podcast software. These are tools like Trello, Asana, Notion, Calendly, and Book Like a Boss. For a deeper look at podcasting software in the meantime, go to http://ThePodcastHost.com/software</p>]]></description><pubDate>Tue, 26 Aug 2025 07:05:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:32</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/e9c5ec18-1ced-4b7e-844d-ba4ba1fc0665</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/e9c5ec18-1ced-4b7e-844d-ba4ba1fc0665.mp3?t=1756191901000" length="1471089" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[The term “podcast software” is pretty general. It could be used to describe the programme or app you use to record, edit, or publish your episodes. Some platforms only focus on one of these aspects, whilst others will do all 3. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>409</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>409</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">5cc73eab-d21a-4383-a3b6-9ddb5b93dd83</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Should You Record Outdoors?]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Should You Record Outdoors?]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re answering the question &ldquo;should you record your podcast outdoors?&rdquo; On the previous few episodes, we&rsquo;ve talked about the importance of good recording environments. Well, one of the best is actually right outside your window. I&rsquo;m talking, of course, about the great outdoors. If you&rsquo;re plagued by reverb, loud distracting background noise, or a simple lack of space, then I&rsquo;d encourage you to try recording your next episode whilst out on a walk, or sitting on your favourite park bench. Sure, there can be plenty &ldquo;noise&rdquo; outside. But this often works in an ambient sense, rather than a distracting or annoying one. Recording outdoors can also help with your presentation style. If you&rsquo;re out a walk, the blood is flowing and you tend to feel more energetic, too. This is especially good if you suffer a bit from &ldquo;mic fright&rdquo;, or lack of confidence. Equipment-wise, your smartphone can work well, with the right recording app. Or, you might want to get yourself a digital recorder and lavalier mic. We take a deeper dive into some gear recommendations, additional tips, and case studies at http://ThePodcastHost.com/Outdoors</p>]]></description><pubDate>Mon, 25 Aug 2025 07:01:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:22</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/5cc73eab-d21a-4383-a3b6-9ddb5b93dd83</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/5cc73eab-d21a-4383-a3b6-9ddb5b93dd83.mp3?t=1756105261000" length="1310243" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[If you’re plagued by reverb, loud distracting background noise, or a simple lack of space, then I’d encourage you to try recording your next episode whilst out on a walk, or sitting on your favourite park bench. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>408</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>408</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">49772da8-b4be-459e-a4fd-00cd111af6d6</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Background Noise: Sound Treatment Vs Sound Proofing]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Background Noise: Sound Treatment Vs Sound Proofing]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about background noise. Let&rsquo;s clear up a bit of confusion amongst podcasters - the difference between sound treatment, and sound *proofing*. On the last episode we talked about reverb, and that&rsquo;s very much in the sound *treatment* camp. But many folks mistakenly believe that, once they&rsquo;ve stuck up some acoustic tiles, they have sound *proofed* their room. If Dave Grohl was to move into the flat next door and start playing his drums, you&rsquo;d quickly find out that your room hasn&rsquo;t been sound proofed at all, though. Eliminating unwanted background noise can be harder than *treating* the sound of a room, for obvious reasons. There are some low-hanging fruits, though. Getting rid of that annoying clock, closing a window, or giving Dave next door a crisp 20 to nip down the pub for the next hour. The good news is that most unwanted background noise will be too minimal to be picked up by your mic and cause any distraction on your audio. A dynamic, cardioid microphone like the Samson Q2U, for example, does a great job of rejecting unwanted sounds around you. So do your best to minimise background noise, but don&rsquo;t obsess over it. Conditions will rarely be perfect, after all. And you can&rsquo;t let them get in the way of your progress as a podcaster. For a more detailed look at dealing with background noise in podcasting, go to http://thepodcasthost.com/noise</p>]]></description><pubDate>Fri, 22 Aug 2025 07:04:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:26</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/49772da8-b4be-459e-a4fd-00cd111af6d6</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/49772da8-b4be-459e-a4fd-00cd111af6d6.mp3?t=1755846241000" length="1384288" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Let’s clear up a bit of confusion amongst podcasters - the difference between sound treatment, and sound proofing. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>407</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>407</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">b593c2ad-ad44-45f9-b7f8-2eed3461c355</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[How to Eliminate Reverb in Any Room]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[How to Eliminate Reverb in Any Room]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about reverb or echo - and - how to get rid of it. Excess reverb can make even the best podcast sound amateur. This unwanted echo effect happens in smaller, boxy rooms with a lot of hard surfaces. Here, the soundwaves of your voice will bounce around the room like a ball. Typically poor-sounding environments include caves, the bottoms of wells, and in the average person&rsquo;s bathroom. It&rsquo;s unlikely you plan to record in any of these, but the room you&rsquo;ve set aside for your recordings might actually sound like it&rsquo;s one of them. So, what can we do about it? Well, you could simply record somewhere else. Typically, bedrooms are softer sounding environments. Some podcasters swear by recording in their closets, for example. Alternatively, you can create temporary recording havens by using duvets, towels, or dedicated acoustic blankets. The beauty of these is that they can be tidied away afterwards, if space is at a premium in your home. If you have the luxury of a more permanent setup, you can buy acoustic foam tiles at a reasonable price and stick them to the walls, and even, the roof of your room. The thing is, though, you don&rsquo;t actually need to sound treat entire rooms - you only need to deal with the small area where you and your mic are set up. Our favourite trick here is to buy a cat bed. You&rsquo;ll get one of these in the pet shop for less than $15, and they make excellent little &ldquo;studios&rdquo; to place your mic in. Then, you just talk into it, and your audio will be free from reverb - even if you *are* recording down a well. For a more detailed look at podcast recording environments, go to http://thepodcasthost.com/homestudio</p>]]></description><pubDate>Thu, 21 Aug 2025 07:03:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:50</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/b593c2ad-ad44-45f9-b7f8-2eed3461c355</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/b593c2ad-ad44-45f9-b7f8-2eed3461c355.mp3?t=1755759781000" length="1767680" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Excess reverb can make even the best podcast sound amateur. This unwanted echo effect happens in smaller, boxy rooms with a lot of hard surfaces. Here, the soundwaves of your voice will bounce around the room like a ball.  ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>406</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>406</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">be73cbaa-aaf3-425e-ae59-376c23e1f421</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Why Does Your Recording Environment Matter?]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Why Does Your Recording Environment Matter?]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about your recording environment. It&rsquo;s easy to think that your audio quality is determined by your equipment - and, to an extent, that&rsquo;s true. But the room or place you record in has a much bigger impact on how your content&rsquo;s going to sound. There are 2 main factors when it comes to your environment affecting your audio. Firstly, there&rsquo;s the &ldquo;sound&rdquo; of the room itself. Echo or reverb can be a real problem for podcasters, and we&rsquo;re going to take a look at it in more depth in the next episode - including - a tip to kill it in *any* room, for less than $15. The other factor is noise. Now, we&rsquo;re not saying for a minute that you should have complete and utter silence when you record - very few people have that luxury - and, in the right context, a bit of gentle background noise can add ambience and atmosphere. We&rsquo;ll talk more about this in an upcoming episode, too. The key is, though, that background noise should never be distracting, or compete with your actual voice. Your listeners should always be able to hear and focus on the content and message they&rsquo;ve turned up for. If they can&rsquo;t do that, after all, then the whole thing&rsquo;s going to fall apart. For a more detailed look at podcast recording environments, go to http://thepodcasthost.com/homestudio</p>]]></description><pubDate>Wed, 20 Aug 2025 07:04:03 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:24</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/be73cbaa-aaf3-425e-ae59-376c23e1f421</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/be73cbaa-aaf3-425e-ae59-376c23e1f421.mp3?t=1755673444000" length="1343194" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[It’s easy to think that your audio quality is determined by your equipment - and, to an extent, that’s true. But the room or place you record in has a much bigger impact on how your content’s going to sound. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>405</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>405</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">d367b3b4-8fad-4d33-b56d-e72b69979d2f</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[What Are Polar Patterns?]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[What Are Polar Patterns?]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re going to answer the question &ldquo;what are polar patterns?&rdquo; These are also sometimes called &ldquo;pickup patterns&rdquo;, and they&rsquo;re essentially the settings that determine the area a mic will focus on when recording sound. To think about this visually, imagine your mic as a torch or laser. The area it shines light on is the area it&rsquo;s &ldquo;hearing&rdquo; your voice. Most microphones you&rsquo;ll come across - including the Samson Q2U - have a &lsquo;Cardioid&rsquo; polar pattern which means they&rsquo;re designed to record one person at one time. Other polar patterns include: Omnidirectional - for recording multiple people. Bi-directional, or, Stereo - for recording 2 people. And Shotgun - for a laser-focused pickup of an audio source that blocks out everything else around it. Think of a news reporter, chatting away in a busy street, but you can still hear them clear as day. Polar patterns are represented by easy to understand diagrams. For example, Cardioid is heart-shaped, whilst Omnidirectional is a circle. These are like birds-eye views of where the pattern is picking up sound. To get a look at these diagrams, and to learn more about polar patterns in general, head on over to http://thepodcasthost.com/patterns</p>]]></description><pubDate>Tue, 19 Aug 2025 07:01:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:21</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/d367b3b4-8fad-4d33-b56d-e72b69979d2f</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/d367b3b4-8fad-4d33-b56d-e72b69979d2f.mp3?t=1755586861000" length="1306619" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[These are also sometimes called “pickup patterns”, and they’re essentially the settings that determine the area a mic will focus on when recording sound.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>404</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>404</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">6ca1c6de-3623-48ab-9816-13dbdc099b09</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[What is a Dynamic Microphone?]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[What is a Dynamic Microphone?]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re going to answer the question &ldquo;what is a Dynamic microphone?&rdquo;. Dynamic mics tend to be&nbsp;tougher and more durable&nbsp;than their Condenser counterparts. A Dynamic mic can be looked at as something you&rsquo;d typically use in &ldquo;live&rdquo; environments, and rougher &ldquo;on-the-go&rdquo; settings. If you record live, on-location, or just like having a mic on you at all times for ad-hoc recordings, then a Dynamic mic is a great option. Most Dynamic mics only have a&nbsp;Cardioid polar pattern, however. This means they&rsquo;re generally designed for single person use. We&rsquo;re going to talk more about polar patterns and why they matter on the next episode, so make sure you&rsquo;re subscribed on your listening app of choice and that&rsquo;ll be delivered to you, automatically. Bottom line, though, if you&rsquo;re using Dynamics for in-person interviews then you&rsquo;d either need to get two, or, hold one in your hand and constantly point it back and forward between you and your guest. Dynamic mics are powered by whatever they&rsquo;re plugged into, meaning the recording signal isn&rsquo;t quite as strong as it would be with a Condenser. This means you either need to turn the gain up more, or, bring the recording level up in the editing phase. Either way, that&rsquo;s going to raise the level of hiss in your audio. But, this is far from a deal-breaker, and often, the pros outweigh the cons with Dynamic mics in podcasting. Our most recommended mic, the Samson Q2U, is a Dynamic model, which means it&rsquo;s durable, flexible, and doesn&rsquo;t require a perfect environment to sound good either. That&rsquo;s what makes it such a good option for beginners on a limited budget! For a deeper dive on this subject, go to http://ThePodcastHost.com/dynamicvcondenser</p>]]></description><pubDate>Mon, 18 Aug 2025 07:02:01 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:51</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/6ca1c6de-3623-48ab-9816-13dbdc099b09</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/6ca1c6de-3623-48ab-9816-13dbdc099b09.mp3?t=1755500522000" length="1780901" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Dynamic mics tend to be tougher and more durable than their Condenser counterparts. A Dynamic mic can be looked at as something you’d typically use in “live” environments, and rougher “on-the-go” settings.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>403</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>403</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">11493f09-3453-41b8-a704-b1d2376f7bc5</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[What is a Condenser Microphone?]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[What is a Condenser Microphone?]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re going to answer the question &ldquo;what is a Condenser microphone?&rdquo;. &ldquo;Condenser&rdquo; and &ldquo;Dynamic&rdquo; are two of the most common types of mic. The terms refer to how they&rsquo;re built, and how they function. We can get really technical with stuff like this, but I&rsquo;d rather keep things simple. That means I&rsquo;ll make some generalisations that aren&rsquo;t&nbsp;*always*&nbsp;the rule &ndash; now and then you&rsquo;ll find exceptions. But here&rsquo;s a good starting point for differentiating between the two. A Condenser mic can be looked at as primarily something you&rsquo;d use to record vocals in a professional studio environment. Condenser microphones can often be more sensitive, and easier to break. Their sensitivity means they tend to pick up more sounds from around your recording environment. This can be a pro or a con depending on what you&rsquo;re trying to do. Most are designed for more permanent setups on mic stands or boom arms, as opposed to being carried around, and shoved in and out of boxes or bags. A Condenser mic is powered either by having its own battery, or by using a function called&nbsp;*Phantom Power*&nbsp;on your mixer, preamp, or recorder. This is why Condenser mics can usually record at a much lower gain than dynamics. Gain is essentially your input recording volume. The outcome is that lower gain means less hiss in your recording. Condenser mics often have multiple&nbsp;polar pattern&nbsp;options, making them versatile for different types of recording needs and setups. On the next episode, we&rsquo;re going to take a look at Dynamic mics and how they compare to their Condenser alternatives. In the meantime though, for a deeper dive on this subject, go to http://ThePodcastHost.com/dynamicvcondenser</p>]]></description><pubDate>Fri, 15 Aug 2025 07:04:01 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:41</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/11493f09-3453-41b8-a704-b1d2376f7bc5</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/11493f09-3453-41b8-a704-b1d2376f7bc5.mp3?t=1755241442000" length="1625796" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[“Condenser” and “Dynamic” are two of the most common types of mic. The terms refer to how they’re built, and how they function. 

We can get really technical with stuff like this, but I’d rather keep things simple. That means I’ll make some generalisations that aren’t *always* the rule – now and then you’ll find exceptions.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>402</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>402</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">3f84d4b1-65a1-4edf-8303-4fe298b00a32</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Podcast Equipment for Multiple Local Participants]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Podcast Equipment for Multiple Local Participants]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re going to talk about podcast equipment for recording multiple people, locally. If getting people in the same room together is the key for your podcast, then there are a few different options out there. On the previous 2 episodes, we&rsquo;ve mentioned the Samson Q2U mic and the Zoom PodTrak P4 podcast recorder. Get yourself a PodTrak P4 and then a Q2U for each person you&rsquo;ll be recording, and you&rsquo;ll have a brilliant set up for only a few hundred dollars. With the PodTrak P4 you don&rsquo;t need a computer as it records independently. If you&rsquo;d prefer to record into a computer, though, then you could get a USB audio interface and plug your mics into that. Our favourite USB audio interface is the Focusrite Scarlett 2i2, but be mindful that this only runs 2 mics at any one time. A couple of the more high-end options if you have a bit of budget behind you are the Zoom H6 digital recorder, and the Rodecaster Pro podcast recorder. These are premium options and if you pair them with mics like the Rode Procaster or Shure SM7B then you&rsquo;ll have a better setup than 99% of other podcasters out there. Of course, there&rsquo;s no need to spend a fortune on your podcasting kit, so for most folks, a handful of Samson Q2Us running into a Zoom PodTrak P4 will be more than good enough. For a more detailed look at choosing the right kit for you and your podcast, go to http://ThePodcastHost.com/equipment</p>]]></description><pubDate>Thu, 14 Aug 2025 07:04:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:28</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/3f84d4b1-65a1-4edf-8303-4fe298b00a32</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/3f84d4b1-65a1-4edf-8303-4fe298b00a32.mp3?t=1755155041000" length="1408135" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[If getting people in the same room together is the key for your podcast, then there are a few different options out there. On the previous 2 episodes, we’ve mentioned the Samson Q2U mic and the Zoom PodTrak P4 podcast recorder. Get yourself a PodTrak P4 and then a Q2U for each person you’ll be recording, and you’ll have a brilliant set up for only a few hundred dollars. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>401</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>401</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">048b4218-1984-4f1b-a5f8-2b4b09f69f1c</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Podcast Equipment for Online Interviews or Co-Hosts]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Podcast Equipment for Online Interviews or Co-Hosts]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re going to talk about podcast equipment for online interviews or co-hosts. Typically, the set up here is exactly the same as if you were podcasting on your own. If you listened to the previous episode, then you&rsquo;ll have heard me talk about the Samson Q2U. This works just as well for remote recordings as it does on the solo podcasting front. You&rsquo;d then either need online recording software or additional equipment to link up with your guests or co-hosts. We&rsquo;ll cover software in-depth in a future episode, but you can easily record calls with Alitu, which also does all the cleaning up and volume levelling automatically for you. For a 7-day free trial go to alitu.com, that&rsquo;s A-L-I-T-U dot com, and check it out for yourself. Back to the equipment though - if you&rsquo;d rather use hardware than software for remote recording then you might want to check out the Zoom PodTrak P4. This is a great wee podcast recorder that lets you plug in multiple mics, record online calls AND phone calls, and you can even play music and sound effects &ldquo;as live&rdquo; in your recordings, too. For most people, though, using call recording software such as Alitu is the best option because of its pure simplicity. But, if you *do* fancy getting yourself a Zoom PodTrak P4, they&rsquo;re usually available for less than $200 on Amazon. For a more detailed look at choosing the right kit for you and your podcast, go to http://ThePodcastHost.com/equipment</p>]]></description><pubDate>Wed, 13 Aug 2025 07:04:04 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:29</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/048b4218-1984-4f1b-a5f8-2b4b09f69f1c</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/048b4218-1984-4f1b-a5f8-2b4b09f69f1c.mp3?t=1755068645000" length="1425780" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Typically, the set up here is exactly the same as if you were podcasting on your own. If you listened to the previous episode, then you’ll have heard me talk about the Samson Q2U. This works just as well for remote recordings as it does on the solo podcasting front. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>400</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>400</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">9f131dc2-cfc8-4361-a23a-621f03da39f1</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Podcast Equipment for Solo Shows]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Podcast Equipment for Solo Shows]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re going to talk about podcast equipment for solo shows. If you&rsquo;re podcasting on your own then this makes choosing equipment easy. You&rsquo;re just going to need a USB mic and some headphones. I say &ldquo;headphones&rdquo; but even your trusty earbuds will do the trick here. You&rsquo;ll use these to &ldquo;monitor&rdquo; yourself as you record. That way, you can hear exactly *what* you record, as it&rsquo;s recorded, and pick up on any sound issues there and then. On the USB mic front, it seems like there are hundreds of quality and good value options on the market these days. This can make choosing one tricky. With that in mind, we&rsquo;re just going to recommend the one we think is ideal for 98% of aspiring and early-stage podcasters - the Samson Q2U. The Q2U can usually be bought brand new on Amazon for less than $70. You can also buy it in a special podcasting bundle along with headphones and a boom arm for around $95 - which is an excellent deal. Aside from being a great sounding budget mic, the Q2U works in both USB AND XLR form, so, if you want to upgrade to a mixer or digital recorder further down the line, you won&rsquo;t need to spend more money on a new mic. The Samson Q2U&rsquo;s availability varies depending on where you are in the world, but an almost identical mic is the ATR2100, so keep that in mind if you have trouble getting your hands on a Q2U. For a more detailed look at the Samson Q2U as the ideal solo podcaster mic, go to http://ThePodcastHost.com/solo</p>]]></description><pubDate>Tue, 12 Aug 2025 07:02:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:36</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/9f131dc2-cfc8-4361-a23a-621f03da39f1</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/9f131dc2-cfc8-4361-a23a-621f03da39f1.mp3?t=1754982121000" length="1545364" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[If you’re podcasting on your own then this makes choosing equipment easy. You’re just going to need a USB mic and some headphones. I say “headphones” but even your trusty earbuds will do the trick here. You’ll use these to “monitor” yourself as you record. That way, you can hear exactly what you record, as it’s recorded, and pick up on any sound issues there and then. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>399</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>399</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">f12ea516-70ac-43d8-8274-abef85a0bf09</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[What’s the Deal With Podcast Equipment?]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[What’s the Deal With Podcast Equipment?]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And over the next few episodes, we&rsquo;re going to talk about the gear you need to actually record your show. When we hear the term &ldquo;podcast equipment&rdquo; it&rsquo;s easy to imagine a pro-level studio filled with lots of intimidating and very expensive kit. But for the vast majority of podcasters, this looks nothing like their own recording setup. You can break podcast equipment down into categories, based on how you record and capture your voice, from mic to mixer to recorder to computer. The recording process can be made as simple or as complicated as you like. You can record right into your computer, ridding yourself of the need for a mixer or a recorder. Or you can go the full studio route, and use it all. If you use very little kit, the process will be simple, but you&rsquo;ll also have less flexibility and control. This isn&rsquo;t an issue for most aspiring podcasters though, as they&rsquo;ve no intention of becoming an audio engineer &ndash; they just want to get their message out there. There is no &ldquo;one-size-fits-all&rdquo; podcast equipment recommendation. As we covered earlier in the series, there are a few different podcast format options, and the format you choose will have a bearing on what gear you need. As will, of course, your budget. So over the next few episodes, we&rsquo;re going to take a look at some common use-cases and give you some recommendations for each of them. On top of that, we&rsquo;re going to give you some easy-to-understand explanations of common gear-related terms you&rsquo;ll likely come across, too. For a more detailed look at choosing the right kit for you and your podcast, go to http://ThePodcastHost.com/equipment</p>]]></description><pubDate>Mon, 11 Aug 2025 07:01:05 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:37</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/f12ea516-70ac-43d8-8274-abef85a0bf09</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/f12ea516-70ac-43d8-8274-abef85a0bf09.mp3?t=1754895666000" length="1559913" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[When we hear the term “podcast equipment” it’s easy to imagine a pro-level studio filled with lots of intimidating and very expensive kit. But for the vast majority of podcasters, this looks nothing like their own recording setup.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>398</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>398</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">953dfdbc-8535-408b-a56c-ee1b4ed88e1d</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[How to Get Good Podcast Cover Art]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[How to Get Good Podcast Cover Art]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about your show&rsquo;s cover art, sometimes known as your artwork or your podcast logo. Just like your episode titles, first impressions are everything. Having attractive cover art that stands out is so vital when your show lines up against thousands of others in apps like Apple Podcasts and Spotify. Your artwork should be at least 1400 x 1400 pixels, in JPG form, and it needs to be under 500kb in size. Apple actually recommends 3000 x 3000-pixel files, but we&rsquo;ve found because they&rsquo;re much weightier, those big files can cause issues with your RSS feeds further down the line. So I&rsquo;d usually opt for the smaller formats to help avoid running into the same problem. Your artwork will normally be viewed as a thumbnail - pretty small on-screen, often on a phone - so don&rsquo;t cram any small text onto it. In fact, the *only* text on there would ideally be your podcast name. Another reason your name should be descriptive... I often think that simpler is better with artwork. Your podcast title, covering practically the whole space, maybe with your brand colours and a background image, or a really small illustration alongside. You can create decent cover art for free on Canva, which I use all the time. They even have podcast logo templates on there. Or, you might want to hire a freelancer on a platform like Fiverr if you&rsquo;d like someone to do it for you. The benefit of working with a designer is that they can help you to encapsulate your branding. Cover art is a bit like choosing a podcast name, in many ways. You&rsquo;re trying to find that balance between descriptiveness, cleverness, and quirkiness, all in one static image - and it all still needs to work well when viewed as a thumbnail on a phone screen. For a more detailed look at designing your perfect podcast logo, go to http://ThePodcastHost.com/art</p>]]></description><pubDate>Fri, 08 Aug 2025 07:03:03 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:02:17</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/953dfdbc-8535-408b-a56c-ee1b4ed88e1d</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/953dfdbc-8535-408b-a56c-ee1b4ed88e1d.mp3?t=1754636584000" length="2201420" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Just like your episode titles, first impressions are everything. Having attractive cover art that stands out is so vital when your show lines up against thousands of others in apps like Apple Podcasts and Spotify.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>397</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>397</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">c7ec2558-9fe2-4155-a54e-04b5f8ebf74c</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[What Should Go In My Podcast Description?]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[What Should Go In My Podcast Description?]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about your show&rsquo;s description. Did you know that this is THE most important thing potential new listeners will judge your show on? This is in that crucial period where they&rsquo;ve found it, but haven&rsquo;t hit play yet. By the way, this isn&rsquo;t my opinion - it&rsquo;s right from the horse&rsquo;s mouth, via our Podcast Discovery Survey, which you can find at [ThePodcastHost.com/discovery](http://ThePodcastHost.com/discovery) So, a quick bit of clarity on what&rsquo;s meant by &ldquo;podcast description&rdquo; - this is the summary of your podcast in its entirety. So don&rsquo;t confuse it with the shownotes that accompany each episode. Podcast descriptions are often written as an afterthought, but they&rsquo;re worth spending a good bit of time on. In them, you should talk about *who* the show is for and what they can expect from it. We&rsquo;ve covered this already in our &ldquo;who&rdquo; and &ldquo;why&rdquo; episodes, so you&rsquo;ve done the groundwork, here - now, you just need to make it clear to your would-be listeners. You&rsquo;ll also want to let them know what to expect in terms of format and schedule. Do new episodes drop each Friday? Or do new seasons run every second month? Of course, you probably want to mention a bit about yourself, too. For example, who you are, what your angle is and why you&rsquo;re doing this show. Credibility is good, but the big key here is to make it all about *them -* the listeners. Just imagine someone reading it and thinking to themselves &ldquo;what&rsquo;s in this for *me*?&rdquo;. For a more detailed look at writing the perfect summary for your show, go to http://ThePodcastHost.com/description</p>]]></description><pubDate>Thu, 07 Aug 2025 07:02:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:42</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/c7ec2558-9fe2-4155-a54e-04b5f8ebf74c</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/c7ec2558-9fe2-4155-a54e-04b5f8ebf74c.mp3?t=1754550121000" length="1633565" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Did you know that your podcast description is THE most important thing potential new listeners will judge your show on? This is in that crucial period where they’ve found it, but haven’t hit play yet. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>396</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>396</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">365873aa-a283-4a59-91c1-608cfd324dbd</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[How Should I Name my Podcast Episodes?]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[How Should I Name my Podcast Episodes?]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about how to name your podcast *episodes.* We spent a bit of time earlier on talking about what to call your podcast as a whole. But how you title your episodes can be just as - or maybe even more - important! The biggest mistake when it comes to naming your episodes is to pop in meaningless details. Like Episode 1: This time I talk with... blah blah blah. You&rsquo;ve already lost them by the time they hit the 5th word. Instead, you need to front-load the title with value, really give them a reason to listen What&rsquo;s the meat of the episode? What problem are you solving? What solution are you offering? This is a big clue as to what your episode title should be. That&rsquo;s what draws people in. We find a lot of good *and* bad examples of episode titles with interview shows. If you have a guest on, don&rsquo;t just call the episode &ldquo;A chat with Jane Smith&rdquo;. If your listener has never heard of Jane, why would they care? But as it happens, Jane could be an expert on something they&rsquo;re really struggling with, so this would be the perfect episode for them. It&rsquo;s your duty as a host to signpost the value to them as much as possible. Without meaning to blow our own trumpet, take a look at the episode titles for this very podcast. I&rsquo;d like to think they&rsquo;re clear and deliver on what we promise here. The added benefit of descriptive episode titles is that they&rsquo;ll show up in search in most listening apps. So if someone types in a &ldquo;how to&rdquo; question on your own topic, and you have an episode on it, then there&rsquo;s a much better chance of them finding your show. Everyone wins! For a more detailed look at naming your podcast episodes, go to http://ThePodcastHost.com/episodetitles</p>]]></description><pubDate>Wed, 06 Aug 2025 07:02:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:47</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/365873aa-a283-4a59-91c1-608cfd324dbd</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/365873aa-a283-4a59-91c1-608cfd324dbd.mp3?t=1754463721000" length="1713086" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[What’s the meat of the episode? What problem are you solving? What solution are you offering? This is a big clue as to what your episode title should be. That’s what draws people in. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>395</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>395</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">baa9ec3a-e498-45af-859f-2ff1483bcbdd</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Why Podcast in Seasons?]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Why Podcast in Seasons?]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about releasing podcast episodes in seasons. On the last episode, we talked about the tricky balance of finding your ideal release frequency. So, what if the podcast you&rsquo;d like to create is a really in-depth, highly produced show, that goes out every single week? But, you know that, in the long run, that weekly schedule is a bit unsustainable? The ideal answer could be to take a leaf out of your favourite TV show&rsquo;s book, and podcast in seasons. Here, a &ldquo;season&rdquo; represents a block of episodes. The &ldquo;How many&rdquo; is up to you. For some, it&rsquo;ll be 6, for others, it&rsquo;ll be upwards of 20. This means that you can really throw yourself into creating some great content, and then, take a well-deserved rest before going on to tackle the next season. The beauty of this approach is that seasons can be &ldquo;themed&rdquo;, which makes your show really accessible and appealing to new listeners. Our fitness podcaster, for example, might do an entire season on upper body strength, whilst our zombie podcaster could do one on post apocalyptic video games. Podcasters who take this &ldquo;themed season&rdquo; approach also benefit from repurposing and monetising their content. We&rsquo;ve seen many ebooks and courses created from them, because a lot of the work in the planning, structure, and organisation, has already been done. One common critique of seasons is that listeners will &ldquo;forget about you&rdquo; during your breaks. This doesn&rsquo;t need to be the case. So long as you make it clear to them how the show works and how long the break is - then they&rsquo;ll know what to expect. You&rsquo;re also asking them to subscribe on their listening app of choice, too. So they never need to &ldquo;remember&rdquo; you&rsquo;ve come back - your next episode will be delivered to them automatically, without any effort on their part. Sell that benefit to them, and all will be well! For a more detailed look at podcasting in seasons, go to http://ThePodcastHost.com/seasons</p>]]></description><pubDate>Tue, 05 Aug 2025 07:03:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:02:16</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/baa9ec3a-e498-45af-859f-2ff1483bcbdd</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/baa9ec3a-e498-45af-859f-2ff1483bcbdd.mp3?t=1754377381000" length="2179236" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Should you take a leaf out of your favourite TV show’s book, and podcast in seasons?]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>394</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>394</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">58373eda-9126-471e-8763-83bbc04c7823</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[How Often Should I Release Podcast Episodes?]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[How Often Should I Release Podcast Episodes?]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking how often! As in how frequently should you be releasing podcast episodes? Just like the &ldquo;ideal length&rdquo; question, there&rsquo;s no one-size-fits-all answer here. The best podcast release schedule is really the most regular one that *you* can stick to, on a consistent basis. So, if you can only manage once a month, that&rsquo;s fine. If you can manage every 2 weeks, even better. If you can manage weekly, then that&rsquo;s about ideal. You can still have a big impact with a fortnightly, or monthly show, but people plan their lives around what day of the week it is. It&rsquo;s the routine at the forefront of our lives, so tapping into a weekly release schedule can be powerful, and build a strong habit in your listeners. Now, what about daily, though, like this show? Daily podcasts tend to have shorter episodes, and you can often batch it - plan, record, and schedule a week or two&rsquo;s worth in just one day. So they can actually be *more* sustainable in certain cases. But, as always, it depends entirely on what works best for *you, and for your listeners. Do they really want what you&rsquo;re offering, every day? Or would they prefer something deeper, once a week?* Ultimately, remember that it&rsquo;s down to quality. Sticking to a deadline which reduces the quality of your episodes, is pointless. You&rsquo;ll have a bigger impact if you put out one excellent episode a month instead of a totally average episode every week, or even - every day. If you&rsquo;re still totally undecided on this, too, then don&rsquo;t worry. We&rsquo;ve got a tip for you on the next episode that can help you find the perfect work-life balance, so be sure to join us again for that. In the meantime, for a more detailed look at how often you should podcast, go to http://ThePodcastHost.com/frequency</p>]]></description><pubDate>Mon, 04 Aug 2025 07:01:01 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:46</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/58373eda-9126-471e-8763-83bbc04c7823</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/58373eda-9126-471e-8763-83bbc04c7823.mp3?t=1754290862000" length="1706108" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Just like the “ideal length” question, there’s no one-size-fits-all answer here. The best podcast release schedule is really the most regular one that you can stick to, on a consistent basis.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>393</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>393</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">2cbdba67-06b5-4f4f-b00f-e1c2d955a4eb</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[How Long Should My Podcast Episodes Be?]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[How Long Should My Podcast Episodes Be?]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about how long your podcast episodes should be. Here&rsquo;s the bottom line - podcast length depends solely on content. Don&rsquo;t cut down good content - or, pad out succinct work! How long does your episode need to be to get the message out? Then that&rsquo;s the ideal length for you. If you asked most podcast listeners, a &ldquo;short&rdquo; episode would probably be anything under 15 minutes. And a &ldquo;long&rdquo; episode would probably be anything over an hour. Anything from 20 to 45 minutes seems to be the &ldquo;typical&rdquo; episode length, but again, let your content dictate. Just try to aim for some ballpark consistency from episode to episode. Doing 5mins one week then 2 hours the next is going to be a bit jarring for your audience. Podcast listeners like to know what to expect! For a more detailed look at podcast episode lengths, go to http://ThePodcastHost.com/length</p>]]></description><pubDate>Fri, 01 Aug 2025 07:00:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:05</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/2cbdba67-06b5-4f4f-b00f-e1c2d955a4eb</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/2cbdba67-06b5-4f4f-b00f-e1c2d955a4eb.mp3?t=1754031601000" length="1043039" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[How long does your episode need to be to get the message out? Then that’s the ideal length for you. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>392</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>392</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">74475f91-df8f-427e-a73c-312fade3c45b</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Should I Put My Name in My Podcast Title?]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Should I Put My Name in My Podcast Title?]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about using your own name in or as your podcast&rsquo;s name. If you&rsquo;ve heard of Tim Ferriss or Joe Rogan, then you&rsquo;ll know what we&rsquo;re talking about here. Podcasts that are named after their hosts generally have one thing in common &ndash; the host already had an audience&nbsp;*before*&nbsp;they started the podcast. These names offer no hints about the show's content. If you've never heard of Tim Ferris, his show could be about literally anything. As it happens, the podcast is about &ldquo;interviewing world-class performers&rdquo; in all fields, linking together the similarities and routines that connect them. If nobody knew Tim Ferris, he'd probably have put a bit more description into his title. Something like &ldquo;How to be World Class&rdquo; would certainly catch the eye of his target audience. Bottom line? If you already have a strong personal brand then this can work well for you. If you&rsquo;re a bit more early-stage, though, then opt for a more descriptive podcast name instead. For a more detailed look at choosing a name for your show, go to http://ThePodcastHost.com/Names</p>]]></description><pubDate>Thu, 31 Jul 2025 07:04:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:13</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/74475f91-df8f-427e-a73c-312fade3c45b</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/74475f91-df8f-427e-a73c-312fade3c45b.mp3?t=1753945441000" length="1164699" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Podcasts that are named after their hosts generally have one thing in common – the host already had an audience *before* they started the podcast.

These names offer no hints about the show's content. If you've never heard of Tim Ferris, his show could be about literally anything.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>391</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>391</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">d21d6d88-8f57-4280-b400-91940a3aacdc</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Should I Choose a Clever, Quirky, or Mysterious Podcast Name?]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Should I Choose a Clever, Quirky, or Mysterious Podcast Name?]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about clever, quirky, or even, mysterious podcast names. Famous examples here include The Moth, and 99% Invisible. Creative or &ldquo;clever&rdquo; names are often built around puns, plays on words or in-jokes from the show's topic or niche. Many of these names make sense when you look deeply enough into them. But others are just plain abstract and offer no hint into the show's actual content. If you already have an audience, a reputation as a good content creator, or a big marketing budget, then this won't necessarily hold you back. If enough people check out your show and enjoy it, then you'll do fine. But if you're starting completely from scratch then you need to ask yourself what your target audience are searching for online &ndash; and if your podcast name is going to show up in these searches. Does this sound more like your own situation? If so, then you might want to opt for the descriptive naming route instead! For a more detailed look at choosing a name for your show, go to http://ThePodcastHost.com/Names</p>]]></description><pubDate>Wed, 30 Jul 2025 07:03:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:09</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/d21d6d88-8f57-4280-b400-91940a3aacdc</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/d21d6d88-8f57-4280-b400-91940a3aacdc.mp3?t=1753858981000" length="1104753" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Creative or “clever” names are often built around puns, plays on words or in-jokes from the show's topic or niche.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>390</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>390</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">07715c7f-0c28-4911-9072-48d30c038619</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Should I Choose a Descriptive Podcast Name?]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Should I Choose a Descriptive Podcast Name?]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>**Choosing a Descriptive Podcast Name** Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about &ldquo;descriptive&rdquo; podcast names. Famous examples of descriptive names are&nbsp;The Property Podcast and&nbsp;Football Weekly. This type of name can be described as &ldquo;doing exactly what it says on the tin&rdquo;. You might think of this as the &ldquo;boring&rdquo; option, but as long as your content isn't boring, nobody's going to care. Descriptive podcast names are immediately identifiable to their target audience. And they're easier to find because they perform better in searches. However, if you have a really creative or clever name picked out for your show and are desperate to use it, you can always find a way to merge it with a descriptive title, too. Is there a pun or reference in your niche that you could work into your show&rsquo;s name somehow? For a more detailed look at choosing a name for your show, go to http://ThePodcastHost.com/Names</p>]]></description><pubDate>Tue, 29 Jul 2025 07:01:02 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:00:53</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/07715c7f-0c28-4911-9072-48d30c038619</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/07715c7f-0c28-4911-9072-48d30c038619.mp3?t=1753772463000" length="844132" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Descriptive podcast names are immediately identifiable to their target audience. And they're easier to find because they perform better in searches.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>389</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>389</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">79f33730-2ee7-47ae-b64a-9bdb90ae5c5e</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[How to Choose a Great Name Your Podcast]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[How to Choose a Great Name Your Podcast]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about one of the biggest decisions made by new podcasters - naming your show. There are 3 main camps when it comes to naming your show - you might simply use your own name, or, you might opt for something clever or descriptive. We&rsquo;re going to look at each option, in more depth, over the next few episodes. Start by creating a shortlist of potential podcast names. Then, do a search in a directory or app like Apple Podcasts to see if any of them are taken. If your perfect show name is being used by a podcast that stopped publishing episodes 10 years ago, then this can be frustrating. There are plenty of shows out there with the same name as one another - however, it&rsquo;s better not to cause confusion to your audience by joining their ranks. So try to come up with something new and unique, here. That&rsquo;s ultimately going to give your podcast the best chance of being discovered and growing to its maximum potential. For a more detailed look at choosing a name for your show, go to http://ThePodcastHost.com/Names</p>]]></description><pubDate>Mon, 28 Jul 2025 07:00:02 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:07</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/79f33730-2ee7-47ae-b64a-9bdb90ae5c5e</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/79f33730-2ee7-47ae-b64a-9bdb90ae5c5e.mp3?t=1753686003000" length="1074214" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[There are 3 main camps when it comes to naming your show - you might simply use your own name, or, you might opt for something clever or descriptive. We’re going to look at each option, in more depth, over the next few episodes. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>388</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>388</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">3660ff6b-e9b6-4167-ab14-84084eb41401</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Pros & Cons of Documentary or Fiction Podcasts]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Pros & Cons of Documentary or Fiction Podcasts]]></title><description><![CDATA[Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we’re talking about documentary-style and fiction podcast formats.

Documentary podcasts are often referred to as “BBC-style” or “NPR-style”. These shows mix in multiple voices, musical elements, and actuality to add an extra layer of production and storytelling. The end product can sound great, but the time and work needed to put them together will increase drastically.

Another high-production format is the fiction podcast. These come in many forms, from “audiobook style” to fully soundscaped audio dramas, where every footstep is accounted for. Again, the end result can be fantastic, but running a fiction podcast is a big time investment, especially if you want to publish episodes on a regular basis.

Of course, the reward for such a heavy workload is that these shows can *really* stand out, which helps them to grow fanatical audiences. They also make great showcases for a multitude of skillsets, from writing and storytelling, to recording and production. Some fiction podcasts have even been adapted into TV shows! 

For a more detailed look at which podcast format is the best fit for you, go to http://ThePodcastHost.com/Formats]]></description><pubDate>Fri, 25 Jul 2025 07:04:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:09</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/3660ff6b-e9b6-4167-ab14-84084eb41401</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/3660ff6b-e9b6-4167-ab14-84084eb41401.mp3?t=1753427041000" length="1109498" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Documentary podcasts are often referred to as “BBC-style” or “NPR-style”. These shows mix in multiple voices, musical elements, and actuality to add an extra layer of production and storytelling. The end product can sound great, but the time and work needed to put them together will increase drastically.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>387</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>387</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">5f3dc98b-39e8-4092-ae07-a4b4982b931c</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Pros & Cons of the Roundtable Podcast Format]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Pros & Cons of the Roundtable Podcast Format]]></title><description><![CDATA[Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we’re talking about the roundtable podcast format.

A “roundtable” refers to the idea of getting a larger number of participants together to discuss a set topic. Normally there would be at least one regular host, if not two or three. Then the rest of the ‘table’ is made up of guests who are experts in the topic at hand.

Your job as host is to direct the roundtable, asking questions and steering the topic, so that everyone gets a turn and contributes to a great conversation.

The roundtable format can be a good way to build authority in your niche. This allows you to invite prominent guests to the show who’ll share their wisdom and experience.

That said, organising multiple guests and finding suitable recording times can be a big challenge. Each person you add to the mix adds another layer of complexity. Only the most organised of people can pull this off in the long run.

For a more detailed look at which podcast format is the best fit for you, go to http://ThePodcastHost.com/Formats ]]></description><pubDate>Thu, 24 Jul 2025 07:05:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:09</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/5f3dc98b-39e8-4092-ae07-a4b4982b931c</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/5f3dc98b-39e8-4092-ae07-a4b4982b931c.mp3?t=1753340701000" length="1103351" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[A “roundtable” refers to the idea of getting a larger number of participants together to discuss a set topic. Normally there would be at least one regular host, if not two or three. Then the rest of the ‘table’ is made up of guests who are experts in the topic at hand.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>386</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>386</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">db45ee0e-da02-4b48-980f-84dd35dbb2ab</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Pros & Cons of the Interview Podcast Format]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Pros & Cons of the Interview Podcast Format]]></title><description><![CDATA[Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we’re talking about the interview podcast format. This is where you ‘borrow’ the expertise or entertainment value of others.

With this style of podcast format, a huge benefit is getting to talk to your heroes.

Here, you’ll have the opportunity to have a chat with people in your space that you’ve always looked up to. On top of that, your guests will have their own audiences who may listen to the interview and end up subscribing to your show. If done right, you can really grow an audience this way.

On the flip side, interviewing is a skill that you’ll need to hone through practice, so don’t approach the A-listers in your field straight away.

There are other challenges, too. You’ll need to constantly find and approach potential guests, schedule interviews, and rely on others to show up – either in-person or digitally. And, you’ll also need to rely on the technology to work properly throughout each call.

For a more detailed look at the interview podcast format, go to http://ThePodcastHost.com/podcastinterviews]]></description><pubDate>Wed, 23 Jul 2025 07:01:02 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:04</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/db45ee0e-da02-4b48-980f-84dd35dbb2ab</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/db45ee0e-da02-4b48-980f-84dd35dbb2ab.mp3?t=1753254063000" length="1032764" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[A huge benefit of the interview podcast format is getting to talk to your heroes.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>385</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>385</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">a5889b64-6fc3-43fd-8c19-a076d646dfdf</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Pros & Cons of the Co-Hosted Podcast Format]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Pros & Cons of the Co-Hosted Podcast Format]]></title><description><![CDATA[Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker.

On this episode, we’re talking about the co-hosted podcast format. This is when you present your show alongside another regular host - whether it's a friend or a colleague.

This is a great format for anyone, but particularly early podcasters. It reduces that ‘mic fright’ you get when recording solo, or the possibility of being a bit monotone. Instead, find the right co-host and you can have a totally natural conversation. Someone to bounce off, debate with, or even take mickey out of.

The best co-hosted podcasts have great chemistry between the presenters. You end up being a fly on the way of a great, funny, informative conversation. That creates a first-class listening experience.

As always, though, there are challenges. Suddenly you have to coordinate with someone else's calendar when you arrange to record, for example.

Then, there’s the question of ownership: who’s podcast is it? Do you split any future income 50/50? And what happens if your co-host loses interest or just can't do it in the future?

So if you do opt for this style of show, definitely have that conversation with your co-host up front, before hitting record on that first episode.

For a more detailed look at which podcast format is the best fit for you, go to http://ThePodcastHost.com/Formats]]></description><pubDate>Tue, 22 Jul 2025 07:01:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:40</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/a5889b64-6fc3-43fd-8c19-a076d646dfdf</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/a5889b64-6fc3-43fd-8c19-a076d646dfdf.mp3?t=1753167661000" length="1605838" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[On this episode, we’re talking about the co-hosted podcast format. This is when you present your show alongside another regular host - whether it's a friend or a colleague.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>384</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>384</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">848f090a-b19f-4c5d-b7b9-ab464d25dce8</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Pros & Cons of the Solo Podcast Format]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Pros & Cons of the Solo Podcast Format]]></title><description><![CDATA[Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we’re talking about the solo podcast format, AKA - the monologue.

Each podcast format comes with its own pros and cons. The big benefit of a solo show is that you don’t need to rely on anyone else to record your episodes. On top of that, it’s YOU who’s building a reputation as the authority on your subject.

The podcast is also exclusively yours, so you can make all the calls on sponsorship and monetization. And you don’t need to split the profits with anyone.

There are potential downsides too, though. A solo podcast is perhaps the most intimidating style of show for a beginner. One of the biggest challenges of flying solo is getting over the feeling that you’re ‘talking to yourself’ and realising that you’re actually talking to your listener.

For a more detailed look at which podcast format is the best fit for you, go to ThePodcastHost.com/Formats]]></description><pubDate>Mon, 21 Jul 2025 07:05:03 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:00:59</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/848f090a-b19f-4c5d-b7b9-ab464d25dce8</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/848f090a-b19f-4c5d-b7b9-ab464d25dce8.mp3?t=1753081504000" length="943403" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>383</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>383</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">a04ccc56-28e7-4f2f-9018-d6332a7cdbb0</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[How to Choose the Ideal Format for Your Podcast]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[How to Choose the Ideal Format for Your Podcast]]></title><description><![CDATA[Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we’re talking about choosing a format for your episodes.

The format you choose is really personal, and depends on who’s involved. If it’s just you, you’re not doing a co-hosted show any time soon, for example

None of this is set in stone, either. So whilst it’s good to have an ‘average’ format, so your listeners know what to expect, you don’t have to stick to it every single time.

You might do your first few episodes using a certain format – for example, solo - then decide it isn’t for you. In this case, you could pivot and start doing interviews. Or, you could bring on a regular co-host.

The first format you try might feel perfectly natural to you, in which case, great. Or you might opt for a ‘mixed bag’ approach where you never stick to any one set format. The beauty of it is that it’s *your* podcast, and you get to make the rules.

We’re going to dig into the pros and cons of each podcast format in the next few episodes, so make sure you’re subscribed to the show on your listening app of choice!]]></description><pubDate>Fri, 18 Jul 2025 07:00:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:22</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/a04ccc56-28e7-4f2f-9018-d6332a7cdbb0</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/a04ccc56-28e7-4f2f-9018-d6332a7cdbb0.mp3?t=1752822001000" length="1308185" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[The format you choose is really personal, and depends on who’s involved. If it’s just you, you’re not doing a co-hosted show any time soon, for example.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>382</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>382</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">feef29fe-688d-4e41-a75e-78467dc4ee37</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Are Niches and Narrow Podcast Topics a Good Idea?]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Are Niches and Narrow Podcast Topics a Good Idea?]]></title><description><![CDATA[Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker.

And on this episode, we’re talking about niches (nitches?) and narrow topics.

There’s a bit of a misconception in podcasting that, the wider and more open your topic, the bigger your audience will be.

I know, it makes sense because covering lots of ground means there's loads more people who *might* be interested in your show.

The reality, though, is that listeners love podcasts that feel like they were made *just for them*.

So instead of our personal trainer doing a podcast about general health, diet, or exercise, it might be “the fitness podcast for single parents”, or “the keto diet podcast for vegetarians”.

In other areas, niche podcasts could be “The travel podcast, for D&D players”, or “The business startup podcast, for military veterans”.

You might have a fear that this'll limit your audience, but, actually, the opposite is true. When your target listeners find your show, and see how closely it scratches their itch,  they’ll think “this is perfect!”, hit subscribe, and go on to become fanatical fans. On the other hand, if keep it general, everyone just sees it, goes 'meh' and moves on. When you try to target everyone, you really target no-one in particular.

So what would you rather have - a tight, defined group of fanatical listeners, or a big group who just *might* be interested in listening?

For a really detailed look at defining your niche topic, go to http://ThePodcastHost.com/topic]]></description><pubDate>Thu, 17 Jul 2025 07:02:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:49</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/feef29fe-688d-4e41-a75e-78467dc4ee37</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/feef29fe-688d-4e41-a75e-78467dc4ee37.mp3?t=1752735721000" length="1749068" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>381</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>381</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">07cc73b6-59c1-40d6-acd4-c20a9f5c3a9f</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Why Should They Listen to Your Podcast?]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Why Should They Listen to Your Podcast?]]></title><description><![CDATA[Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we’re talking about giving your audience a no-brainer reason to listen.

This, my friend, is all about supplying value in your very own unique way.

But what does that *actually* mean?

Well, let’s take the example of our personal trainer, I mentioned last time. If they’re serving up content that helps their listeners to, let's say, complete a couch to 5k, then they're providing value. If they can help a listener lose a few stone, or run a faster race, then that's a LOT of value!

Or what about our zombie podcaster? They might do an in-depth interview with a top author in the space.  They'll dig in to unearth some anecdotes and insights that you've never heard anywhere else before from that writer. In that, they're providing some really unique value.

If you do something similar on your show, not only have you given your audience a reason to listen, you've also given them a reason to come back for more, every week.

This is absolutely vital for you to think about in the planning stages. So can you write down 10-15 potential episodes that you think your target audience would love to listen to? If you're teaching, it's often about considering the most common problems you can help them solve. And if it's entertainment, it's finding new content, or entertainment that scratches that person's personal itch.

And, for a more detailed look at giving them a reason to listen, go to http://ThePodcastHost.com/unique]]></description><pubDate>Wed, 16 Jul 2025 07:02:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:43</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/07cc73b6-59c1-40d6-acd4-c20a9f5c3a9f</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/07cc73b6-59c1-40d6-acd4-c20a9f5c3a9f.mp3?t=1752649321000" length="1655453" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>380</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>380</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">430ba22d-1190-4b89-ad20-427aa8c8782c</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Who is Your Podcast For?]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Who is Your Podcast For?]]></title><description><![CDATA[Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. On this episode, we’re asking a big question: Who are you making your podcast for?

The thing is, unless you know exactly *who* you’re making your show for, and *why* you’re doing it, you’ve got no chance of growing an audience.

Let’s imagine a personal trainer who’s making a health and fitness podcast to market their business. Their target audience might be people who are interested in healthy eating, weight loss, or HIIT training, or bodybuilding.

Or, let’s imagine a hobbyist who loves zombies and post-apocalyptic fiction. Their target audience would simply be folks with the same really specific passion. They might be fans of TV shows like The Walking Dead, and video games like Resident Evil.

It's a good idea to sketch out what’s known as your “avatar”. An avatar is a made up person that represents your ideal listeners in the real world. You make this detailed - with a name, age, job, background, likes, dislikes. You make this as real as you can, so it's someone you can know, deeply. The benefit then is that, with each episode you plan out, you can ask yourself the question “would Jane (my avatar) like this?” Asking that question is the key to making really compelling content, every time.

For a really detailed look at how to create your avatar, and a bunch of examples, go to 
 http://ThePodcastHost.com/listener]]></description><pubDate>Tue, 15 Jul 2025 07:04:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:35</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/430ba22d-1190-4b89-ad20-427aa8c8782c</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/430ba22d-1190-4b89-ad20-427aa8c8782c.mp3?t=1752563041000" length="1524820" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>379</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>379</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">6ed2b805-f7fc-4466-944c-9344944b3371</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Why Are You Doing a Podcast?]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Why Are You Doing a Podcast?]]></title><description><![CDATA[Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker.

And on this episode, we’re asking the question “Why?”

Why do you want to make a podcast?

Are you a freelancer?  A business? Or working for a company? Whatever you do, you'll know that podcasting's a great way to build trust and authority.  Plus, of course, give your customers or your audience a whole bunch of valuable and entertaining content.

The other option is that you're in podcasting as a hobbyist? That could mean you'll be creating a show in your spare time, and on a subject you're passionate about. Anything from knitting, to craft beer, to horror movies.

Either way, figure out your why. It could be making more sales. Or growing a community. Or getting famous! They're all valid. And they're important to keep in mind so that you can stay motivated, even when life throws you those inevitable curveballs. Podcasting isn’t always easy, but if your “Why” is worth it, you’ll push on through. ]]></description><pubDate>Mon, 14 Jul 2025 07:00:01 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:29</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/6ed2b805-f7fc-4466-944c-9344944b3371</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/6ed2b805-f7fc-4466-944c-9344944b3371.mp3?t=1752476402000" length="1419470" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>378</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>378</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">0a6d79fb-27dd-48a2-a433-9834ad37c5de</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Compile an eBook From Your Podcast]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Compile an eBook From Your Podcast]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about compiling an ebook. A lot of podcasters do this once they&rsquo;ve hit a critical mass with their episodes. You end up with a lot of wisdom and knowledge in that big bank of content. So, what threads or narratives could you pull out and build an ebook around? An example of this might be a recurring question you ask every guest, and now you have 50 different answers. Or, maybe you&rsquo;ve noticed a pattern in how each guest battled through adversity to become successful in their field. If you do themed and structured seasons, then your book chapters are pretty much laid out for you. Use your scripts, transcripts, and shownotes to build a first draft, polish it up, then you can use it whatever way you like. Some choose to give it away for visibility or as a lead magnet. Others prefer to stick it up for sale on Amazon or their own e-commerce store. Either way, ebooks are one of the best ways to repurpose your content and create extra value for your audience. Thanks for listening to Pocket-Sized Podcasting. And, if you&rsquo;re enjoying the show, please do leave us a rating and review on your listening app of choice. We really would appreciate it.</p>]]></description><pubDate>Tue, 07 May 2024 10:49:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:16</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/0a6d79fb-27dd-48a2-a433-9834ad37c5de</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/0a6d79fb-27dd-48a2-a433-9834ad37c5de.mp3?t=1715078941000" length="1210496" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[A lot of podcasters do this once they’ve hit a critical mass with their episodes. You end up with a lot of wisdom and knowledge in that big bank of content. So, what threads or narratives could you pull out and build an ebook around? ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>377</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>377</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">0f044cf4-fc43-4763-a900-3a2c0fcaafe2</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Social Media Stories]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Social Media Stories]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about social media stories. Most social media platforms have their own version of a &ldquo;stories&rdquo; or &ldquo;shorts&rdquo; feature, where you post short clips from throughout your day. And whilst *actually* posting short clips to social media throughout your day sounds like a terrible idea, you can still use these tools to create extra content and engagement around your podcast. For example, during a pre-chat or set up, or as a sort of post-show conversation. You could even use them to document you decking out your new podcast studio, unboxing your latest bit of kit, or just talking through your note-taking strategy that lays the foundations for your episode prep. Always treat this stuff as icing, though, and never let it get in the way of working on your actual podcast. If you&rsquo;re finding life a bit busy and hectic, then dedicating time to social media should be the first thing to go. Thanks for listening to Pocket-Sized Podcasting. And, if you&rsquo;re enjoying the show, please do leave us a rating and review on your listening app of choice. We really would appreciate it.</p>]]></description><pubDate>Mon, 06 May 2024 10:48:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:09</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/0f044cf4-fc43-4763-a900-3a2c0fcaafe2</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/0f044cf4-fc43-4763-a900-3a2c0fcaafe2.mp3?t=1714992481000" length="1106048" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Most social media platforms have their own version of a “stories” or “shorts” feature, where you post short clips from throughout your day. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>376</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>376</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">dc7af5cb-86b3-4321-88b2-e2c07d7ea9a8</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Posting Video Versions of Episodes]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Posting Video Versions of Episodes]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about posting video versions of your episodes. Post-pandemic, people are a lot more familiar with talking on video these days. In the past, it was almost assumed that a podcast recording would be audio-only. But now, you&rsquo;ll find that a lot of guests turn up almost expecting the video to be recorded, too. If you and your guest are comfortable with it, then it makes total sense to record video as well as audio. You can upload these videos to YouTube, which is the second biggest search engine in the world. You don&rsquo;t even have to post the full episodes as videos, either. You can pick out one of two short clips to publish as micro-content, which makes them more searchable, and act as great teaser samples for the full show. Having a video component to your podcast can go a long way towards expanding your reach and growing your audience. For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to [thepodcasthost.com/videopods](http://thepodcasthost.com/videopods)</p>]]></description><pubDate>Fri, 03 May 2024 10:48:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:05</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/dc7af5cb-86b3-4321-88b2-e2c07d7ea9a8</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/dc7af5cb-86b3-4321-88b2-e2c07d7ea9a8.mp3?t=1714733281000" length="1038464" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[If you and your guest are comfortable with it, then it makes total sense to record video as well as audio. You can upload these videos to YouTube, which is the second biggest search engine in the world. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>375</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>375</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">38a7767c-7be9-4083-9d2f-51cd3ecb8c31</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Written Content & Blogging]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Written Content & Blogging]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about written content and blogging. As podcasters, we&rsquo;re missing a trick when we think of our &ldquo;show notes&rdquo; as an afterthought. If you&rsquo;ve planned and scripted your episode, you might only tweak this slightly then just slap it in there when you hit publish. But an extra 20mins spent turning your outline or show notes into something we might more accurately describe as a &ldquo;blog post&rdquo; can be well worth your while. Can you write 500-700 words around your episode topic in a structured and cohesive manner? Good blog posts are extremely shareable. And, you might end up with some decent search traffic via Google. Ultimately, this is all going to help you in the quest to grow your audience. Even if you don&rsquo;t think of yourself as a &ldquo;good&rdquo; writer, a free tool like Grammarly can help you a lot, here. And you don&rsquo;t need to become the next Stephen King to make written content work well for you. The big work is in the structure and message, and you&rsquo;re already doing that each time you outline a new episode. Thanks for listening to Pocket-Sized Podcasting. And, for a deeper dive on this subject, head on over to [thepodcasthost.com/stacking](http://thepodcasthost.com/stacking)</p>]]></description><pubDate>Thu, 02 May 2024 10:48:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:15</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/38a7767c-7be9-4083-9d2f-51cd3ecb8c31</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/38a7767c-7be9-4083-9d2f-51cd3ecb8c31.mp3?t=1714646881000" length="1198208" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[An extra 20mins spent turning your outline or show notes into something we might more accurately describe as a “blog post” can be well worth your while. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>374</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>374</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">e897e9f5-3618-4032-97fe-3a3059f7922f</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Live Broadcasting & Streaming]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Live Broadcasting & Streaming]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about live broadcasting or streaming. If you&rsquo;ve got a phone or an internet connection, then you have the ability to &ldquo;go live&rdquo; at any time. Typically, this would be on one of the big social media platforms, a dedicated streaming platform like twitch, or, an app like Podbean. Some podcasters like to record their episodes live for the audience interaction and instant feedback, or, just that feeling of &ldquo;being live&rdquo;. Others might choose to do their episode prep live, where they&rsquo;ll take questions and queries in advance. Live broadcasting isn&rsquo;t for everyone, and the reach is definitely far more limited than your on-demand content. But this might be something you can easily fit into your workflow that creates a bit of extra engagement and visibility. Thanks for listening to Pocket-Sized Podcasting. And, for a deeper dive on this subject, head on over to [thepodcasthost.com/livepod](http://thepodcasthost.com/livepod)</p>]]></description><pubDate>Wed, 01 May 2024 10:47:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:02</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/e897e9f5-3618-4032-97fe-3a3059f7922f</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/e897e9f5-3618-4032-97fe-3a3059f7922f.mp3?t=1714560421000" length="993408" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[If you’ve got a phone or an internet connection, then you have the ability to “go live” at any time. Typically, this would be on one of the big social media platforms, a dedicated streaming platform like twitch, or, an app like Podbean. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>373</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>373</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">2e58c029-9eff-4d6f-9bf2-42c400e06f84</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Podcast Growth Through Repurposing]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Podcast Growth Through Repurposing]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about podcast growth through repurposing. If you&rsquo;re spending time creating great content in one medium - in our case, audio - then you can multiply its impact by repurposing or &lsquo;stacking&rsquo; it. For example, with this podcast, I script the episodes, then record them. I could also film the recording, for YouTube, record it live, for streaming or social media, and then use the scripts as a blog post or even an email sequence. That&rsquo;s a lot of different outputs for almost no extra work. So over the next few episodes, we&rsquo;re going to take a deeper dive into repurposing. The aim is to maximise the impact and reach of your content and ensure that nothing ever gets wasted. If you&rsquo;ve taken the time to put something good together, why not have it out there working for you in as many different formats as possible? Thanks for listening to Pocket-Sized Podcasting. And, if you&rsquo;re enjoying the show, please follow or subscribe on your listening app or choice so you never miss an episode.</p>]]></description><pubDate>Tue, 30 Apr 2024 10:47:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:05</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/2e58c029-9eff-4d6f-9bf2-42c400e06f84</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/2e58c029-9eff-4d6f-9bf2-42c400e06f84.mp3?t=1714474021000" length="1048704" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[If you’re spending time creating great content in one medium - in our case, audio - then you can multiply its impact by repurposing or ‘stacking’ it. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>372</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>372</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">391ee879-c499-48c5-b26f-2b0cd937a9ca</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Event Sponsorship]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Event Sponsorship]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about event sponsorship. We&rsquo;ve already talked about going to conferences and conventions in your niche. So how about sponsoring one to promote your podcast? Event organisers will tend to offer different sponsorship tiers. There&rsquo;s usually a main event sponsor, though depending on the industry, this could be pretty expensive. Sponsorship of things like lanyards and canvas bags can be a lot cheaper, though, and pretty effective at the same time. With the lanyards, there are eyes going to them the whole day as people meet, and look at each other&rsquo;s name. With bags, these are carried around the whole day and are constantly on display as attendees fill them full of swag. Both the lanyards and the bags are generally kept by attendees too, so there&rsquo;s a good chance your branding will make it back home with them afterwards. The beauty of event sponsorship is that you don&rsquo;t even physically need to be there. You can sponsor an event on the other side of the world, or multiple events at the same time! Thanks for listening to Pocket-Sized Podcasting. And, if you&rsquo;re enjoying the show, please do leave us a rating and review on your listening app of choice. We really would appreciate it.</p>]]></description><pubDate>Mon, 29 Apr 2024 10:47:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:15</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/391ee879-c499-48c5-b26f-2b0cd937a9ca</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/391ee879-c499-48c5-b26f-2b0cd937a9ca.mp3?t=1714387621000" length="1208448" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[The beauty of event sponsorship is that you don’t even physically need to be there. You can sponsor an event on the other side of the world, or multiple events at the same time!]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>371</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>371</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">93884376-909d-412b-a057-a74b0ecaf90e</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Podcast Flyers & Leaflets]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Podcast Flyers & Leaflets]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about flyers and leaflets. Paper or card flyers are one of the oldest marketing tools out there. And even in this age of social media and digital communication, we still see them everywhere. You&rsquo;ll no doubt regularly get them through your door, find them scattered on tables, or pinned to community noticeboards. Using flyers to advertise your podcast can be an effective marketing strategy, if done correctly. They can get your show in front of potential listeners in an eye-catching and tangible way. They can tempt these potential listeners into finding out more, by offering a clear problem-solution relevant to your content. So have a think about how or where you might be able to use flyers in a way that&rsquo;ll fit with your topic or target audience. Is this something that might help you reach more potential podcast listeners? Thanks very much for listening to Pocket-Sized Podcasting. And, for a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to [thepodcasthost.com/advertising](http://thepodcasthost.com/advertising)</p>]]></description><pubDate>Fri, 26 Apr 2024 10:47:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:07</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/93884376-909d-412b-a057-a74b0ecaf90e</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/93884376-909d-412b-a057-a74b0ecaf90e.mp3?t=1714128421000" length="1079424" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Using flyers to advertise your podcast can be an effective marketing strategy, if done correctly. They can get your show in front of potential listeners in an eye-catching and tangible way. They can tempt these potential listeners into finding out more, by offering a clear problem-solution relevant to your content.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>370</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>370</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">0ab8f3ef-25b5-4998-9c27-80a467af9d27</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Sponsoring Another Podcast]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Sponsoring Another Podcast]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about sponsoring another podcast. This is potentially the ultimate way to spend any advertising budget. Find a successful show with a similar target audience to your own, then, sponsor it for a few episodes. This way, not only do you reach your target audience, but they&rsquo;re all active podcast listeners, too. An ad for another podcast could sound like a breath of fresh air if listeners are used to hearing about how great the latest all-in-one sock mattress razor is. An obvious caveat is that the show in question runs ads. But even if they don&rsquo;t, the host will probably be interested in your proposal. As a very rough ballpark, podcast ads can cost around $25 per 1000 listeners. But, more niche and targeted shows often charge a bit more. If you can afford to try it out though, this is a fantastic way to reach more podcast listeners in your target audience. Thanks very much for listening to Pocket-Sized Podcasting. And, for a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to [thepodcasthost.com/advertising](http://thepodcasthost.com/advertising)</p>]]></description><pubDate>Thu, 25 Apr 2024 10:46:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:14</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/0ab8f3ef-25b5-4998-9c27-80a467af9d27</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/0ab8f3ef-25b5-4998-9c27-80a467af9d27.mp3?t=1714041961000" length="1181824" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[This is potentially the ultimate way to spend any advertising budget. Find a successful show with a similar target audience to your own, then, sponsor it for a few episodes. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>369</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>369</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">c6eaa22d-f048-420f-a276-851babb601f7</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Email Newsletter Sponsorship]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Email Newsletter Sponsorship]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about email newsletter sponsorship. Email is still the often-overlooked king of online communication. Websites and social media platforms may come and go, but every single person who uses the internet has an email address. Email newsletters are still arguably the most effective way for brands and businesses to keep their fans up-to-date. And many of these brands and businesses will offer sponsorship opportunities for their newsletters, too. This can be an excellent way to get in front of your target audience. A good starting point here is to consider the email newsletters in your show&rsquo;s niche that you&rsquo;re already signed up to. Do any of these have ongoing ad or sponsorship slots? If so, it&rsquo;ll be possible to get details on pricing and availability, either on their main website, or by contacting the folks behind it. Marketing emails often have solid analytics, too. So you should get enough data to warrant whether you&rsquo;ve got a good ROI on this. If it&rsquo;s working well for you and you have the budget, it might be worth sticking with for a while. Thanks very much for listening to Pocket-Sized Podcasting. And, for a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to [thepodcasthost.com/advertising](http://thepodcasthost.com/advertising)</p>]]></description><pubDate>Wed, 24 Apr 2024 10:45:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:22</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/c6eaa22d-f048-420f-a276-851babb601f7</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/c6eaa22d-f048-420f-a276-851babb601f7.mp3?t=1713955501000" length="1321088" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Email newsletters are still arguably the most effective way for brands and businesses to keep their fans up-to-date. And many of these brands and businesses will offer sponsorship opportunities for their newsletters, too. This can be an excellent way to get in front of your target audience.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>368</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>368</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">b412a8fe-1ec1-4023-a381-51b8487795c2</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Advertising Your Podcast via Google Ads]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Advertising Your Podcast via Google Ads]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about advertising your podcast via Google Ads. Google ads is another behemoth of online advertising, and there's a good chance you see dozens of these every single day. Most search terms will turn up a handful of ads at the very top of the page. You can spot these because they have the &ldquo;Ad&rdquo; text beside them. If you have a show which answers a question, in any way, then Google ads could work really well for you. For example, you're a coach that teaches people how to be more confident on your show, or you're a running influencer who tells people what the best running products to buy are. If you know what people are searching for in your niche, and your show has an answer for that search, then you can use Google ads. They may not be *quite* as effective as organic content. But getting anything to the very top of a Google search result can be challenging, and takes a bit of time. So by all means, work on optimising your organic content for search. But in the meantime, putting some money behind a Google Ad or two can give you a nice boost in traffic to your site - and downloads to your podcast! Thanks very much for listening to Pocket-Sized Podcasting. And, for a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to [thepodcasthost.com/advertising](http://thepodcasthost.com/advertising)</p>]]></description><pubDate>Tue, 23 Apr 2024 10:45:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:24</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/b412a8fe-1ec1-4023-a381-51b8487795c2</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/b412a8fe-1ec1-4023-a381-51b8487795c2.mp3?t=1713869101000" length="1341568" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Google Ads is another behemoth of online advertising, and there's a good chance you see dozens of these every single day.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>367</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>367</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">c3fcfd49-75da-492a-8265-8782abbd8803</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Advertising Your Podcast on Reddit]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Advertising Your Podcast on Reddit]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about advertising your podcast on Reddit. Reddit is described as a &ldquo;social news aggregation, web content rating, and discussion website.&rdquo; That&rsquo;s some elevator pitch eh? You can&rsquo;t argue, though. It is one of the most visited websites in the world &ndash; and it's yet another place you can run paid ads to promote your content. To advertise your podcast on Reddit, you first need to sign up with Reddit Ads, where you can create your first campaign. Here, Reddit will ask you for your campaign objective. The options they give include &ldquo;Brand Awareness and Reach&rdquo;, &ldquo;Traffic&rdquo;, &ldquo;Conversions&rdquo;, and &ldquo;Video Views&rdquo;. You can tailor your ad targeting, going as wide or as narrow as you like, selecting from a range of interests and niche Reddit communities. You can also run location targeting. If you're based in the US, you can even do this on a per-state basis. On top of that, you can choose which devices your ads will run on &ndash; for example, a podcast about iOS/Apple products wouldn't want to waste its money advertising to Android users. Thanks very much for listening to Pocket-Sized Podcasting. And, for a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to [thepodcasthost.com/advertising](http://thepodcasthost.com/advertising)</p>]]></description><pubDate>Mon, 22 Apr 2024 10:45:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:24</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/c3fcfd49-75da-492a-8265-8782abbd8803</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/c3fcfd49-75da-492a-8265-8782abbd8803.mp3?t=1713782701000" length="1347712" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Reddit is described as a “social news aggregation, web content rating, and discussion website.” That’s some elevator pitch eh? You can’t argue, though. It is one of the most visited websites in the world – and it's yet another place you can run paid ads to promote your content.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>366</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>366</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">18eb4ce0-d8a8-4622-afa0-9802023df52d</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Advertising Your Podcast on Spotify]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Advertising Your Podcast on Spotify]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about advertising your podcast on Spotify. At time of recording, Spotify boasts well over 250 million &ldquo;ad supported&rdquo; listeners. You can create and run a 30-second audio ad for your show by signing up at https://adstudio.spotify.com Spotify ads are predominantly audio, though there&rsquo;s a visual element too. They display your logo on screen with a &ldquo;Learn More&rdquo; button, whilst the ad is playing. The ads are played in-between songs or podcast episodes, to listeners who use Spotify on their free tier. Spotify ads are similar to social media ads in the sense that you set a budget and date range, before being offered an estimated number of ads to be served. For example, $500 might get you around 25,000 ads. They also let you really hone in on the targeting, selecting things like age, gender, location, and even the styles of music your ads will appear alongside. Thanks very much for listening to Pocket-Sized Podcasting. And, for a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to [thepodcasthost.com/advertising](http://thepodcasthost.com/advertising)</p>]]></description><pubDate>Fri, 19 Apr 2024 10:44:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:17</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/18eb4ce0-d8a8-4622-afa0-9802023df52d</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/18eb4ce0-d8a8-4622-afa0-9802023df52d.mp3?t=1713523441000" length="1228928" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Spotify boasts well over 250 million “ad-supported” listeners. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>365</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>365</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">6af2b755-3f39-4b38-91fc-d53d4b8c9ed1</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Social Media Advertising]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Social Media Advertising]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about social media advertising. I know I&rsquo;m never very positive or complimentary about social media. But, there are a lot of people looking at it every minute of every day. And, you can pay to advertise your podcast at them. Facebook is traditionally the mecca for social media ads because they have so much data on their users. You can really hone in on the audience you&rsquo;d like to reach, from location, to interests, and even, the device they're using. For some, this is ethically questionable, but you&rsquo;ll have your own opinions. The fact is, it&rsquo;s out there as an option. Facebook isn&rsquo;t the only platform you can run ads on either. There&rsquo;s Instagram, Twitter, and TikTok, and probably ten more new apps by the time you hear this. Prolific social media users are some of the most distracted and angry people out there. So be prepared for the odd person who notices it to express outrage that they&rsquo;re being advertised at on a platform they use for free. Anyway, that&rsquo;s enough cynicism for one day eh? Thanks very much for listening to Pocket-Sized Podcasting. And, for a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to [thepodcasthost.com/facebookads](http://thepodcasthost.com/facebookads) Seriously, that&rsquo;s a great guide by Gavin, so if social is your thing, then it&rsquo;s well worth a wee look.</p>]]></description><pubDate>Thu, 18 Apr 2024 10:44:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:22</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/6af2b755-3f39-4b38-91fc-d53d4b8c9ed1</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/6af2b755-3f39-4b38-91fc-d53d4b8c9ed1.mp3?t=1713437041000" length="1319040" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Facebook is traditionally the mecca for social media ads because they have so much data on their users. You can really hone in on the audience you’d like to reach, from location, to interests, and even, the device they're using. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>364</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>364</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">26d265d4-c6da-4089-9a4d-95748515cb7f</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Advertising on Podnews]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Advertising on Podnews]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about advertising on Podnews. Podnews is an essential daily email newsletter, predominantly aimed at keeping podcasters up-to-date with the latest industry news. But, most podcasters are podcast listeners too, and you can advertise your podcast to them here for as little as $29 a day. With Podnews advertising, you can promote your show to - at time of recording - over 25,000 subscribers every weekday. Recipients include folks from the likes of the BBC, NPR, Gimlet, and Apple Podcasts &ndash; you never know who might take an interest. The ads appear right in the middle of the main content, as a seperate box, under the heading &lsquo;Classifieds&rsquo;. Each ad is a hyperlinked headline and a 30-40 word description. All ads run in Podnews will also appear permanently on their website and within their daily companion podcast episode shownotes. By the way, it&rsquo;s a good wee daily show to subscribe too. Thanks very much for listening to Pocket-Sized Podcasting. And, for a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to [thepodcasthost.com/advertising](http://thepodcasthost.com/advertising)</p>]]></description><pubDate>Wed, 17 Apr 2024 10:44:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:17</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/26d265d4-c6da-4089-9a4d-95748515cb7f</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/26d265d4-c6da-4089-9a4d-95748515cb7f.mp3?t=1713350641000" length="1226880" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Podnews is an essential daily email newsletter, predominantly aimed at keeping podcasters up-to-date with the latest industry news. But, most podcasters are podcast listeners too, and you can advertise your podcast to them here for as little as $29 a day.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>363</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>363</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">10023da9-2c3f-40ca-95b1-e8317e5bd358</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Community Sponsorship]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Community Sponsorship]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about community sponsorship. Depending on where you live, you might see a lot of sponsorship opportunities in your local community. These are typically things like flower beds, roundabouts, and parks. This is a more altruistic advertising approach because you&rsquo;re giving something back to your community, as well as potentially pulling in some new listeners. So is there a park bench, woodland trail, or even, public toilet that would benefit from having your podcast&rsquo;s name on it? If nothing else, it&rsquo;ll make for a good story to tell your listeners. Thanks very much for listening to Pocket-Sized Podcasting. And remember, you can leave feedback for us quickly and easily over at [thepodcasthost.com/psp](http://thepodcasthost.com/psp)</p>]]></description><pubDate>Tue, 16 Apr 2024 07:22:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:00:49</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/10023da9-2c3f-40ca-95b1-e8317e5bd358</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/10023da9-2c3f-40ca-95b1-e8317e5bd358.mp3?t=1713252121000" length="794752" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Depending on where you live, you might see a lot of sponsorship opportunities in your local community. These are typically things like flower beds, roundabouts, and parks. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>362</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>362</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">064535d9-d902-47fe-924b-1aa8512ecf47</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Advertising ON Public Transport or HGVs]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Advertising ON Public Transport or HGVs]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about advertising your podcast *on* public transport. Or, on HGVs. Now that everyone *inside* the bus is listening to your podcast, let&rsquo;s get some car-based listeners too. Ads on the backs of buses and lorries are common ways transport companies monetise otherwise dead space on their vehicles. They&rsquo;re incredibly effective because there&rsquo;s almost always someone looking right at it. Again, if the ad agency knows its business well, then it&rsquo;ll also make it clear who to contact if you&rsquo;re looking to enquire about one. Remember, you can do this on a much smaller and cheaper scale using car bumper stickers. Or, you might consider befriending a lorry driver and asking to put your sticker on their vehicle. However you go about it though, I hope this strategy brings you some decent traffic. Traffic. See what I did there? Thanks very much for listening to Pocket-Sized Podcasting. And remember, you can leave feedback for us quickly and easily over at [thepodcasthost.com/psp](http://thepodcasthost.com/psp)</p>]]></description><pubDate>Mon, 15 Apr 2024 07:21:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:09</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/064535d9-d902-47fe-924b-1aa8512ecf47</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/064535d9-d902-47fe-924b-1aa8512ecf47.mp3?t=1713165661000" length="1110144" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Ads on the backs of buses and lorries are common ways transport companies monetise otherwise dead space on their vehicles. They’re incredibly effective because there’s almost always someone looking right at it. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>361</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>361</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">62059020-6e97-4fdd-a96f-d03c5a504990</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Advertising IN Public Transport]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Advertising IN Public Transport]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about advertising your podcast inside public transport. You know when you&rsquo;re sitting on the bus, train, or tube, trying your best to avoid eye contact with anyone. You always find yourself looking at those wee ads above the windows for weird hair tonics and haemorrhoid cream. Or is that just me? In any case, people do see these ads every single day. *A lot* of people, usually. So imagine an ad for your podcast up there beside them? As an aside, this would be the perfect place to use a QR Code, too. So next time you&rsquo;re on public transport, just take a closer look at the existing ads to see which agency is running them. Then, get in touch to ask about pricing options. The only downside here is that your fellow travellers will think you&rsquo;re making a note of that haemorrhoid cream for your shopping list. But, you win some, you lose some. Thanks very much for listening to Pocket-Sized Podcasting. And remember, you can leave feedback for us quickly and easily over at [thepodcasthost.com/psp](http://thepodcasthost.com/psp)</p>]]></description><pubDate>Fri, 12 Apr 2024 07:21:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:07</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/62059020-6e97-4fdd-a96f-d03c5a504990</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/62059020-6e97-4fdd-a96f-d03c5a504990.mp3?t=1712906461000" length="1069184" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[You know when you’re sitting on the bus, train, or tube, trying your best to avoid eye contact with anyone. You always find yourself looking at those wee ads above the windows for weird hair tonics and haemorrhoid cream. Or is that just me? ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>360</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>360</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">264ef42c-e594-4226-b2a9-24491d322d40</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Running Ads in Print Magazines]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Running Ads in Print Magazines]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about running ads in print magazines. Print magazines have experienced a bit of a renaissance in recent years. In fact, it seems to be the ultra-niche ones that have best weathered the digital storm, and continue to grow from strength to strength. This is perfect for doing some targeted advertising for your show. Whether you&rsquo;re podcasting about fly fishing, gardening, or model railways, you&rsquo;ll likely find a magazine serving up the same topic to a dedicated fanbase. You&rsquo;ll be surprised at how affordable this can be, with a lot of mags just looking to fill up ad spaces before their next print deadline. However, if it&rsquo;s still out of your budget, you can always offer to write a guest article for them in exchange for the opportunity to mention your podcast. Thanks for listening to Pocket-Sized Podcasting. And, for a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to [thepodcasthost.com/advertising](http://thepodcasthost.com/advertising)</p>]]></description><pubDate>Thu, 11 Apr 2024 07:21:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:01</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/264ef42c-e594-4226-b2a9-24491d322d40</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/264ef42c-e594-4226-b2a9-24491d322d40.mp3?t=1712820061000" length="977024" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Print magazines have experienced a bit of a renaissance in recent years. In fact, it seems to be the ultra-niche ones that have best weathered the digital storm, and continue to grow from strength to strength.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>359</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>359</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">8541b49c-3558-4aab-8536-786f468d5dff</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Advertising on Overcast and Other Podcast Listening Apps]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Advertising on Overcast and Other Podcast Listening Apps]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about advertising on Overcast and other podcast listening apps. This type of advertising is hugely effective, because 100% of the folks you reach are podcast listeners who&rsquo;re actively browsing their app. There&rsquo;s no education needed here whatsoever, it&rsquo;s just down to your show&rsquo;s title, topic, and snippet. Overcast ads appear as unobtrusive little banners, which the app&rsquo;s users see at the bottom of their screen. This means they're literally one click away from browsing your podcast inside their chosen listening app. And one more click away from hitting Play or Subscribe. Costs here vary on category and demand. Overcast also estimates the number of clicks and subscribers you&rsquo;ll get via your ad, so you can weigh up the potential ROI. Overcast isn&rsquo;t the only listening app you can run ads on, either. Pocket Casts, Podcast Addict, Podbay, and Player FM are other options you might want to consider, too. For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to [thepodcasthost.com/advertising](http://thepodcasthost.com/advertising)</p>]]></description><pubDate>Wed, 10 Apr 2024 07:20:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:12</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/8541b49c-3558-4aab-8536-786f468d5dff</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/8541b49c-3558-4aab-8536-786f468d5dff.mp3?t=1712733601000" length="1157248" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[This type of advertising is hugely effective, because 100% of the folks you reach are podcast listeners who’re actively browsing their app. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>358</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>358</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">f572f466-740d-4b6c-a72c-b58818304766</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Advertising Your Podcast]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Advertising Your Podcast]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about advertising your podcast. The concept of advertising really needs no introduction. This is an ancient and traditional way of promoting a product or service. You pay some money, and you get your ad in front of a particular audience. Podcast growth can be a slow burn. But the one way you can fast-track it, is to spend some money on an ad campaign. So if you&rsquo;re able to set some money aside for this purpose, what are your options when it comes to spending it? And which one&rsquo;s going to be the best fit for you and your podcast? Over the next few episodes, we&rsquo;re going to run through some popular and effective places to run ads for your podcast, so be sure to subscribe to or follow Pocket-Sized Podcasting on your listening app of choice, that way, you&rsquo;ll never miss an episode.</p>]]></description><pubDate>Tue, 09 Apr 2024 06:25:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:00:54</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/f572f466-740d-4b6c-a72c-b58818304766</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/f572f466-740d-4b6c-a72c-b58818304766.mp3?t=1712643901000" length="860288" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Podcast growth can be a slow burn. But the one way you can fast-track it, is to spend some money on an ad campaign. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>357</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>357</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">63358ae5-7fae-420b-88d9-505c20a8153f</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Other Types of Podcast Merch]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Other Types of Podcast Merch]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about other types of podcast merch. Now that we&rsquo;re looking at this from a &ldquo;just get as much branded merch out there as possible&rdquo; approach, what can we add to our store alongside our t-shirts, stickers, and magnets? A quick look over at popular print-on-demand service TeePublic gives us some good ideas, including laptop and phone cases, pin badges, tote bags, tapestries, wall art, mugs, pillows, kids onesies, hoodies, and even&hellip; tank tops. What about that, eh? A tank top. I went on there and they look more like vests to me, but never mind. If you want to check out this service for yourself, head on over to [thepodcasthost.com/teepublic](http://thepodcasthost.com/teepublic) And, for a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to [thepodcasthost.com/podcastmerch](http://thepodcasthost.com/podcastmerch)</p>]]></description><pubDate>Mon, 08 Apr 2024 06:24:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:02</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/63358ae5-7fae-420b-88d9-505c20a8153f</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/63358ae5-7fae-420b-88d9-505c20a8153f.mp3?t=1712557441000" length="993408" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[What other merch can we add to our store alongside t-shirts, stickers, and magnets? ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>356</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>356</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">e537942b-62e5-49ce-b5ac-c180ee14840c</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Podcast T-Shirts]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Podcast T-Shirts]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about t-shirts. The big misconception about selling podcast-branded t-shirts is that this is a monetization strategy, rather than a promotion one. But, any listener wearing your show&rsquo;s t-shirt becomes like a walking billboard for your show. For most podcasters, using a print-on-demand service for t-shirts will make more sense than buying a bulk order, and then storing and shipping them yourself. But print-on-demand can push the price of your merch up, so it&rsquo;s worth selling t-shirts at their minimum cost price. This means you&rsquo;ll make no profit on them, but, it increases the chances of you selling more. As I say, look at this as more guerrilla marketing, rather than the opportunity to make money. There are much better ways to do that, as we&rsquo;ll cover later on in the series.</p>]]></description><pubDate>Fri, 05 Apr 2024 06:24:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:10</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/e537942b-62e5-49ce-b5ac-c180ee14840c</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/e537942b-62e5-49ce-b5ac-c180ee14840c.mp3?t=1712298241000" length="1126528" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Any listener wearing your show’s t-shirt becomes like a walking billboard for your show.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>355</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>355</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">154e3ea0-1856-422d-8814-657d7a01cb86</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[QR Codes]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[QR Codes]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about QR Codes. The humble &ldquo;Quick Response&rdquo; code rose to prominence during the pandemic. Very few people don&rsquo;t know what they are, now. If you don&rsquo;t, though, a QR Code is a unique symbol that your smartphone's camera can read and translate into a web address. They look like wee black and white chequered squares. You can add QR codes to business cards, stickers and other merch, and they&rsquo;ll take people directly to your podcast website. You see bands or musicians using this a lot on their stickers, or buskers on their signage. I&rsquo;ve even heard of people getting QR Code tattoos. That&rsquo;s possibly the most extreme example of this strategy though, and for most folks, a wee card, sticker, or magnet will do. Thanks for listening to Pocket-Sized Podcasting. And, for a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to [thepodcasthost.com/qrcodes](http://thepodcasthost.com/qrcodes)</p>]]></description><pubDate>Thu, 04 Apr 2024 06:24:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:01</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/154e3ea0-1856-422d-8814-657d7a01cb86</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/154e3ea0-1856-422d-8814-657d7a01cb86.mp3?t=1712211841000" length="985216" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[The humble “Quick Response” code rose to prominence during the pandemic. Very few people don’t know what they are, now. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>354</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>354</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">9139f475-18e0-4ebe-b017-1e14e1631577</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Roadside Promotion]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Roadside Promotion]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about roadside promotion. This might be anything from a banner draped on a flyover, to a big sign in a field. Basically, a message that promotes your podcast which will be seen by thousands of people each day. It should go without saying, but please don&rsquo;t do anything stupid, dangerous, or illegal here. Roads are deadly places, so never put yours or anyone else&rsquo;s life at risk with a strategy like this. Of course, you could go the official route here, and hire a billboard. But I don&rsquo;t imagine that comes cheaply, no matter where you are in the world. I see a lot of roadside marketing here in Scotland, usually by some mad farmer. It&rsquo;d be nice to drive past a few innovative podcast ads, slogans, or messages in the future. In the meantime, for a deeper dive on this, check out [thepodcasthost.com/guerrilla](http://thepodcasthost.com/guerrilla)</p>]]></description><pubDate>Wed, 03 Apr 2024 06:23:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:03</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/9139f475-18e0-4ebe-b017-1e14e1631577</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/9139f475-18e0-4ebe-b017-1e14e1631577.mp3?t=1712125381000" length="1009792" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[This might be anything from a banner draped on a flyover, to a big sign in a field. Basically, a message that promotes your podcast which will be seen by thousands of people each day. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>353</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>353</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">23f63832-56d9-4d28-ae6e-ed1927fafd91</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Beer Mats & Coasters]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Beer Mats & Coasters]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about beer mats and coasters. This is one of my favourite podcast promotion strategies, because it&rsquo;s a great excuse to go to the pub. If you get a bunch of eye-catching cardboard coasters made, you can stick them on your table under your glasses. Then, when you leave, the next people who sit there are going to immediately see them. They might even take one away. Depending on the establishment, some coasters can end up there for days or weeks, too. And a lot of people will end up seeing them up close. With this approach, nights out, hen doos, and birthday drinks become &ldquo;podcast marketing sessions&rdquo;. Of course, it doesn&rsquo;t need to revolve around alcohol, either. You can do this just as well in cafes or restaurants. Basically, any public lounge where people sit down at a table with a drink. Bonus tip: Why not approach a local bar or cafe to become their official supplier of coasters in exchange for some free promotion on your podcast? It&rsquo;s worth a shot&hellip; In the meantime, for a deeper dive on this, check out [thepodcasthost.com/guerrilla](http://thepodcasthost.com/guerrilla)</p>]]></description><pubDate>Tue, 02 Apr 2024 06:38:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:16</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/23f63832-56d9-4d28-ae6e-ed1927fafd91</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/23f63832-56d9-4d28-ae6e-ed1927fafd91.mp3?t=1712039881000" length="1212544" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[If you get a bunch of eye-catching cardboard coasters made, you can stick them on your table under your glasses. Then, when you leave, the next people who sit there are going to immediately see them. They might even take one away. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>352</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>352</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">60bc42f3-7fe2-4a4b-8a48-0a585e58e512</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Magnets]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Magnets]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about magnets. Magnets - like stickers - can be wee adverts for your podcast. They&rsquo;re more tolerated than stickers, too, because they can be easily removed. This means that curious listeners sometimes take them home. We know where all magnets end up in the home, too. Don&rsquo;t underestimate the power of getting your logo onto someone&rsquo;s fridge. They&rsquo;ll see it every single day for years. So will their family, housemates, or anyone who comes to visit. Magnets also make for great freebies at events or conferences, or as rewards for reviews or crowdfunding support. As they&rsquo;re usually small, light, and flat, they don&rsquo;t cost too much to post out anywhere around the world. These are quite literally &ldquo;fan magnets&rdquo;, and no podcaster should be without them. Thanks for listening to Pocket-Sized Podcasting. And, for a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to [thepodcasthost.com/podcastmerch](http://thepodcasthost.com/podcastmerch)</p>]]></description><pubDate>Mon, 01 Apr 2024 06:38:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:03</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/60bc42f3-7fe2-4a4b-8a48-0a585e58e512</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/60bc42f3-7fe2-4a4b-8a48-0a585e58e512.mp3?t=1711953481000" length="1007744" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Magnets - like stickers - can be wee adverts for your podcast. They’re more tolerated than stickers, too, because they can be easily removed. This means that curious listeners sometimes take them home. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>351</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>351</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">c6515247-b25f-45ca-a1a7-a33e6c11ceb9</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Car Bumper Stickers]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Car Bumper Stickers]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about bumper stickers. A bumper sticker on the back of your car might not seem like it&rsquo;s doing much. But imagine how many different people end up seeing it over the weeks, months, and years. Sure, a lot of them won&rsquo;t be your target audience. But some will. And, aside from creating your sticker and slapping it on, this is a completely effortless way of promoting your podcast. Your sticker&rsquo;s design will depend a lot on your show&rsquo;s name. If it&rsquo;s an obvious name, like &ldquo;The Organic Gardener Podcast&rdquo;, then it speaks for itself. If you&rsquo;ve got a more obscure name, though, then you might need to get innovative with your design in order to temp anyone to check it out. The downside of this, of course, is when you cut someone off, they know exactly who you are. So drive safely out there. Thanks for listening to Pocket-Sized Podcasting. And remember, you can leave feedback for us quickly and easily over at [thepodcasthost.com/psp](http://thepodcasthost.com/psp)</p>]]></description><pubDate>Fri, 29 Mar 2024 07:38:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:03</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/c6515247-b25f-45ca-a1a7-a33e6c11ceb9</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/c6515247-b25f-45ca-a1a7-a33e6c11ceb9.mp3?t=1711697881000" length="1011840" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[A bumper sticker on the back of your car might not seem like it’s doing much. But imagine how many different people end up seeing it over the weeks, months, and years. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>350</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>350</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">05820605-8fb3-46fd-a633-7e42b63e93d2</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Podcast Stickers]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Podcast Stickers]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about stickers. Stickers are the ultimate guerrilla marketing tool. They&rsquo;re like little ads for your podcast that can pop up anywhere, and they can last for a long time. You don&rsquo;t even need to risk accusations of vandalism by actually sticking your stickers in places. You could just give them away at conferences or events. You can even use the business card strategy and leave them in books. Just don&rsquo;t stick anything to the book, obviously. Most people like stickers - even if they&rsquo;ve never heard of the brand behind them. Give someone a sticker, and they&rsquo;re unlikely to chuck it away. They&rsquo;re also quite likely to stick it somewhere. This could be anything from the back of a laptop, to a dedicated &ldquo;sticker wall&rdquo; in their house or office. Bottom line: No podcaster should be without a set of stickers for their show. And, for a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to [thepodcasthost.com/podcastmerch](http://thepodcasthost.com/podcastmerch)</p>]]></description><pubDate>Thu, 28 Mar 2024 07:38:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:00</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/05820605-8fb3-46fd-a633-7e42b63e93d2</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/05820605-8fb3-46fd-a633-7e42b63e93d2.mp3?t=1711611481000" length="958592" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Stickers are the ultimate guerrilla marketing tool. They’re like little ads for your podcast that can pop up anywhere, and they can last for a long time.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>349</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>349</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">df74777e-880b-46e4-9add-c0e760ba1c48</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Leave a Card in a Book]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Leave a Card in a Book]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about leaving a card in a book. Books might be very old, and podcasts very new, but both have a lot in common. They&rsquo;re created with a target audience in mind. So why not promote your podcast in books that share your overarching theme or topic? The starting point here is to order a batch of business cards that promote your podcast. Then, visit any local bookshops and libraries to find books you think your target audience might be interested in. Obviously, it&rsquo;s unlikely the owners of any establishment would be happy with this. So, you do so entirely at your own discretion. You know, deep down, that you&rsquo;re helping their customers to find more great content. But they probably won&rsquo;t share your enthusiasm. Thanks for listening to Pocket-Sized Podcasting. And remember, you can leave feedback for us quickly and easily over at [thepodcasthost.com/psp](http://thepodcasthost.com/psp)</p>]]></description><pubDate>Wed, 27 Mar 2024 07:37:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:00:58</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/df74777e-880b-46e4-9add-c0e760ba1c48</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/df74777e-880b-46e4-9add-c0e760ba1c48.mp3?t=1711525021000" length="927872" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Books might be very old, and podcasts very new, but both have a lot in common. They’re created with a target audience in mind. So why not promote your podcast in books that share your overarching theme or topic?]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>348</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>348</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">24d06da5-8d8c-40e5-b4b0-ad56288ece05</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Guerrilla Marketing]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Guerrilla Marketing]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about guerrilla marketing. No, this isn&rsquo;t about promoting your podcast at the zoo - although it could be. Guerrilla marketing is a low or no-cost unconventional advertising strategy. It allows you to engage with the public on a more personal and memorable level. The cool thing about this too, is that it&rsquo;s offline, and happens out there in the real world. Examples of guerrilla marketing range from making creative and artistic changes to pre-existing environments, or, leveraging the crowd at some sort of gathering or event. This is all usually without any official permission. On the next few episodes we&rsquo;re going to give you some examples of podcast promotion tactics that could fall under the guerrilla marketing category. In the meantime, for a deeper dive on this, check out [thepodcasthost.com/guerrilla](http://thepodcasthost.com/guerrilla)</p>]]></description><pubDate>Tue, 26 Mar 2024 07:48:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:02</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/24d06da5-8d8c-40e5-b4b0-ad56288ece05</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/24d06da5-8d8c-40e5-b4b0-ad56288ece05.mp3?t=1711439281000" length="987264" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[No, this isn’t about promoting your podcast at the zoo - although it could be. Guerrilla marketing is a low or no-cost unconventional advertising strategy. It allows you to engage with the public on a more personal and memorable level. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>347</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>347</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">3adacf17-3371-4994-ac0f-2d85624f5559</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Using Scheduling Tools for Social Media]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Using Scheduling Tools for Social Media]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about scheduling tools for social media. Let&rsquo;s face it. Nobody *really* wants to spend time on social media. These platforms are designed to capture your attention, and they&rsquo;re very good at it. At best, you&rsquo;ll lose entire hours of your day. At worst, you&rsquo;ll feel utterly dejected at the world and its inhabitants. But, you can still give your podcast a presence there by using scheduling tools like Buffer, Hootsuite, or Meet Edgar. These tools let you post questions, updates, and other content, without having any of these apps on your phone. Then, you can set time aside to log in on your computer each day to reply to any engagement. This is a great way to win back control of your time, and put it to much better use. Like working on your podcast. Or, spending time with your friends and family. For a full review of social media scheduling tool Meet Edgar, head on over to [thepodcasthost.com/edgar](http://thepodcasthost.com/edgar)</p>]]></description><pubDate>Mon, 25 Mar 2024 07:47:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:06</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/3adacf17-3371-4994-ac0f-2d85624f5559</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/3adacf17-3371-4994-ac0f-2d85624f5559.mp3?t=1711352821000" length="1056896" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Let’s face it. Nobody really wants to spend time on social media. These platforms are designed to capture your attention, and they’re very good at it. At best, you’ll lose entire hours of your day. At worst, you’ll feel utterly dejected at the world and its inhabitants. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>346</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>346</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">ee79eeb2-f07c-4feb-9c27-9cad560e5443</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Posting Out Regular Questions]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Posting Out Regular Questions]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about posting out regular questions. As a podcaster, you want to keep your finger on the pulse when it comes to the needs and wants of your audience. You might want to post out regular questions to them, asking specific things. You can do this on social, or, via your email list. You can even create a wee ongoing poll or survey on your website to collect this data indefinitely This is all fuel for highly searchable and helpful future content. The questions you ask will be specific to your topic, but they&rsquo;ll typically revolve around struggles or pain points that you&rsquo;re uniquely positioned to solve. There&rsquo;s no need to try and second-guess what people want to hear about. They&rsquo;ll usually be happy to tell you themselves. All you need to do is ask. Thanks for listening to Pocket-Sized Podcasting. And remember, you can leave feedback for us quickly and easily over at [thepodcasthost.com/psp](http://thepodcasthost.com/psp)</p>]]></description><pubDate>Fri, 22 Mar 2024 07:47:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:01</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/ee79eeb2-f07c-4feb-9c27-9cad560e5443</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/ee79eeb2-f07c-4feb-9c27-9cad560e5443.mp3?t=1711093621000" length="985216" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[As a podcaster, you want to keep your finger on the pulse when it comes to the needs and wants of your audience. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>345</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>345</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">de6af421-9457-46b7-9589-329b1c7e1185</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Audiogram Highlights]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Audiogram Highlights]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about audiogram highlights. An audiogram is a piece of media that combines visual art, a sound wave, an audio track, and even a transcription of the dialogue. These are great wee shareable files that you can use on social media to promote your latest episode. To make one, you just need to pick out a memorable or powerful segment from the show, say, between one to three minutes long. Then, use a tool like Headliner to quickly and easily create it. If you host your show on Buzzsprout, they have an audiogram maker built-in. You&rsquo;ll also find a free one in popular listening app Overcast. Audiograms are a step up from quote images, because they let potential listeners actually hear your content, too. And, because you&rsquo;re a listener to this show, it&rsquo;s obviously going to sound good. Thanks for listening to Pocket-Sized Podcasting. And remember, you can leave feedback for us quickly and easily over at [thepodcasthost.com/psp](http://thepodcasthost.com/psp)</p>]]></description><pubDate>Thu, 21 Mar 2024 07:47:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:05</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/de6af421-9457-46b7-9589-329b1c7e1185</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/de6af421-9457-46b7-9589-329b1c7e1185.mp3?t=1711007221000" length="1048704" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[An audiogram is a piece of media that combines visual art, a sound wave, an audio track, and even a transcription of the dialogue.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>344</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>344</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">99b9d1f9-0877-401b-a0da-41dca4ef9b7f</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Sharing Reviews on Social Media]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Sharing Reviews on Social Media]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about sharing reviews on social media. If you go around telling everyone how great your podcast is, they&rsquo;ll probably take it with a grain of salt. However, if other people do it, then it carries a lot more weight. Podcast reviews aren&rsquo;t just hot chocolate for the ego. They&rsquo;re great marketing materials, too. They can pop up in a lot of different listening apps. But you can use a tool like Podrover, Rephonic, or Podpage to collect them all in one place. Podrover will create optimised social media graphics from your reviews, but you can easily use Canva to do this too, with a couple of extra steps. Remember, it doesn&rsquo;t always have to be glowing five-star reviews you share, either. Sometimes an entirely unreasonable one-star review is good for a laugh and some extra engagement, too. Thanks for listening to Pocket-Sized Podcasting. And remember, you can leave feedback for us quickly and easily over at [thepodcasthost.com/psp](http://thepodcasthost.com/psp)</p>]]></description><pubDate>Wed, 20 Mar 2024 07:46:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:07</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/99b9d1f9-0877-401b-a0da-41dca4ef9b7f</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/99b9d1f9-0877-401b-a0da-41dca4ef9b7f.mp3?t=1710920761000" length="1077376" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Podcast reviews aren’t just hot chocolate for the ego. They’re great marketing materials, too. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>343</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>343</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">595e958a-ee90-42a5-a866-4db372e31910</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Creating Behind-the-Scenes Content]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Creating Behind-the-Scenes Content]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about behind-the-scenes content. This is a great way to further engage your long-time fans. Whilst brand new listeners couldn&rsquo;t care less about your cat, your weekend plans, or, your flatmate&rsquo;s questionable hygiene, the folks who&rsquo;ve been with you a while will start to. Recording some extra audio or video before or after your main episode can create some nice bonus content here. It&rsquo;s a peek behind the curtain of what goes into making the show, and a chance to go off-topic without that angry new guy shouting &ldquo;Just get to the point!&rdquo; at you. You can put this behind a paywall on a crowdfunding platform, or, you can just release it on a different feed or YouTube channel. The good thing about this content is that it can really drive engagement with almost no extra work. So why not give it a shot and see how it goes for you? Thanks for listening to Pocket-Sized Podcasting. And remember, you can leave feedback for us quickly and easily over at [thepodcasthost.com/psp](http://thepodcasthost.com/psp)</p>]]></description><pubDate>Tue, 19 Mar 2024 07:03:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:07</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/595e958a-ee90-42a5-a866-4db372e31910</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/595e958a-ee90-42a5-a866-4db372e31910.mp3?t=1710831781000" length="1073280" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Recording some extra audio or video before or after your main episode can create some nice bonus content here. It’s a peek behind the curtain of what goes into making the show, and a chance to go off-topic without that angry new guy shouting “Just get to the point!” at you. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>342</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>342</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">bdc09209-27fa-4a9d-8fb1-b4622d38cb9a</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Advanced Twitter/X Search]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Advanced Twitter/X Search]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about advanced twitter search. Twitter is where thousands of people who haven&rsquo;t learned to use Google yet spend their days, shouting endless questions into the void. The good news, though, is that you can mine this data to create episodes that answer those specific questions. In an ideal world, these folks would then learn how to use Google and subsequently find your episodes. But you could just directly reply to them with your content once it goes out. They did ask, after all! With this approach, it&rsquo;s worth typing in your topic, along with a question like &ldquo;does anyone know&rdquo;, or, &ldquo;can anyone recommend&rdquo;. Here, you know for sure you&rsquo;re creating content people are actively searching for. It&rsquo;s just a pity they&rsquo;re so bad at searching for it. Thanks for listening to Pocket-Sized Podcasting. And be sure to check out our ultimate content promotion manual over at [thepodcasthost.com/podcastgrowthbook](http://thepodcasthost.com/podcastgrowthbook)</p>]]></description><pubDate>Mon, 18 Mar 2024 07:03:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:02</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/bdc09209-27fa-4a9d-8fb1-b4622d38cb9a</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/bdc09209-27fa-4a9d-8fb1-b4622d38cb9a.mp3?t=1710745381000" length="997504" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Twitter is where thousands of people who haven’t learned to use Google yet spend their days, shouting endless questions into the void. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>341</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>341</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">a35bfbae-8e87-4c0e-83d8-9bbf81673a94</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Social Media Quote Images]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Social Media Quote Images]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about social media quote images. From memes, to pseudo-inspirational wisdom, the internet just loves the sight of an image with text on it. If you&rsquo;re a social media user, you can get in on the act here by pulling a compelling wee quote or two from your latest episode, and creating a shareable graphic around it. Here, you&rsquo;ll want to add the name of your show, and maybe even your cover art and your domain name onto the graphic, too. This is a balancing act as you don&rsquo;t want it to get too cluttered. You might have to edit the quote down a bit so that it&rsquo;s an appropriate length. You can make these graphics quickly, easily, and for free, by using canva.com. They come in especially handy if you&rsquo;re quoting an interview guest because it makes them more likely to share it with their own audience, too. Thanks for listening to Pocket-Sized Podcasting. And be sure to check out our ultimate content promotion manual over at [thepodcasthost.com/podcastgrowthbook](http://thepodcasthost.com/podcastgrowthbook)</p>]]></description><pubDate>Fri, 15 Mar 2024 07:02:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:05</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/a35bfbae-8e87-4c0e-83d8-9bbf81673a94</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/a35bfbae-8e87-4c0e-83d8-9bbf81673a94.mp3?t=1710486121000" length="1042560" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[From memes to pseudo-inspirational wisdom, the internet just loves the sight of an image with text on it. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>340</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>340</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">f98efe00-34f2-4c78-b1b9-5a88031aff8f</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Key Questions to Ask in Your Listener Survey]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Key Questions to Ask in Your Listener Survey]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about key questions to ask in your listener survey. Many of your questions will be determined by your topic. But here are some that you might want to consider adding in. 1. How did you discover the show 2. What made you hit play? 3. What keeps you listening? 4. Is there a particular episode that stands out to you? 5. Is there anything about the show that irks or frustrates you? 6. What are you struggling with right now? 7. If I could create a product, service, or course just for you, what would it be? 8. In one sentence, how would you describe this podcast to a friend who you think would like it? You could also add in some multiple-choice questions about things like episode length, format, and frequency. But I&rsquo;d only recommend doing this if these are things you&rsquo;d be willing to change. Remember, you don&rsquo;t NEED to act on all or, even, any of this. What you do with the data is up to you. And be aware that you can&rsquo;t please everyone, all of the time. Ultimately, it&rsquo;s YOUR podcast. Thanks for listening to Pocket-Sized Podcasting. For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to [thepodcasthost.com/howtosurvey](http://thepodcasthost.com/howtosurvey)</p>]]></description><pubDate>Thu, 14 Mar 2024 07:02:01 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:24</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/f98efe00-34f2-4c78-b1b9-5a88031aff8f</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/f98efe00-34f2-4c78-b1b9-5a88031aff8f.mp3?t=1710399722000" length="1345664" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Many of your questions will be determined by your topic. But here are some that you might want to consider adding in. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>339</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>339</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">fa92cee5-eba5-46af-a3b3-7c3838550de9</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[How to Start Your Listener Survey]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[How to Start Your Listener Survey]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about how to start your listener survey. Lots of people might click on and start your survey, but not all of them will finish it. So how do we get the maximum amount of people through to the end? Open with some easy low-hanging fruit multiple-choice questions. Obviously, you still want these to be useful to you; otherwise, you&rsquo;re wasting their time and yours. But get them ticking those wee boxes, and they&rsquo;ll be more likely to fill out any text boxes and personal details that follow. Text boxes and personal details are the exact things you don&rsquo;t want to open with. Most people feel busy, and when they see a big empty box, they&rsquo;ll just assume your entire survey is going to take a lot of time, and a lot of typing. People are wary of giving away personal info, too. If you need to ask for things like names or email addresses, then leave this til the end. At least they&rsquo;re going to feel like they&rsquo;ve bought into it by then. And you can always allow them to skip these options if they&rsquo;d like to. Thanks for listening to Pocket-Sized Podcasting. For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to [thepodcasthost.com/howtosurvey](http://thepodcasthost.com/howtosurvey)</p>]]></description><pubDate>Wed, 13 Mar 2024 07:02:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:18</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/fa92cee5-eba5-46af-a3b3-7c3838550de9</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/fa92cee5-eba5-46af-a3b3-7c3838550de9.mp3?t=1710313321000" length="1251456" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Lots of people might click on and start your survey, but not all of them will finish it. So how do we get the maximum amount of people through to the end? ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>338</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>338</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">ff5275c4-ad1e-4cc6-a4d7-6e02f5cd4cc3</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Should I Run a Voice Survey?]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Should I Run a Voice Survey?]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about listener voice surveys. Not all surveys need to be text-based, you can collect audio answers, too. A voice survey would be less in-depth than its text counterpart. But, the answers can have a bit more impact and meaning. They can even be used as part of future content, so long as you&rsquo;re clear about that with your listeners beforehand. A tool like Telbee is ideal for setting something like this up. It transcribes the answers for you, so they&rsquo;re easy to sift through and organise, without actually having to listen through them. Again, this isn&rsquo;t going to give you the big data of a text-based survey, but it&rsquo;s something to keep in your arsenal when you want candid feedback from your listeners. Or, when you&rsquo;re planning your next montage episode. For a deeper dive on this, and for a full review of Telbee, head on over to [thepodcasthost.com/voicefeedback](http://thepodcasthost.com/voicefeedback)</p>]]></description><pubDate>Tue, 12 Mar 2024 07:51:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:01</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/ff5275c4-ad1e-4cc6-a4d7-6e02f5cd4cc3</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/ff5275c4-ad1e-4cc6-a4d7-6e02f5cd4cc3.mp3?t=1710229861000" length="972928" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Not all surveys need to be text-based, you can collect audio answers, too. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>337</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>337</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">f38404b2-658d-4400-9fff-8a111e0687f8</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Tools for Running an Audience Survey]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Tools for Running an Audience Survey]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about tools for running a listener survey. Survey software can actually be quite expensive. As we&rsquo;re only looking to run something like this at most every six months, it doesn&rsquo;t make much sense to spend a fortune on it. So if you&rsquo;re looking to run a survey for free, then Google Forms is the best option I&rsquo;ve come across. Yes, it looks a bit basic, but it more than does the trick. SurveyMonkey is a famous survey tool, whilst Typeform is really sophisticated. But, for the majority of podcasters, they&rsquo;ll just be a bit too pricey for what we need. Be wary of WordPress plugin survey tools, too. They might be free to set up, but can sneakily end up holding your data hostage for a subscription fee. Once you&rsquo;ve set your survey up, remember to use a tool like PrettyLinks to create an easy link for it, too. That&rsquo;s what we&rsquo;ve done for our own survey, which you can find at [thepodcasthost.com/psp](http://thepodcasthost.com/psp)</p>]]></description><pubDate>Mon, 11 Mar 2024 07:51:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:03</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/f38404b2-658d-4400-9fff-8a111e0687f8</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/f38404b2-658d-4400-9fff-8a111e0687f8.mp3?t=1710143461000" length="1011840" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Survey software can actually be quite expensive. As we’re only looking to run something like this at most every six months, it doesn’t make much sense to spend a fortune on it. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>336</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>336</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">3567f96b-3cfe-497e-842a-f779cb1b0566</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Growing Your Audience by Knowing Your Audience]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Growing Your Audience by Knowing Your Audience]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And this week, we&rsquo;re going to focus on running a listener survey. When we&rsquo;re trying to grow our podcast audience, it&rsquo;s easy to go chasing after new listeners. But one of the best approaches is simply to look after the folks who&rsquo;re already listening. If you do that, your numbers will grow by default. Think about it. You&rsquo;re already creating content that people like. They choose to listen to you already. So asking them for some info and opinions can be like mining gold. Your existing fans are your biggest marketers. So make them feel valued, and heard. You&rsquo;ll get some great new content ideas, opportunities to tighten up your content, and a clearer idea of how people find you and what keeps them listening. On tomorrow&rsquo;s episode of Pocket-Sized Podcasting, we&rsquo;ll look at some tools for hosting your survey. In the meantime, for a deeper dive, head on over to [thepodcasthost.com/howtosurvey](http://thepodcasthost.com/howtosurvey)</p>]]></description><pubDate>Fri, 08 Mar 2024 07:50:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:01</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/3567f96b-3cfe-497e-842a-f779cb1b0566</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/3567f96b-3cfe-497e-842a-f779cb1b0566.mp3?t=1709884201000" length="977024" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[When we’re trying to grow our podcast audience, it’s easy to go chasing after new listeners. But one of the best approaches is simply to look after the folks who’re already listening. If you do that, your numbers will grow by default. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>335</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>335</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">d63b3f1c-9058-4eba-977a-4c52fa52f8c7</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Visibility Through Milestones]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Visibility Through Milestones]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about milestones. Setting goals for your show, meeting them, and then celebrating them, is a good way to get in front of new listeners. Your existing audience will follow along as you aim to hit that 50th episode, or get that 1000th download. Putting out some special content when you do, means that they&rsquo;re likely to share it. This content could be as simple as a graphic knocked up on Canva, or a full montage episode, like we talked about earlier in the series. So what fun, impressive, but realistic goals could you set for your show? And are there any unique and eye-catching ideas you can think of to celebrate them once you get there? Thanks for listening to Pocket-Sized Podcasting. And be sure to check out our ultimate content promotion manual over at [thepodcasthost.com/podcastgrowthbook](http://thepodcasthost.com/podcastgrowthbook)</p>]]></description><pubDate>Thu, 07 Mar 2024 07:50:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:00:57</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/d63b3f1c-9058-4eba-977a-4c52fa52f8c7</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/d63b3f1c-9058-4eba-977a-4c52fa52f8c7.mp3?t=1709797801000" length="915584" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Setting goals for your show, meeting them, and then celebrating them, is a good way to get in front of new listeners. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>334</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>334</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">0dd65131-b144-4840-8a92-e147b9b50a52</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Newsjacking]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Newsjacking]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about newsjacking. This sounds a bit sleazy, but, think of newsjacking as connecting with topics that are on people&rsquo;s minds right now. You want to do this with some sensitivity. It&rsquo;s good to make the most of current events, but you don&rsquo;t want to exploit someone else&rsquo;s pain. Start with something that is likely to be in the news for a while, so your episode is still relevant by the time you finish editing and release it into the world. Looking on Twitter and Google for trending topics is a good idea, though these tend to have a short shelf life in the cultural memory. Sometimes trending topics are a flash in the pan. People may have forgotten about it by the time you get your episode edited, polished and uploaded. So what big ongoing stories in your topic, niche, or industry can you contribute to? This won&rsquo;t just help with finding new listeners, either. Your existing audience will appreciate it a lot, too. Thanks for listening to Pocket-Sized Podcasting. And be sure to check out our ultimate content promotion manual over at [thepodcasthost.com/podcastgrowthbook](http://thepodcasthost.com/podcastgrowthbook)</p>]]></description><pubDate>Wed, 06 Mar 2024 07:50:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:11</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/0dd65131-b144-4840-8a92-e147b9b50a52</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/0dd65131-b144-4840-8a92-e147b9b50a52.mp3?t=1709711401000" length="1144960" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Think of newsjacking as connecting with topics that are on people’s minds right now.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>333</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>333</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">d34a1d76-dc9a-4155-92a9-8d5520e3a59f</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Promotion Through Entering Awards & Competitions]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Promotion Through Entering Awards & Competitions]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about entering awards and competitions. &ldquo;It&rsquo;s not the winning, it&rsquo;s the taking part&rdquo; might be an old cliche, but there&rsquo;s some truth to it. Awards and competitions aren&rsquo;t just a chance to win something. They&rsquo;re an opportunity for visibility too. Participating in a couple of awards or competitions each year can be useful. They can help you to spread the word about your show, expand your reach and network, and grow your audience. These awards might be regional, or online. They might be podcast-specific, or, built around your industry or topic. Some ask you to make or do something, whilst others request a fee. You&rsquo;ll just need to weigh all of this up to decide which ones are really going to be worth it. And, you never know, you might even win something. But, to be honest, we all know a few new listeners are worth more than some wee trophy. And all you have to do for that&hellip; is take part. Thanks for listening to Pocket-Sized Podcasting. And be sure to check out our ultimate content promotion manual over at [thepodcasthost.com/podcastgrowthbook](http://thepodcasthost.com/podcastgrowthbook)</p>]]></description><pubDate>Tue, 05 Mar 2024 07:10:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:12</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/d34a1d76-dc9a-4155-92a9-8d5520e3a59f</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/d34a1d76-dc9a-4155-92a9-8d5520e3a59f.mp3?t=1709622601000" length="1157248" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Awards and competitions aren’t just a chance to win something. They’re an opportunity for visibility too.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>332</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>332</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">198fc114-89ff-4c42-8327-c0b7b9d7de3d</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[How to Get Featured in Apple Podcasts]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[How to Get Featured in Apple Podcasts]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about being featured in Apple Podcasts. Apple Podcasts, aka, iTunes, is a huge listening platform, so getting an episode featured there can send a lot of new ears your way. Of course, there&rsquo;s no way to guarantee this, but here&rsquo;s how to have a good crack at it. Firstly, the episode in question shouldn&rsquo;t be published yet. They&rsquo;re looking for at least two weeks&rsquo; lead time to feature you. You&rsquo;ll find the promotion request form at [thepodcasthost.com/appleform](http://thepodcasthost.com/appleform) Fill that out and convince them why it's worth featuring. For example, interviewing a film star ahead of a big premiere, or, covering a major event or news story. Apple also wants to know how you&rsquo;ll promote the feature on their platform, so, the more you can offer them, the more likely you are to catch their eye. For an example of us featuring one of our podcasts there, along with download data, head on over to [thepodcasthost.com/itunesfrontpage](http://thepodcasthost.com/itunesfrontpage)</p>]]></description><pubDate>Mon, 04 Mar 2024 07:10:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:10</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/198fc114-89ff-4c42-8327-c0b7b9d7de3d</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/198fc114-89ff-4c42-8327-c0b7b9d7de3d.mp3?t=1709536201000" length="1116288" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Apple Podcasts, aka, iTunes, is a huge listening platform, so getting an episode featured there can send a lot of new ears your way. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>331</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>331</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">fe036d3b-39e0-4f32-8ab3-282d96e1c2c7</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[How to Promote Your Podcast on the Radio or in Newspapers]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[How to Promote Your Podcast on the Radio or in Newspapers]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about pitching to traditional media outlets like newspapers and radio. With a compelling story, you can draw new eyes or ears to your podcast. Some of the folks reading or listening might be in your target audience, and those are the ones you&rsquo;re hoping will check out your show. Of course, it isn&rsquo;t enough to go and tell your local paper you run a podcast. They&rsquo;ll just think &ldquo;okay, so what?&rdquo;. Instead, there needs to be a compelling human story there. Some examples could be - Podcaster helps listener launch their own business after they were made redundant - Podcaster helps listener to learn Spanish and land dream tourism job - Podcaster helps budding young author to win short story competition The story doesn&rsquo;t need to be about a listener, either, it could be about you - Podcaster was given a month to live. Now she&rsquo;s helping others battle back from cancer - Podcaster had a childhood speech impediment. Now they talk to hundreds - Podcaster was rejected from art school. Now, show has helped them to sell first painting Notice that these focus on a transformation. Journalists love that stuff, and it&rsquo;s the very basis of any story ever told. So what&rsquo;s your story? For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to [thepodcasthost.com/journalists](http://thepodcasthost.com/journalists)</p>]]></description><pubDate>Fri, 01 Mar 2024 07:10:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:29</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/fe036d3b-39e0-4f32-8ab3-282d96e1c2c7</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/fe036d3b-39e0-4f32-8ab3-282d96e1c2c7.mp3?t=1709277001000" length="1421440" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[With a compelling story, you can draw new eyes or ears to your podcast. Some of the folks reading or listening might be in your target audience, and those are the ones you’re hoping will check out your show.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>330</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>330</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">2efab56a-dce6-46b8-97d1-1314f6e8c44c</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[How to Get Booked as a Guest on a Podcast]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[How to Get Booked as a Guest on a Podcast]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about how to become a podcast guest. First thing&rsquo;s first - ditch that generic copy and paste email. Focus on fewer shows and reach out to them with a personalised video instead. Tell them what you love about their show, and how you&rsquo;re uniquely positioned to bring value to their audience. Make it all about them, their content, and their listeners. This won&rsquo;t guarantee results, but they&rsquo;ll almost certainly watch it, as opposed to skimming and deleting a lengthy text-based pitch. You can also pay booking services such as podcastguests.com, matchmaker.fm, or Podchaser Connect to set you up with interview gigs. Deciding on the best route here might come down to whether you&rsquo;d rather spend time, or money. Whichever investment you make, though, the results can be worth it. Thanks for listening to Pocket-Sized Podcast. For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to [thepodcasthost.com/getbookedasguest](http://thepodcasthost.com/getbookedasguest)</p>]]></description><pubDate>Thu, 29 Feb 2024 08:09:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:08</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/2efab56a-dce6-46b8-97d1-1314f6e8c44c</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/2efab56a-dce6-46b8-97d1-1314f6e8c44c.mp3?t=1709194141000" length="1087616" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[First thing’s first - ditch that generic copy and paste email. Focus on fewer shows and reach out to them with a personalised video instead. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>329</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>329</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">dc09b86c-c862-43c6-ae0b-8d656a44a88a</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Being Interviewed on Other Podcasts]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Being Interviewed on Other Podcasts]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about being interviewed on other podcasts. There are few better ways to grow your audience than this. After all, 100% of the people who hear it are active podcast listeners. If you do a good job and provide a lot of value, those people will naturally want to subscribe to your own show. This is definitely an &ldquo;easier said than done&rdquo; tactic, though. It&rsquo;s not like you can just invite yourself on to someone else&rsquo;s podcast. Popular shows in your topic will also get hundreds of requests for guest appearances. Ultimately, you&rsquo;ll need to play the long game, creating good content consistently over a period of time, and interview requests will start to come. But, there are a few tactics for jumping the queue here, and we&rsquo;re going to cover them on the next episode. Thanks for listening to Pocket-Sized Podcasting. And be sure to check out our ultimate content promotion manual over at [thepodcasthost.com/podcastgrowthbook](http://thepodcasthost.com/podcastgrowthbook)</p>]]></description><pubDate>Wed, 28 Feb 2024 07:09:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:04</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/dc09b86c-c862-43c6-ae0b-8d656a44a88a</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/dc09b86c-c862-43c6-ae0b-8d656a44a88a.mp3?t=1709104141000" length="1026176" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[There are few better ways to grow your audience than this. After all, 100% of the people who hear it are active podcast listeners. If you do a good job and provide a lot of value, those people will naturally want to subscribe to your own show. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>328</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>328</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">233abee5-0727-4840-be8b-e1c6deb68fdb</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Creating a Local Podcaster Group]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Creating a Local Podcaster Group]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about creating a local podcaster group. There are enough podcasts out there these days that you&rsquo;ll have other podcasters in your area. Sure, they might podcast about something completely different, and, have no direct interest in your topic, but there&rsquo;s a lot of benefits to getting together regularly. Support, community, and friendship are always good things to have in your life. But you also become the go-to person in your topic. Each time one of your fellow podcasters meets someone interested in it, they&rsquo;re naturally going to mention you. They&rsquo;ll know the name of your show, and where to find it. And you&rsquo;ll be able to do the same for others in the group, too. You might even meet another podcaster who&rsquo;s topic or audience overlaps with yours, and there&rsquo;ll be scope to try out some of the cross-promotion tactics we covered on an earlier episode. Thanks for listening to Pocket-Sized Podcasting. And be sure to check out our ultimate content promotion manual over at [thepodcasthost.com/podcastgrowthbook](http://thepodcasthost.com/podcastgrowthbook)</p>]]></description><pubDate>Tue, 27 Feb 2024 07:10:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:09</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/233abee5-0727-4840-be8b-e1c6deb68fdb</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/233abee5-0727-4840-be8b-e1c6deb68fdb.mp3?t=1709017801000" length="1099904" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Support, community, and friendship are always good things to have in your life. But you also become the go-to person in your topic. Each time one of your fellow podcasters meets someone interested in it, they’re naturally going to mention you. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>327</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>327</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">368d2437-7984-4fbc-b5b3-8f6d79427bec</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Organising a Live Event]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Organising a Live Event]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about organising a live event. Booking a space and recording an episode with a live audience is more work than just hitting record in your bedroom, but the results are worth it. Live episodes can be powered up by audience engagement and reaction, and they&rsquo;re great for word-of-mouth marketing, too. There&rsquo;s challenges to this, obviously. Your audience might be international with none of them living locally. Your media host&rsquo;s geographic stats are a great way to find out which countries and cities your podcast is a big deal in. If it&rsquo;s somewhere a plane ride away, then this might be a more long-term plan. Could you even think about crowdfunding it? Thanks for listening to Pocket-Sized Podcasting. And be sure to check out our ultimate content promotion manual over at [thepodcasthost.com/podcastgrowthbook](http://thepodcasthost.com/podcastgrowthbook)</p>]]></description><pubDate>Mon, 26 Feb 2024 07:10:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:00:58</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/368d2437-7984-4fbc-b5b3-8f6d79427bec</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/368d2437-7984-4fbc-b5b3-8f6d79427bec.mp3?t=1708931401000" length="936064" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Live episodes can be powered up by audience engagement and reaction, and they’re great for word-of-mouth marketing, too. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>326</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>326</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">b2a69e4b-c576-442f-ba1e-6870d2cd49e5</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Recording Vox-Pops]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Recording Vox-Pops]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about recording vox-pops. This is something you&rsquo;ll have seen on TV before. Vox populi, or voice of the people, is when a few random members of the public each answer the same question, or give their opinion on something topical. These short clips are then edited together to create a piece of content. So have a think about some topics or questions you might be able to ask on your show. Think about the locations you might record them, too. You&rsquo;ll find plenty people at your local shopping centre, or, you might do this at a dedicated event where knowledge of your topic is already assumed. Be sure to let folks know that it&rsquo;s for your podcast, and give them a business card so they can find and follow it. This is a great way to find new listeners, as well as create good content for your next episode. Thanks for listening to Pocket-Sized Podcasting. And be sure to check out our ultimate content promotion manual over at [thepodcasthost.com/podcastgrowthbook](http://thepodcasthost.com/podcastgrowthbook)</p>]]></description><pubDate>Fri, 23 Feb 2024 07:09:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:06</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/b2a69e4b-c576-442f-ba1e-6870d2cd49e5</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/b2a69e4b-c576-442f-ba1e-6870d2cd49e5.mp3?t=1708672141000" length="1063040" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[This is something you’ll have seen on TV before. Vox populi, or voice of the people, is when a few random members of the public each answer the same question, or give their opinion on something topical.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>325</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>325</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">98d5a7b1-2446-49a2-8c06-c89c39cbcfb3</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Partnering With an Event]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Partnering With an Event]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about partnering with an event. In recent episodes, you&rsquo;ve heard how you might find various events and get-togethers that are relevant to your show. Attending them is a great idea - partnering with them is an even better one. Some podcasts become the official media partner of events in their niche. Here, you might record content in the lead-up, then on the day itself too. This can also give you access to some speakers or interviewees that would&rsquo;ve been otherwise hard to reach. So again, this can be a win-win. You&rsquo;re getting loads of great new content opportunities, reaching plenty new people in your target audience, and you&rsquo;ll even save money on the price of a ticket, too. Thanks for listening to Pocket-Sized Podcasting. And remember, you can leave feedback for us quickly and easily over at [thepodcasthost.com/psp](http://thepodcasthost.com/psp)</p>]]></description><pubDate>Thu, 22 Feb 2024 07:09:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:00</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/98d5a7b1-2446-49a2-8c06-c89c39cbcfb3</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/98d5a7b1-2446-49a2-8c06-c89c39cbcfb3.mp3?t=1708585741000" length="962688" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Some podcasts become the official media partner of events in their niche. Here, you might record content in the lead-up, then on the day itself too. This can also give you access to some speakers or interviewees that would’ve been otherwise hard to reach. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>324</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>324</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">158b6a09-6740-4ba0-bbfe-c9d1aa82bc44</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Local Groups, Clubs, or Societies]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Local Groups, Clubs, or Societies]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about local and ongoing events in your niche. Face-to-face interaction goes a long way toward promoting your podcast. Other people are more likely to remember you and your work if they have met you in person. There might be some groups or societies in your area that are relevant to your podcast topic. It&rsquo;s much easier and cheaper to pop along to one of these, than it is to invest in the time and travel for a big national event. These groups tend to meet in pubs, libraries, community centres, churches, or coffee shops. They&rsquo;re a chance to socialize, make friends, and learn from one another. Meetup.com is a great way to find clubs and societies, though you can also use platforms like Eventbrite, Facebook, Craigslist, or Gumtree. Thanks for listening to Pocket-Sized Podcasting. And remember, you can leave feedback for us quickly and easily over at [thepodcasthost.com/psp](http://thepodcasthost.com/psp)</p>]]></description><pubDate>Wed, 21 Feb 2024 07:09:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:04</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/158b6a09-6740-4ba0-bbfe-c9d1aa82bc44</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/158b6a09-6740-4ba0-bbfe-c9d1aa82bc44.mp3?t=1708499341000" length="1020032" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[There might be some groups or societies in your area that are relevant to your podcast topic. It’s much easier and cheaper to pop along to one of these, than it is to invest in the time and travel for a big national event.  ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>323</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>323</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">55a50307-8f62-46ac-a18d-c1d26f1e51c8</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Finding Conferences in Your Niche]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Finding Conferences in Your Niche]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about finding conferences in your niche. No matter what topic you podcast about, there&rsquo;s probably a decent-sized annual event that takes place around it. This could be anything from a Comicon or board game convention, to a conference of surgeons or physicists. It might seem like a hassle or expense to travel to something like this, but it can be well worth your while. There&rsquo;s nothing more powerful than real-life in-person interactions. Obviously, you&rsquo;ll want to behave like a human, rather than a walking billboard for your show. But do take things like business cards or any other appropriate merch to help make your podcast known. This is more about finding long-term friends and relationships rather than a sheer new listeners numbers game. But, you never know what opportunities can arise from these events, and they can lead to massive podcast growth further down the line. Thanks for listening to Pocket-Sized Podcasting. And remember, you can leave feedback for us quickly and easily over at [thepodcasthost.com/psp](http://thepodcasthost.com/psp)</p>]]></description><pubDate>Tue, 20 Feb 2024 07:12:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:17</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/55a50307-8f62-46ac-a18d-c1d26f1e51c8</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/55a50307-8f62-46ac-a18d-c1d26f1e51c8.mp3?t=1708413121000" length="1237120" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[No matter what topic you podcast about, there’s probably a decent-sized annual event that takes place around it. This could be anything from a Comicon or board game convention, to a conference of surgeons or physicists. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>322</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>322</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">ae390c45-ece5-4bab-8a87-2f18d4f85695</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Growth Competitions]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Growth Competitions]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about running competitions to grow your show. This is a good way to reward your current listeners and spread the word about your show. Think about a big action that your podcast&rsquo;s topic includes. Is there a skill your show teaches, that you could encourage listeners to show off on social, using a certain hashtag? Or maybe you&rsquo;ll reward listeners for the most innovative use of your podcast merch out there in the wild. Like any competition, you could pick one single winner and send them a physical prize. Or, you might have some sort of digital prize you can offer to everyone who enters. Not only can this give you lots of extra marketing as well as a few new listeners, it&rsquo;s also a great way to build a sense of community and collaboration around your show, too. Your listeners will really feel like an active part of the podcast, and that can be a powerful thing. Thanks for listening to Pocket-Sized Podcasting. And remember, you can leave feedback for us quickly and easily over at [thepodcasthost.com/psp](http://thepodcasthost.com/psp)</p>]]></description><pubDate>Mon, 19 Feb 2024 07:12:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:09</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/ae390c45-ece5-4bab-8a87-2f18d4f85695</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/ae390c45-ece5-4bab-8a87-2f18d4f85695.mp3?t=1708326721000" length="1104000" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Think about a big action that your podcast’s topic includes. Is there a skill your show teaches, that you could encourage listeners to show off on social, using a certain hashtag? Or maybe you’ll reward listeners for the most innovative use of your podcast merch out there in the wild. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>321</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>321</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">86a5f29e-8cd1-439b-af7e-5257d6798d37</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Personal Outreach to ‘True Fans’]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Personal Outreach to ‘True Fans’]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about reaching out to a handful of your dedicated fans. If you can find 3-5 people who you know listen to every single word of every single episode you put out, then it&rsquo;s well worth your time asking them to get on a call with you. You can almost use this as a sort of focus group for your content. The info you get from them can be gold when it comes to growing your podcast, too. You&rsquo;ll want to ask them questions like how they discovered the show, why they initially hit play, why they subscribed, and what keeps them listening. Identifying what you&rsquo;re doing well means you can really zone in on that, going forward. And, you can also get some critical feedback, too. Is there anything they&rsquo;re not keen on, or would like to see added or removed from the show? This stuff can all be invaluable when it comes to planning the future direction of your show. Thanks for listening to Pocket-Sized Podcasting. And remember, you can leave feedback for us quickly and easily over at [thepodcasthost.com/psp](http://thepodcasthost.com/psp)</p>]]></description><pubDate>Fri, 16 Feb 2024 07:11:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:09</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/86a5f29e-8cd1-439b-af7e-5257d6798d37</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/86a5f29e-8cd1-439b-af7e-5257d6798d37.mp3?t=1708067461000" length="1106048" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[If you can find 3-5 people who you know listen to every single word of every single episode you put out, then it’s well worth your time asking them to get on a call with you. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>320</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>320</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">6cddd729-afca-464f-a3a0-bc6ee590f619</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Help Crowdfund Another Podcast]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Help Crowdfund Another Podcast]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about helping to crowdfund another podcast. If there&rsquo;s one thing 99% of podcasts have in common, it&rsquo;s in asking their listeners for financial support. Commonly, this is done through crowdfunding platforms like Patreon. And in exchange for supporting them, many shows will offer reward tiers that can help promote the work of the patron. If you have some disposable cash to spare, there are worse ways to spend it. You&rsquo;re helping to support a fellow creative, and have the opportunity to grow your own show in exchange. So what are your favourite podcasts in your niche? Do they ask for any kind of financial support? And if so, do they offer any rewards? This could be things like; 1. Putting a link to your website on their own site 2. Mentioning you on their show 3. Playing your trailer on their show This is yet another win-win situation for all involved. Thanks for listening to Pocket-Sized Podcasting. And remember, you can leave feedback for us quickly and easily over at [thepodcasthost.com/psp](http://thepodcasthost.com/psp)</p>]]></description><pubDate>Thu, 15 Feb 2024 07:11:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:10</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/6cddd729-afca-464f-a3a0-bc6ee590f619</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/6cddd729-afca-464f-a3a0-bc6ee590f619.mp3?t=1707981061000" length="1126528" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[If there’s one thing 99% of podcasts have in common, it’s in asking their listeners for financial support.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>319</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>319</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">34d7ce87-5010-41f4-877d-c961e040aac9</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Write a Guest Post]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Write a Guest Post]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about writing a guest post. A popular way to promote your podcast is to do a guest post on a site with a similar target audience. With a guest post, you're creating insightful and helpful content for their readers, and in turn, are able to link back to your own content. So, have a think about some sites that create good content in your niche. What topics do they cover? And how might you be uniquely placed to write something useful and interesting for their readers? A lot of websites have guidelines around guest posts, but if not, they&rsquo;ll at least have a contact page. Remember, make your pitch all about *them* and their audience. This is all about delivering value. You&rsquo;ll get your link back, and you&rsquo;ll get to mention your show, but that isn&rsquo;t something you want to lead with. Thanks for listening to Pocket-Sized Podcasting. And remember, you can leave feedback for us quickly and easily over at [thepodcasthost.com/psp](http://thepodcasthost.com/psp)</p>]]></description><pubDate>Wed, 14 Feb 2024 07:11:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:05</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/34d7ce87-5010-41f4-877d-c961e040aac9</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/34d7ce87-5010-41f4-877d-c961e040aac9.mp3?t=1707894661000" length="1044608" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[A popular way to promote your podcast is to do a guest post on a site with a similar target audience. With a guest post, you're creating insightful and helpful content for their readers, and in turn, are able to link back to your own content.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>318</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>318</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">53227f74-1b4a-4070-b1bf-be345afa24b3</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Support a Charity]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Support a Charity]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about supporting a charity. Getting behind a charity that&rsquo;s close to your heart - as well as your podcast topic - can build a great win-win scenario for all involved. This support could be financial, but it may be more useful to both parties for you to promote and spotlight the work of the organisation. If you do an interview show, this might give you access to folks who&rsquo;d love to do an episode with you. And if you&rsquo;re creating good content around a charity, they&rsquo;ll likely want to share and promote your podcast to their wider audience, as well. A couple of examples here could be; - A tabletop wargaming podcast supporting a veterans charity. - Or a writers' show supporting an organisation that helps fund books for kids in socially deprived neighbourhoods. Obviously, with charities, it'll be more of a long-term reciprocity thing, rather than a direct transaction. You'll need to be respectful here, and be aware that this is an ongoing relationship, rather than a service. Thanks for listening to Pocket-Sized Podcasting. And remember, you can leave feedback for us quickly and easily over at [thepodcasthost.com/psp](http://thepodcasthost.com/psp)</p>]]></description><pubDate>Tue, 13 Feb 2024 06:34:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:19</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/53227f74-1b4a-4070-b1bf-be345afa24b3</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/53227f74-1b4a-4070-b1bf-be345afa24b3.mp3?t=1707806041000" length="1263744" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Getting behind a charity that’s close to your heart - as well as your podcast topic - can build a great win-win scenario for all involved.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>317</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>317</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">703d372f-258c-4477-a452-d3e8065ecb3e</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Create a Sponsored Resource]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Create a Sponsored Resource]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about creating a sponsored resource. Podcast sponsorship doesn&rsquo;t always involve money changing hands. Instead, you can have a &ldquo;content partnership&rdquo; with a company where visibility is more important than cash. A sponsored resource is basically something you can create for a business. It should be something that their customers will find useful, or enjoy. In exchange, the resource - and the business itself - will promote your podcast and send new listeners your way. A couple of examples might be; - An outdoors podcast who create a PDF resource for a popular walking boot company - &ldquo;The Top 20 Walking Trails in Scotland&rdquo; - Or, A ketogenic diet podcast that creates a PDF resource or infographic, for a cheese or butter company, with 20 exciting recipes to try. So can you think of any companies you&rsquo;d love to partner with? If so, reach out to their marketing department with your proposal and media kit. It could be the start of a fruitful relationship for both. Thanks for listening to Pocket-Sized Podcasting. And remember, you can leave feedback for us quickly and easily over at [thepodcasthost.com/psp](http://thepodcasthost.com/psp)</p>]]></description><pubDate>Mon, 12 Feb 2024 07:34:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:18</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/703d372f-258c-4477-a452-d3e8065ecb3e</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/703d372f-258c-4477-a452-d3e8065ecb3e.mp3?t=1707723241000" length="1253504" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[A sponsored resource is basically something you can create for a business. It should be something that their customers will find useful, or enjoy. In exchange, the resource - and the business itself - will promote your podcast and send new listeners your way. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>316</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>316</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">5f530238-4f16-41af-add7-68ef4f20cb85</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Create a ‘Best Podcasts in Your Niche’ Roundup]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Create a ‘Best Podcasts in Your Niche’ Roundup]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about creating a &lsquo;best podcasts&rsquo; roundup. Lists, or &lsquo;roundups&rsquo;, are one of the most shareable (and searchable) forms of content on the planet. A great way to utilise them to grow your audience, is to create a &lsquo;Best Podcasts&rsquo; roundup in your niche. This could either be done as a podcast episode, or blog post (or both!). For each show, answer questions like &ldquo;what&rsquo;s it about?&rdquo;, &ldquo;who&rsquo;s it by?&rdquo; why you like it, how it&rsquo;s been useful to you, and why you recommend others go and check it out. Make sure you provide links to each show&rsquo;s website too. When you&rsquo;ve published your roundup, email and tag each of the podcasts mentioned. Tell them about their inclusion on the list, and ask them if they wouldn't mind sharing it with their audience too. This is a great win-win where you shine a light on other podcasts, but also end up with a lot of your target audience visiting your site. For an example, see our &lsquo;Best Space Podcasts&rsquo; roundup at [thepodcasthost.com/spacepodcasts](http://thepodcasthost.com/spacepodcasts)</p>]]></description><pubDate>Fri, 09 Feb 2024 07:31:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:10</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/5f530238-4f16-41af-add7-68ef4f20cb85</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/5f530238-4f16-41af-add7-68ef4f20cb85.mp3?t=1707463861000" length="1118336" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Lists, or ‘roundups’, are one of the most shareable (and searchable) forms of content on the planet.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>315</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>315</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">f1b923d2-ef02-4e27-ab05-244d077724b5</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Creating a Montage Episode]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Creating a Montage Episode]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about creating a montage episode. A montage episode is a piece of audio content, made up of clips from different contributors. A tried and tested way of creating one is to build the episode around a single topic or question. Here, each participant records their answer to the question, and sends over their audio to the creator. You can collect clips from anyone from the general public, to your podcast listeners. In this particular instance, we want to create one with fellow podcasters in our niche. Some examples of montage episodes could include An episode of a travel podcast, where contributors talk about their favourite holiday destination An episode of a sound design podcast, where contributors talk about their favourite audio production software Or, an episode of a health podcast, where contributors talk about their morning routines When you&rsquo;ve published a montage episode, be sure to reach out to everyone involved and ask them to share it with their own listeners. Everyone&rsquo;s podcast can grow with this strategy, on top of it being great content for the collective audience. Everyone wins! For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to http://thepodcasthost.com/montage</p>]]></description><pubDate>Thu, 08 Feb 2024 06:31:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:26</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/f1b923d2-ef02-4e27-ab05-244d077724b5</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/f1b923d2-ef02-4e27-ab05-244d077724b5.mp3?t=1707373861000" length="1376384" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[A montage episode is a piece of audio content, made up of clips from different contributors.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>314</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>314</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">a872e8d3-940b-4403-b3e4-10e34f84b546</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Creating a Crossover Episode]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Creating a Crossover Episode]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about running a co-hosted episode. Teaming up with another podcast in your niche to do a special co-hosted episode can be a great way to expand your reach and share your audiences. These &ldquo;crossover&rdquo; episodes can bring fresh and engaging content to the listeners of both shows. They can also help listeners find new, relevant, and enjoyable content that they might not have already been aware of. Can you think of a podcast that's at a similar level to your own show, in terms of influence and following. One with a similar topic, or some sort of overlap in subject matter. If so, reach out to them and propose a special co-hosted episode on a topic that&rsquo;ll benefit both your audiences. Be sure to sell the benefits to them. You think your audience will love their content, and this is an opportunity to grow their reach. Publish this special episode on both your feeds, making it clear throughout that this is a co-hosted episode between podcast X and podcast Y. Thanks for listening to Pocket-Sized Podcasting. And remember, you can leave feedback for us quickly and easily over at http://thepodcasthost.com/psp</p>]]></description><pubDate>Wed, 07 Feb 2024 07:31:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:23</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/a872e8d3-940b-4403-b3e4-10e34f84b546</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/a872e8d3-940b-4403-b3e4-10e34f84b546.mp3?t=1707291061000" length="1327232" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Teaming up with another podcast in your niche to do a special co-hosted episode can be a great way to expand your reach and share your audiences. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>313</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>313</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">216589a1-8460-4cb4-a21a-4817fc0d79a7</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Contributing to an Existing Community]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Contributing to an Existing Community]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about contributing constructively to an existing community. Whether or not you run your own community, there&rsquo;s no harm in getting involved in others within your topic, too. This doesn&rsquo;t mean going around spamming everywhere about your podcast. It&rsquo;s about being a positive, pro-active, and helpful person. For example, you can offer answers to questions, or you could even ask some of your own. Kicking off an ongoing weekly conversation can be a great idea too. For example &ldquo;hey fellow writers, what&rsquo;s everyone been working on this week?&rdquo;, or, &ldquo;alright photographer pals, let&rsquo;s see your best shot from the past seven days&rdquo;. This positive community involvement means people get to know you - and, by default - your podcast. Some will become listeners, but even those who don&rsquo;t will appreciate the positive contribution you&rsquo;re making in your space. For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to http://thepodcasthost.com/buildingcommunity</p>]]></description><pubDate>Tue, 06 Feb 2024 07:12:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:14</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/216589a1-8460-4cb4-a21a-4817fc0d79a7</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/216589a1-8460-4cb4-a21a-4817fc0d79a7.mp3?t=1707203521000" length="1194112" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Whether or not you run your own community, there’s no harm in getting involved in others within your topic, too. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>312</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>312</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">2b051574-0af3-4ab1-868b-b0f11c18dd41</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Starting an Online Community Around Your Show]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Starting an Online Community Around Your Show]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about starting an online community around your podcast. This lets you engage in discussion with your podcast audience. It allows you to get feedback, and generate enthusiasm. It even allows listeners to meet and get to know one another, and this is a powerful thing. There are a few plugins that let you build your community on your own WordPress site. A couple of good options here are bbPress and CM Answers. If you and your listeners are on Facebook, then you can start a group there. Discord is also an increasingly popular option amongst podcasters, too. Regardless of where you create your community, be sure to mention it in your Calls to Action, and to link clearly to it in your shownotes and website. For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to http://thepodcasthost.com/buildingcommunity</p>]]></description><pubDate>Mon, 05 Feb 2024 07:12:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:01</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/2b051574-0af3-4ab1-868b-b0f11c18dd41</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/2b051574-0af3-4ab1-868b-b0f11c18dd41.mp3?t=1707117121000" length="977024" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[This lets you engage in discussion with your podcast audience. It allows you to get feedback, and generate enthusiasm. It even allows listeners to meet and get to know one another, and this is a powerful thing. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>311</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>311</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">b7995f87-2bbe-46dd-bd90-d798da5831db</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Creating Memorable & Immortal Links]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Creating Memorable & Immortal Links]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about creating memorable and immortal links. As podcasters, we&rsquo;ll usually try to send the listener to some link or resource at least once per episode. By the way, have you taken our feedback survey yet at [thepodcasthost.com/psp](http://thepodcasthost.com/psp) ? But see, that type of link&rsquo;s exactly what I&rsquo;m talking about. It&rsquo;s short and memorable. And you can always change where it points to, further down the line. A classic example of this is a podcaster sending folks to their Patreon for 100 episodes, then, moving to a new funding platform. They now have this back catalogue full of out-of-date links. If they&rsquo;d instead used a shortlink like their podcast dot com slash support, they could&rsquo;ve just updated where that points to. If you use WordPress, then PrettyLinks is a great plugin for this. And Podpage has its own version too, if you&rsquo;re using that. So, again, that link is http://thepodcasthost.com/psp - and, when you click on that, which of course you will, look at the URL it actually goes to, and imagine me trying to read that out. Maybe that could be a review prize incentive, actually&hellip;</p>]]></description><pubDate>Fri, 02 Feb 2024 07:12:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:26</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/b7995f87-2bbe-46dd-bd90-d798da5831db</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/b7995f87-2bbe-46dd-bd90-d798da5831db.mp3?t=1706857921000" length="1374336" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[As podcasters, we’ll usually try to send the listener to some link or resource at least once per episode. So make those links as memorable and as easy to type out as you can. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>310</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>310</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">d3252993-dd83-49a0-b0fd-2fa780604e34</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Tweeting About Another Podcast]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Tweeting About Another Podcast]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about tagging another podcast in a positive tweet. I know that &ldquo;positive tweet&rdquo; sounds like an oxymoron. But there apparently was a time when people acted reasonably to one another on that platform. So if you&rsquo;re on twitter, and so is a podcast in your niche that you really like, why not post a nice tweet about them? Here, you might talk a wee bit about why you like it so much. Maybe the show was also a big inspiration behind starting your own, and that&rsquo;s definitely worth mentioning too. If the podcast interacts with your tweet, it&rsquo;s going to be seen by many of their followers, some of which are going to want to check out your own show. So make sure you get a clear link to it in your bio, too. By the way, you can always tweet this show @thepodcasthost. I mean, I won&rsquo;t see it. But I&rsquo;d like to think our admin would at least tell me about it. I&rsquo;m sure they would.</p>]]></description><pubDate>Thu, 01 Feb 2024 07:12:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:00:57</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/d3252993-dd83-49a0-b0fd-2fa780604e34</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/d3252993-dd83-49a0-b0fd-2fa780604e34.mp3?t=1706771521000" length="915584" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[If you’re on Twitter, and so is a podcast in your niche that you really like, why not post a nice tweet about them? ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>309</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>309</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">9aeb6526-e417-405b-86e4-64a0de7d89c3</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Podcast Review ‘In-Content’ Incentives]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Podcast Review ‘In-Content’ Incentives]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking, again, about podcast review incentives. This time around, though, you&rsquo;re incentivising the content. So how does that look? Well, you might announce that when you hit a certain number of reviews - let&rsquo;s say, 25 - you&rsquo;ll do something a bit out of the ordinary. That could be a unique, highly-produced episode, an interview with a top-tier guest, or a live broadcast from somewhere that resonates. Depending on your niche or topic you could even vow to personally do something like run a marathon, do a parachute jump, or fast for a week. Your audience will also feel like they&rsquo;re part of something, chipping in their own reviews to edge forwards towards a collective goal. This isn&rsquo;t just a great way of getting more reviews, it&rsquo;s also a way of building community and engagement too. For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to http://thepodcasthost.com/morereviews</p>]]></description><pubDate>Wed, 31 Jan 2024 07:11:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:03</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/9aeb6526-e417-405b-86e4-64a0de7d89c3</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/9aeb6526-e417-405b-86e4-64a0de7d89c3.mp3?t=1706685061000" length="1009792" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[When incentivising the content, you might announce that when you hit a certain number of reviews - let’s say, 25 - you’ll do something a bit out of the ordinary. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>308</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>308</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">75037b64-8eaa-4580-bd4e-3b19e5abd7fd</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Podcast Review ‘Prizes for All’ Incentives]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Podcast Review ‘Prizes for All’ Incentives]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about podcast review incentives. Another way to incentivise podcast reviews amongst your audience is to offer a prize for everyone, rather than one listener taking all in a prize draw. The same principles apply here. Listeners screenshot and email their reviews to you - that way, you know who they are, and how to get in touch with them. And they get something in return straight away. Obviously, it&rsquo;s better if this is a digital incentive. An ebook, access to a course, or a private bonus episode. You don&rsquo;t want to be posting bottles of wine all around the world, do you? Again, mention this on your episodes, but nowhere else. A bunch of low-value generic reviews will only make it look like you&rsquo;ve used a click farm to get them. And that&rsquo;s going to put more people off your content than attract them in. For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to http://thepodcasthost.com/morereviews</p>]]></description><pubDate>Tue, 30 Jan 2024 09:05:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:01</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/75037b64-8eaa-4580-bd4e-3b19e5abd7fd</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/75037b64-8eaa-4580-bd4e-3b19e5abd7fd.mp3?t=1706605501000" length="987264" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Another way to incentivise podcast reviews amongst your audience is to offer a prize for everyone, rather than one listener taking all in a prize draw. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>307</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>307</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">becfcd15-cdfd-4ef2-a51e-5f29a0e142e6</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Podcast Review Competitions]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Podcast Review Competitions]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about podcast review competitions. Here, you&rsquo;d ask each person who&rsquo;s reviewed your podcast to email you a screenshot of that review, and enter them into a prize draw. It&rsquo;s perfectly legit to incentivise reviews this way. The big caveat, though, is that this is open to your listening audience only. Not the general public. How do you ensure that? You only mention it on your episodes. That way, only your listeners will hear it. Yes you could potentially get more if you splashed it all over the internet - especially if you&rsquo;re offering a lucrative prize. But any extra reviews you get here are going to be low value. Who wants a &ldquo;great show, five stars&rdquo; comment from someone who&rsquo;s never even listened before? For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to http://thepodcasthost.com/morereviews</p>]]></description><pubDate>Mon, 29 Jan 2024 09:04:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:00:57</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/becfcd15-cdfd-4ef2-a51e-5f29a0e142e6</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/becfcd15-cdfd-4ef2-a51e-5f29a0e142e6.mp3?t=1706519041000" length="909440" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[It’s perfectly legit to incentivise reviews this way. The big caveat, though, is that this is open to your listening audience only. Not the general public. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>306</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>306</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">7ce40eee-5c15-4f1e-81c4-a0e71f42d4b8</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Asking Individual Listeners to Review Your Podcast]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Asking Individual Listeners to Review Your Podcast]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about asking individual listeners to review your podcast. Don&rsquo;t panic. This isn&rsquo;t a week-long task of sending out a personalised email to every single listener you have. Instead, it&rsquo;s about approaching three to five people who you know listen to every single episode you put out. These could be folks you&rsquo;ve heard from before via email or social media. Or, they might be active in the same online community as you. In any case, it&rsquo;s worth reaching out to them personally to ask if they fancied writing a short and honest review for your show. Most people will be only too happy to help. You can even add these reviews to your own website, and, if your listener creates any content of their own, give a link back to them. For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to http://thepodcasthost.com/morereviews</p>]]></description><pubDate>Fri, 26 Jan 2024 09:04:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:00:57</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/7ce40eee-5c15-4f1e-81c4-a0e71f42d4b8</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/7ce40eee-5c15-4f1e-81c4-a0e71f42d4b8.mp3?t=1706259841000" length="917632" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Don’t panic. This isn’t a week-long task of sending out a personalised email to every single listener you have. Instead, it’s about approaching three to five people who you know listen to every single episode you put out. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>305</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>305</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">9d7c074f-61bd-4006-ae01-b12ee80c52c5</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[How to Get More Podcast Reviews]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[How to Get More Podcast Reviews]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about how to encourage podcast reviews. As we mentioned on the last episode, podcast reviews can be great &ldquo;social proof&rdquo; that you can use in your marketing and promotion. There are a few approaches and angles here, so we&rsquo;d like to spend the next few episodes running through them. But the starting point is, of course, to ask your audience. Ask them at the end of each episode, in your Call to Action. Send them to a link or page on your website where you list all the platforms they can leave a review. For example, Podchaser, Apple Podcasts, and Castbox. You might even create a few wee tutorial videos to show them how, too. This is the low-hanging fruit of getting more reviews, but there&rsquo;s more you can do too, and we&rsquo;re going to talk about them next week. For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to http://thepodcasthost.com/morereviews</p>]]></description><pubDate>Thu, 25 Jan 2024 09:03:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:04</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/9d7c074f-61bd-4006-ae01-b12ee80c52c5</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/9d7c074f-61bd-4006-ae01-b12ee80c52c5.mp3?t=1706173381000" length="1032320" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[As we mentioned on the last episode, podcast reviews can be great “social proof” that you can use in your marketing and promotion. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>304</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>304</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">c5d51fc5-28bd-462c-aea5-9ecbc94a6b28</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Leaving a Positive Review for Another Show in Your Niche]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Leaving a Positive Review for Another Show in Your Niche]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about leaving a positive review for another podcast. Have you ever heard the term &ldquo;a rising tide lifts all boats&rdquo;? Well, this can be true in your own podcasting niche. There are probably other podcasts out there that you enjoy, that cover similar topics, or have similar target audiences to you. Don&rsquo;t see these shows as competition. In fact, leaving a positive review for them on a platform like Podchaser can be a win-win for you both. Lots of podcasters share their reviews publicly because they&rsquo;re great &ldquo;social proof&rdquo;. So if you leave one that also happens to mention your own show, then you can end up with a few new listeners heading your way. Of course, it goes without saying that your review should focus on the podcast you&rsquo;re reviewing, rather than your own. For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to http://thepodcasthost.com/writingreviews</p>]]></description><pubDate>Wed, 24 Jan 2024 09:03:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:03</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/c5d51fc5-28bd-462c-aea5-9ecbc94a6b28</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/c5d51fc5-28bd-462c-aea5-9ecbc94a6b28.mp3?t=1706086981000" length="1005696" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Have you ever heard the term “a rising tide lifts all boats”? Well, this can be true in your own podcasting niche. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>303</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>303</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">402845d6-2383-4a87-83d3-e19b96de4da1</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Growing Your Podcast Audience]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Growing Your Podcast Audience]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about growing your podcast audience. On Pocket-Sized Podcasting so far, we&rsquo;ve covered everything you need to plan and create your show. We&rsquo;ve also made sure that your podcast is optimised for growth. But now that you&rsquo;ve launched a podcast on solid foundations, how can we take things to the next level? Despite what the internet might have you believe, there&rsquo;s no &ldquo;one simple trick&rdquo; to growing a podcast audience. And it&rsquo;s certainly not the sort of thing that happens overnight. Instead, it&rsquo;s a cumulative effect of doing multiple small things over a period of time - in conjunction with the most important factor of all - creating great content. As we switch over to growth mode over the next few months, you&rsquo;re going to get one quick podcast promotion tip every day of the week. So please do make sure you&rsquo;re subscribed or following Pocket-Sized Podcasting on your listening app of choice. And, remember, we always love to hear your feedback and suggestions, which you can leave for us at http://thepodcasthost.com/psp</p>]]></description><pubDate>Tue, 23 Jan 2024 10:48:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:11</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/402845d6-2383-4a87-83d3-e19b96de4da1</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/402845d6-2383-4a87-83d3-e19b96de4da1.mp3?t=1706006881000" length="1140864" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[As we switch over to growth mode over the next few months, you’re going to get one quick podcast promotion tip every day of the week. So please do make sure you’re subscribed or following Pocket-Sized Podcasting on your listening app of choice.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>302</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>302</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">397cecd8-04e1-4c96-a48f-6cf0bcf66a45</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Creating a ‘Start Here’ Page]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Creating a ‘Start Here’ Page]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about adding a &lsquo;Start Here&rsquo; page to your website. As podcasters, we can become desensitized to all of the content we&rsquo;ve created over a given time. You might think that your podcast, blog, coaching service, books, and other products all make perfect logical sense. But for someone landing on your site for the very first time, it can be confusing and overwhelming. Creating a &lsquo;Start Here&rsquo; page is a great way of gently introducing folks to your content. You might combine elements from your &lsquo;About&rsquo; page and full episode list. Or, you might decide to scrap the other two completely, so there&rsquo;s less confusion. Ultimately, it&rsquo;s all about managing that early journey of potential new listeners. Give them something clear and easy that feels like a quick win for them. Then, show them how to get more. For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to http://thepodcasthost.com/websitetips</p>]]></description><pubDate>Mon, 22 Jan 2024 10:48:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:03</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/397cecd8-04e1-4c96-a48f-6cf0bcf66a45</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/397cecd8-04e1-4c96-a48f-6cf0bcf66a45.mp3?t=1705920481000" length="1011840" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Creating a ‘Start Here’ page is a great way of gently introducing folks to your content. You might combine elements from your ‘About’ page and full episode list. Or, you might decide to scrap the other two completely, so there’s less confusion. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>301</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>301</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">d3c619ef-3832-4449-b1e7-0b3ea804da68</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Website Sharing Buttons]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Website Sharing Buttons]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about adding social sharing buttons to your website. If you&rsquo;re using a WordPress website, then it&rsquo;s worth installing a social media sharing plugin. There are plenty of good ones out there, and you can browse through them all in your &lsquo;Add New Plugins&rsquo; section. When you&rsquo;ve installed and activated one of these plugins, you&rsquo;ll see a wee row of social media icons at the bottom of each post and page, and they&rsquo;ll make it easy for anyone to share your episodes to places like Twitter and Facebook with one single click. It&rsquo;s worth mentioning, too, that if you&rsquo;re using a Podpage website, these buttons will appear on your posts automatically. Whatever route you go down, though, the main thing is that you&rsquo;re making it easy for your listeners to share your show with others. Over time, this word-of-mouth marketing can have a great impact on your overall podcast growth. For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to http://thepodcasthost.com/websitetips</p>]]></description><pubDate>Fri, 19 Jan 2024 10:48:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:04</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/d3c619ef-3832-4449-b1e7-0b3ea804da68</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/d3c619ef-3832-4449-b1e7-0b3ea804da68.mp3?t=1705661281000" length="1024128" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[If you’re using a WordPress website, then it’s worth installing a social media sharing plugin. There are plenty of good ones out there, and you can browse through them all in your ‘Add New Plugins’ section. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>300</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>300</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">6dcf99b8-48ff-492f-81c3-2e33589cc1ab</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Creating a ‘Contact’ Page]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Creating a ‘Contact’ Page]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about creating a &lsquo;Contact&rsquo; page on your podcast website. Every podcaster likes listener feedback, but almost every podcaster feels they rarely if ever hear from anyone. In a lot of cases, this is simply because they&rsquo;ve not made it easy enough. So instead of reading out your email address, twitter handle, and Facebook page out in your Call to Actions, just send them to yourwebsite dot com slash contact to find every way they can connect with you. You might use a contact form or survey software to better structure and organise your feedback. You could even embed a voice feedback widget from a tool like Telbee or Speakpipe here. This lets you easily collect voice questions and comments that you can use on future episodes, too. For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to http://thepodcasthost.com/websitetips</p>]]></description><pubDate>Thu, 18 Jan 2024 10:48:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:01</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/6dcf99b8-48ff-492f-81c3-2e33589cc1ab</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/6dcf99b8-48ff-492f-81c3-2e33589cc1ab.mp3?t=1705574881000" length="979072" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Every podcaster likes listener feedback, but almost every podcaster feels they rarely if ever hear from anyone. In a lot of cases, this is simply because they’ve not made it easy enough.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>299</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>299</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">14b1e460-14ea-467c-a4ce-acf2c6a4d0c6</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Creating a List of Podcast Episodes]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Creating a List of Podcast Episodes]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about creating a list of podcast episodes on your website. Some podcasters like to offer a full list of every episode they&rsquo;ve published to-date. Others prefer to curate a &lsquo;Best Of&rsquo; list that can help pull in new listeners. You can do this manually by embedding episode players on a page. Or, your hosting provider might have a feature where you can create this in your podcast player itself. Captivate, for example. You might even choose to create themed pages; for example, here are our listener Q&amp;A episodes, here are our how-to episodes, and here are our quick tip episodes. Ultimately, you want to turn casual listeners on these pages into subscribers, too. So remember to link to your dedicated &lsquo;Subscribe&rsquo; page as much as possible, here. For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to http://thepodcasthost.com/websitetips</p>]]></description><pubDate>Wed, 17 Jan 2024 10:47:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:05</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/14b1e460-14ea-467c-a4ce-acf2c6a4d0c6</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/14b1e460-14ea-467c-a4ce-acf2c6a4d0c6.mp3?t=1705488421000" length="1036416" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Some podcasters like to offer a full list of every episode they’ve published to-date. Others prefer to curate a ‘Best Of’ list that can help pull in new listeners.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>298</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>298</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">c553c988-5daa-4f32-815f-c0287aac5581</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Creating a ‘Subscribe’ Page]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Creating a ‘Subscribe’ Page]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about creating a &lsquo;Subscribe&rsquo; page on your podcast website. As we&rsquo;ve mentioned many times before, your podcast might be consumed in over 100 different places. So sending your listeners to yourwebsite dot com slash subscribe is better than trying to list them all in your Call to Action. First and foremost, a subscribe page could simply say &ldquo;find us wherever you get your podcasts&rdquo;. It doesn&rsquo;t hurt to provide links to some of the bigger platforms, too. Platforms like Apple, Spotify, and Google Podcasts. If your target audience falls into the &ldquo;non-techy&rdquo; bracket, you might also want to go into some detail about what podcasts are, how they work, and how to subscribe to them. Some podcasters even create wee &lsquo;how to subscribe&rsquo; tutorial videos for the bigger listening platforms, too. Subscribers are the lifeblood of your show, so make this as clear and as easy as possible for them, and you&rsquo;re sure to reap the benefits in the long run. For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to http://thepodcasthost.com/sharing</p>]]></description><pubDate>Tue, 16 Jan 2024 06:38:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:13</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/c553c988-5daa-4f32-815f-c0287aac5581</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/c553c988-5daa-4f32-815f-c0287aac5581.mp3?t=1705387081000" length="1171584" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[As we’ve mentioned many times before, your podcast might be consumed in over 100 different places. So sending your listeners to yourwebsite dot com slash subscribe is better than trying to list them all in your Call to Action.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>297</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>297</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">f5ece38b-6a9e-43d4-9a4d-42db939978fb</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Creating an ‘About’ Page]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Creating an ‘About’ Page]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about creating an &lsquo;About&rsquo; page on your podcast website. The &lsquo;About&rsquo; page is traditionally the most viewed page of any website, so it&rsquo;s a good idea to take advantage of this. It should never be done as an afterthought. At first glance, you&rsquo;d think this would be all about you and your podcast. But the trick here is that it&rsquo;s actually all about your listener. This is where you can pose questions or problems that they&rsquo;re struggling with - and that you&rsquo;re uniquely set up to solve. On top of listening the benefits of what they&rsquo;ll get from listening to your podcast, you might also want to create a playlist of your most popular episodes to get them started. Of course, you will want to add a wee bit in about you, too. Credibility and personality are important. They&rsquo;re just not the things you&rsquo;d want to lead with. Again, make it about your listener first, and that&rsquo;s the best way to win them over. For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to http://thepodcasthost.com/websitetips</p>]]></description><pubDate>Mon, 15 Jan 2024 06:37:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:08</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/f5ece38b-6a9e-43d4-9a4d-42db939978fb</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/f5ece38b-6a9e-43d4-9a4d-42db939978fb.mp3?t=1705300621000" length="1091712" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[The ‘About’ page is traditionally the most viewed page of any website, so it’s a good idea to take advantage of this. It should never be done as an afterthought.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>296</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>296</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">78ae23d4-66c5-4ac9-9c89-a49c9e26930d</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Podcast Episode Show Notes]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Podcast Episode Show Notes]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about podcast episode show notes. Show notes are basically the blog posts that accompany your podcast episodes. Many podcasters find this stage of podcasting a bit of a chore, but there are benefits to spending a bit of time and effort on your show notes. They can help attract new listeners through search traffic, offer a handy summary of what&rsquo;s covered, and provide links and resources to anything mentioned in the episodes. That said, your podcast needs to be sustainable, or you&rsquo;ll stop doing it. So if you only have the time or energy to do a quick bullet-point summary for each episode, then that&rsquo;s absolutely fine too. Some podcasters even outsource their show notes to a professional copy writer. So you can still get all the benefits of detailed show notes without writing them yourself, if you have a bit of budget available. For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to http://thepodcasthost.com/shownotes</p>]]></description><pubDate>Fri, 12 Jan 2024 05:37:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:03</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/78ae23d4-66c5-4ac9-9c89-a49c9e26930d</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/78ae23d4-66c5-4ac9-9c89-a49c9e26930d.mp3?t=1705037821000" length="1011840" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Show notes are basically the blog posts that accompany your podcast episodes.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>295</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>295</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">eb8af667-5c06-48db-9919-3a375097e9ff</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Podcast Episode Pages]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Podcast Episode Pages]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about podcast episode pages. It&rsquo;s good practice to create a page or blog post for each podcast episode you release. This gives you one handy place to share each episode, and it means all of the traffic is coming to your own platform, too. Here, the title of your episode would also be the title of your page or post. You&rsquo;d embed the episode player, preferably near the top. Whilst most folks don&rsquo;t listen to full episodes this way, it&rsquo;s good to give them a taster, and point them off to a few dedicated podcast listening platforms in the process. You&rsquo;d also add in your shownotes, containing links to anything mentioned in that episode. And you can add some episode-specific graphics or images to these pages, too. For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to http://thepodcasthost.com/websitetips</p>]]></description><pubDate>Thu, 11 Jan 2024 06:36:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:01</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/eb8af667-5c06-48db-9919-3a375097e9ff</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/eb8af667-5c06-48db-9919-3a375097e9ff.mp3?t=1704954961000" length="983168" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[It’s good practice to create a page or blog post for each podcast episode you release. This gives you one handy place to share each episode, and it means all of the traffic is coming to your own platform, too. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>294</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>294</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">7bfc1243-a1d3-4db7-93dd-f8c521864ec2</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Podcast Website Domain Names]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Podcast Website Domain Names]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about domain names for podcast websites. Whether you&rsquo;re using a default hosting provider website, a Podpage site, or a self-hosted WordPress site, you can buy and use a domain name. Domain names are, most famously, dot coms. But you can buy local variations, dot nets, or dot pretty much anything else these days. Whatever you opt for, just try to make it memorable, easy to read out, and most of all, easy to type in. Avoid things like hyphens in your domain name, too. If you&rsquo;ve got your heart set on one that is going to be tricky to punch in, then you might want to buy a few variations of it and point those to your site, too. An example of this might be a domain name with a number in it. You&rsquo;d buy one version with the number, and another version with the number spelled out. But do try your best to avoid these situations in the first place. For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to http://thepodcasthost.com/websites</p>]]></description><pubDate>Wed, 10 Jan 2024 06:36:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:08</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/7bfc1243-a1d3-4db7-93dd-f8c521864ec2</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/7bfc1243-a1d3-4db7-93dd-f8c521864ec2.mp3?t=1704868561000" length="1083520" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Whether you’re using a default hosting provider website, a Podpage site, or a self-hosted WordPress site, you can buy and use a domain name. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>293</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>293</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">1447e1c4-845a-46a5-a909-d8609d311755</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Podpage Podcast Websites]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Podpage Podcast Websites]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about Podpage websites. Podpage is a service that can build you a website for your show in less than five minutes. And you don&rsquo;t need to know the slightest thing about web design, either. You can use Podpage for free, but their excellent value paid tiers offer a whole suite of additional tools for SEO, community, and monetisation. To give you a hint of the types of features at your disposal, you can keep track of ratings and reviews, get listener comments and voicemails, build a mailing list, offer memberships, and track analytics. Sure, Podpage is a third-party service so you don&rsquo;t have that 100% control and ownership as you would with a WordPress site. But for most podcasters, the pros far outweigh the cons here. And there&rsquo;s actually very little you can&rsquo;t do with a Podpage site. For a full review of the service, head on over to http://thepodcasthost.com/podpagereview</p>]]></description><pubDate>Tue, 09 Jan 2024 10:53:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:03</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/1447e1c4-845a-46a5-a909-d8609d311755</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/1447e1c4-845a-46a5-a909-d8609d311755.mp3?t=1704797581000" length="1015936" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Podpage is a service that can build you a website for your show in less than five minutes. And you don’t need to know the slightest thing about web design, either. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>292</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>292</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">7cb170ac-d09f-48f8-8b9c-5fa3cf824a83</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[WordPress Podcast Websites]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[WordPress Podcast Websites]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about WordPress websites. If you&rsquo;re looking for 100% full control, ownership, and customisation options, then WordPress is for you. Here, you can use all sorts of plugins and tools to make your site do pretty much anything. You can run your entire business on there. However, all of this flexibility comes at a cost. There are always things that can break or go wrong. If you don&rsquo;t have the expertise to run a site like this, then you&rsquo;ll need to hire someone who does. There&rsquo;s nothing worse than waking up in the morning to see that your site has gone down overnight. So, is there a middle ground between a fully-fledged WordPress site and the default website given to you as part of your podcasting hosting account? Yes there is. And that&rsquo;s what we&rsquo;re going to cover on the next episode of Pocket-Sized Podcasting. For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to http://thepodcasthost.com/websites</p>]]></description><pubDate>Mon, 08 Jan 2024 10:53:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:02</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/7cb170ac-d09f-48f8-8b9c-5fa3cf824a83</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/7cb170ac-d09f-48f8-8b9c-5fa3cf824a83.mp3?t=1704711181000" length="991360" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[If you’re looking for 100% full control, ownership, and customisation options, then WordPress is for you. Here, you can use all sorts of plugins and tools to make your site do pretty much anything. You can run your entire business on there. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>291</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>291</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">d7f4ff06-4e0f-4685-b969-0705a496277f</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Do I Need a Podcast Website?]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Do I Need a Podcast Website?]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re asking the question &ldquo;Do I need a podcast website?&rdquo; The short answer here is &ldquo;no&rdquo;. You don&rsquo;t *need* a website for your podcast. But, the benefits of having one are almost too good to ignore. For starters, just having that one central place to send people means your podcast is a lot more shareable. We already know that podcast listening happens in hundreds of different places, so it simplifies things when you can just say &ldquo;find us on my podcast dot com&rdquo;, or whatever the url happens to be. Running your own website then means you have full control over your branding, and if you plan to sell products or services in the future too, then this is going to give you a massive head start. Your hosting provider does create a basic website for you by default. Some of these are actually pretty decent, and getting better all the time. However, there are a couple of options that can help you take it to the next level, and we&rsquo;re going to cover them on the next two episodes of Pocket-Sized Podcasting!</p>]]></description><pubDate>Fri, 05 Jan 2024 10:53:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:07</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/d7f4ff06-4e0f-4685-b969-0705a496277f</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/d7f4ff06-4e0f-4685-b969-0705a496277f.mp3?t=1704451981000" length="1071232" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[The short answer here is “no”. You don’t *need* a website for your podcast. But, the benefits of having one are almost too good to ignore. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>290</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>290</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">b5b5fb27-85e1-46b5-b267-4e65c72b3567</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[What Is Bit Depth?]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[What Is Bit Depth?]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about bit depth. So each audio sample &ndash; those little dots in your waveform &ndash; has a &lsquo;bit depth&rsquo;, which determines the quality of the sound. Some tools will ask you to select a bit depth prior to recording. The most common bit depths are 16, 24, and 32. As is often the case, the higher the number, the higher the quality. Higher bit depths are better at handling noise with substantial differences between its quietest and loudest parts. But this is much more relevant to musicians than it is to those of us recording the spoken word. So if you&rsquo;re asked, just opt for 16, and set your levels so nobody is at risk of peaking or clipping. Bit depth is yet another thing Alitu handles behind the scenes, too. At this rate it&rsquo;s going to be making you a cup of coffee and a sandwich, eh? Get a free trial at alitu.com - sandwiches not included. Yet.</p>]]></description><pubDate>Thu, 04 Jan 2024 10:53:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:05</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/b5b5fb27-85e1-46b5-b267-4e65c72b3567</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/b5b5fb27-85e1-46b5-b267-4e65c72b3567.mp3?t=1704365581000" length="1040512" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Some tools will ask you to select a bit depth prior to recording. The most common bit depths are 16, 24, and 32.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>289</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>289</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">80d2e377-39db-46d2-89ae-943e0a88e1a7</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[What Are Hz and Sample Rates?]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[What Are Hz and Sample Rates?]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about sample rates. Sample rates are measured in hertz, or &ldquo;Hz&rdquo;. Like bitrates, sample rates in audio determine audio quality and file size. You could compare them to pixels in a photograph. Some platforms and tools will ask you to set a sample rate prior to hitting record. The most common sample rate, and one we&rsquo;d recommend, is 44,100Hz. If you were to load up your audio in your DAW and zoom right in as far as you can, you&rsquo;d see your audio represented as little dots. The more dots per second, the higher the sample rate. Again, these are just like pixels. So next time you record in your DAW, choose 44,100Hz. Or, just use Alitu and yet again, you won&rsquo;t need to worry about this at all. For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to http://thepodcasthost.com/samplerates</p>]]></description><pubDate>Wed, 03 Jan 2024 10:52:56 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:05</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/80d2e377-39db-46d2-89ae-943e0a88e1a7</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/80d2e377-39db-46d2-89ae-943e0a88e1a7.mp3?t=1704279177000" length="1048704" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Like bitrates, sample rates in audio determine audio quality and file size. You could compare them to pixels in a photograph.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>288</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>288</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">a72346af-8b4a-4ed0-87d9-19abfb253ba5</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[What Are Bitrates in MP3s?]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[What Are Bitrates in MP3s?]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about bitrates. Bitrates represent a sliding scale of quality and size when it comes to the MP3 file format. They&rsquo;re measured in kbps, or, kilobits per second. Common bitrates for music files are 128 and 192kbps. As most podcasts are purely spoken-word content, we probably don&rsquo;t need to go this high, though. With our own shows, we tend to opt for 96kbps, but some go as low as 64kbps - most famously, Marc Maron. And he does alright, eh? If setting your bitrates manually, you&rsquo;ll also need to choose between Constant Bitrate and Variable Bitrate. For podcasting, you should always choose &ldquo;constant&rdquo;. These are options you&rsquo;ll find in any DAW when you&rsquo;re exporting your episode to MP3 form. And, surprise surprise, your pal Alitu just gets on with it and does it all for you. For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to http://thepodcasthost.com/bitrates</p>]]></description><pubDate>Tue, 26 Dec 2023 05:57:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:13</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/a72346af-8b4a-4ed0-87d9-19abfb253ba5</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/a72346af-8b4a-4ed0-87d9-19abfb253ba5.mp3?t=1703570221000" length="1169536" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Bitrates represent a sliding scale of quality and size when it comes to the MP3 file format. They’re measured in kbps, or, kilobits per second. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>287</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>287</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">9f36e1fd-0c5e-42ec-9c8f-c9bae16219a4</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[What’s the Difference Between a WAV and an MP3?]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[What’s the Difference Between a WAV and an MP3?]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about the difference between WAV and MP3 files. The major difference between WAVs and MP3s are size and quality. WAV files contain more detail, but are also much bigger. Think of a WAV file as an original painting, and MP3 files as prints of that painting. Podcast episodes are almost always released in MP3 form because it has a good file size to quality ratio. MP3s have their own size and quality scale too. They&rsquo;re called bitrates, and we&rsquo;re going to talk about them on the next episode. WAVs are known as a &ldquo;lossless&rdquo; format because they contain the full detail of the original recording. But only a handful of people in the world could listen to spoken-word content both in its WAV form, and on a good MP3 version of it, and be able to tell the difference. MP3s keep storage and costs down for you and your listeners. And you won&rsquo;t be shocked to learn that Alitu exports your episodes in MP3 form for you, automatically. Remember, as ever, you get a free trial at http://alitu.com</p>]]></description><pubDate>Mon, 25 Dec 2023 05:56:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:12</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/9f36e1fd-0c5e-42ec-9c8f-c9bae16219a4</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/9f36e1fd-0c5e-42ec-9c8f-c9bae16219a4.mp3?t=1703483761000" length="1161344" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[The major difference between WAVs and MP3s are size and quality. WAV files contain more detail, but are also much bigger. Think of a WAV file as an original painting, and MP3 files as prints of that painting. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>286</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>286</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">53922f86-bbbd-4cfc-a6a2-0e5918752b44</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[How Loud Should a Podcast Be?]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[How Loud Should a Podcast Be?]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re asking the question &ldquo;how loud should a podcast be?&rdquo; We&rsquo;ve talked about having consistent volume levels throughout your episodes. But what about the overall volume level of your show compared to other podcasts? Audio loudness is measured in something called &ldquo;LUFS&rdquo;, which means &ldquo;Loudness Units relative to Full Scale&rdquo;. Sound exciting, eh? Recommended podcast loudness varies, depending on who you ask, and whether your episode is mono or stereo. But a good ballpark to aim for is between -16 and -21 LUFS. You can set this process up in a DAW like Adobe Audition. Or, it&rsquo;s yet another factor that Alitu takes care of for you automatically, without you having to know anything about it. However you go about it though, your listeners will be grateful when they land on your episode after listening to another show. For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to http://thepodcasthost.com/loudness</p>]]></description><pubDate>Fri, 22 Dec 2023 05:56:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:10</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/53922f86-bbbd-4cfc-a6a2-0e5918752b44</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/53922f86-bbbd-4cfc-a6a2-0e5918752b44.mp3?t=1703224561000" length="1126528" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[We’ve talked about having consistent volume levels throughout your episodes. But what about the overall volume level of your show compared to other podcasts? ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>285</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>285</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">ffc6962f-1519-43d2-8385-980ceccc843f</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[What Is Compression?]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[What Is Compression?]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re asking the question &ldquo;what is compression?&rdquo;. No, this isn&rsquo;t about blowing your car tyres up. Compression is an audio production technique where you take the loudest bits and quietest bits of a conversation, and bring them all closer together. It&rsquo;s all about achieving volume-level consistency. Compression allows you to have loud laughter and soft whispering in your episode, and, if done well, your listener won&rsquo;t even need to adjust the volume dial. Just like noise reduction, compression needs a subtle touch, though, and it&rsquo;s easy to go overboard. We can teach you how to do it, free with Audacity, at http://thepodcasthost.com/audacitycompressor Or, once again, you can simply have Alitu do it all for you automatically without needing to know the slightest thing about how it works. Head on over to http://alitu.com to start your 7-day free trial.</p>]]></description><pubDate>Thu, 21 Dec 2023 05:56:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:04</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/ffc6962f-1519-43d2-8385-980ceccc843f</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/ffc6962f-1519-43d2-8385-980ceccc843f.mp3?t=1703138161000" length="1022080" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[No, this isn’t about blowing your car tyres up. Compression is an audio production technique where you take the loudest bits and quietest bits of a conversation, and bring them all closer together. It’s all about achieving volume-level consistency. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>284</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>284</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">974a3218-5319-439f-a67b-8a30478a7077</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Noise Reduction & Audio Clean Up]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Noise Reduction & Audio Clean Up]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about noise reduction and cleanup. Some types of background noise can be cleaned up in the post-production phase. The constant hiss of a fan, or the low static hum of a microphone, for example. Audio software has the ability to recognise this and strip it out, whilst leaving the vocals intact. Of course, it&rsquo;s easy to go overboard with this and ruin the vocals themselves. Working with noise reduction is a bit like walking a tightrope. Or, using magic in a high fantasy novel. We can teach you how to do it, free with Audacity, at http://thepodcasthost.com/audacitynoise On, if you&rsquo;re using Alitu, it&rsquo;s all done for you automatically, so you don&rsquo;t need to know a single thing about it. One final note on background noise - the environmental stuff like phones ringing and dogs barking aren&rsquo;t going to be removed by standard noise reduction processes. So always make sure you&rsquo;re recording the best possible source material. Noise reduction can help good audio to sound great, but it can never make terrible audio sound good. For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to http://thepodcasthost.com/noise</p>]]></description><pubDate>Wed, 20 Dec 2023 05:30:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:18</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/974a3218-5319-439f-a67b-8a30478a7077</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/974a3218-5319-439f-a67b-8a30478a7077.mp3?t=1703050201000" length="1251456" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Some types of background noise can be cleaned up in the post-production phase. The constant hiss of a fan, or the low static hum of a microphone, for example. Audio software has the ability to recognise this and strip it out, whilst leaving the vocals intact. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>283</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>283</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">342fdf7d-d514-47eb-93f9-84e9d8068cf8</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Minimum Effective Podcast Editing]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Minimum Effective Podcast Editing]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about the minimum effective podcast editing approach. Remember we talked about making mistakes during recording? Our tip was to pause, click your fingers three times into the mic, then start again. Well, now you have a quick and easy way to spot anything that needs chopping out. Aside from that, you&rsquo;ll want to &ldquo;top and tail&rdquo; your recording, cutting any preamble at the start and drawn-out goodbyes at the end. Then it&rsquo;s the cleanup and volume levelling stuff which you can either learn to do in a DAW. Or, have Alitu take care of that for you, automatically. Piece together any segments, music, or other clips in your editing software or Alitu&rsquo;s episode builder, and you&rsquo;ll be ready to export and publish. Podcast editing doesn&rsquo;t need to be a slog, especially with the right planning, processes, and tools at your disposal. For a deeper dive on our minimum effective editing approach, head on over to http://thepodcasthost.com/mee</p>]]></description><pubDate>Tue, 19 Dec 2023 05:18:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:09</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/342fdf7d-d514-47eb-93f9-84e9d8068cf8</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/342fdf7d-d514-47eb-93f9-84e9d8068cf8.mp3?t=1702963081000" length="1112192" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Remember we talked about making mistakes during recording? Our tip was to pause, click your fingers three times into the mic, then start again. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>282</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>282</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">bf3b670d-99d6-4f34-96ec-f657f2b7101b</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[How Much Editing Should I Do?]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[How Much Editing Should I Do?]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re asking the question &ldquo;how much editing should I do?&rdquo;. As is often the case in podcasting, the answer is &ldquo;it depends&rdquo;. As we&rsquo;ve covered before, there are loads of different types of podcast. So a one-minute scripted solo show is going to need a lot less editing than a two-hour documentary-style epic. Unless you enjoy editing - and most podcasters don&rsquo;t - then you just need to do enough to make your show sound good. And then, leave it at that. Two big keys to podcasting success are consistency and sustainability. So if you find yourself spending a tonne of time bogged down in your editing software, chances are, you&rsquo;re not going to enjoy it. It won&rsquo;t be long before you convince yourself there are better things to be doing. So, how do you strike that balance between &ldquo;enough&rdquo; and &ldquo;not too much&rdquo;? On the next episode of Pocket-Sized Podcasting we&rsquo;re going to show you our Minimum Effective Editing approach, so make sure you&rsquo;re subscribed or following us on your listening app of choice.</p>]]></description><pubDate>Mon, 18 Dec 2023 05:18:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:09</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/bf3b670d-99d6-4f34-96ec-f657f2b7101b</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/bf3b670d-99d6-4f34-96ec-f657f2b7101b.mp3?t=1702876681000" length="1112192" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[As is often the case in podcasting, the answer is “it depends”. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>281</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>281</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">273b0ce1-1e17-461c-882e-f016a18a851f</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Editing & Producing Your Podcast]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Editing & Producing Your Podcast]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about editing and producing your podcast. This is the phase of podcasting where you chop out all your mistakes and cut the fat from your conversations. You can also clean up your audio to remove any background hiss and level it to make everything consistently loud enough. Then, you can mix in things like music, transitions, and pre-recorded segments. Naturally, this is the part of podcasting that puts tonnes of people off. Very few folks have ever used audio editing software, which is often complex and designed predominantly for musicians. But remember, this is exactly why we built Alitu. Its episode builder and editing tools are simpler than your average social media app. And as for all that cleanup and loudness stuff? That all happens automatically, so you don&rsquo;t even need to know a thing about it. Why not see for yourself, and grab a 7-day free trial? You can do just that at alitu.com</p>]]></description><pubDate>Fri, 15 Dec 2023 05:18:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:08</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/273b0ce1-1e17-461c-882e-f016a18a851f</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/273b0ce1-1e17-461c-882e-f016a18a851f.mp3?t=1702617481000" length="1087616" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[This is the phase of podcasting where you chop out all your mistakes and cut the fat from your conversations. You can also clean up your audio to remove any background hiss and level it to make everything consistently loud enough.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>280</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>280</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">8f970db6-7bdd-4975-8939-5ef1745ca1fa</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Where to Buy Podcast Music]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Where to Buy Podcast Music]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about where to buy podcast music. You *can* buy song licenses outright. But the most common route is to pay a monthly subscription for a service where you can use anything on there for the duration of that subscription. These libraries usually include sound effects, too. Many services grant you a lifetime license here, so you don&rsquo;t need to go back and remove music from previous episodes after you&rsquo;ve cancelled your subscription, and there are rarely download limits, either. Obviously, you should always check the Ts and Cs of any platform you decide to use, though. Two of our favourite places to buy podcast music are Epidemic and Shutterstock. If you head on over to http://ThePodcastHost.com/music we regularly have coupon code deals for them, too. Music Radio Creative are another great service that can produce voice-branded intros and outros for your show. And you&rsquo;ll also find a link to them over at http://ThePodcastHost.com/music</p>]]></description><pubDate>Thu, 14 Dec 2023 05:18:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:13</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/8f970db6-7bdd-4975-8939-5ef1745ca1fa</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/8f970db6-7bdd-4975-8939-5ef1745ca1fa.mp3?t=1702531081000" length="1171584" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[You can buy song licenses outright. But the most common route is to pay a monthly subscription for a service where you can use anything on there for the duration of that subscription. These libraries usually include sound effects, too. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>279</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>279</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">dfdee3ee-2b69-4d52-a17a-811160b1b122</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Where to Find Free Podcast Music]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Where to Find Free Podcast Music]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about finding free podcast music. There&rsquo;s no shortage of tracks out there that you can use 100% free of charge, so long as you credit and link back to the creator in your show notes. We run a free podcast music library ourselves, and you&rsquo;re totally welcome to pick something from there. Head on over to http://ThePodcastHost.com/freemusic for a look. http://Incompetech.com is probably the most famous creative commons music resource on the web, too. There&rsquo;s tonnes of top-quality stuff over there. The big downside of free music is that a lot of other podcasters are using it. And it can be hard to build a memorable brand if your theme tune pops up again and again on countless other shows. If that&rsquo;s is a concern for you, then we&rsquo;ll cover paid options in our next episode. For our free music library though, that link once again is http://ThePodcastHost.com/freemusic</p>]]></description><pubDate>Wed, 13 Dec 2023 05:18:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:06</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/dfdee3ee-2b69-4d52-a17a-811160b1b122</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/dfdee3ee-2b69-4d52-a17a-811160b1b122.mp3?t=1702444681000" length="1063040" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[There’s no shortage of tracks out there that you can use 100% free of charge, so long as you credit and link back to the creator in your show notes. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>278</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>278</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">ec9c681f-6315-42d3-8acc-1f3e50bb7c53</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[So, What Music CAN I Use in My Podcast?]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[So, What Music CAN I Use in My Podcast?]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re asking the question &ldquo;so, what music CAN I use in my podcast?&rdquo;. Whilst Harry Styles&rsquo; latest track is strictly off-limits there are plenty of music options that are safe, legal, and - in some cases - free to use on your podcast. Two terms you&rsquo;ll often come across are &ldquo;Creative Commons&rdquo; and &ldquo;Royalty-Free&rdquo;. Creative Commons usually means you can use music for free, so long as you credit and link back to the creator. Royalty-Free, on the other hand, usually means that you&rsquo;ve paid up-front for a license to use a piece of music, going forward. There are variations on Creative Commons and Royalty-Free licenses - for example, commercial and non-commercial - so our definitions shouldn&rsquo;t be taken as blanket terms. On the next couple of episodes we&rsquo;ll point you towards some resources for actually finding music for your show. In the meantime, though, be sure to check out our full guide at http://ThePodcastHost.com/music</p>]]></description><pubDate>Tue, 12 Dec 2023 05:15:01 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:07</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/ec9c681f-6315-42d3-8acc-1f3e50bb7c53</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/ec9c681f-6315-42d3-8acc-1f3e50bb7c53.mp3?t=1702358102000" length="1069184" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Whilst Harry Styles’ latest track is strictly off-limits there are plenty of music options that are safe, legal, and - in some cases - free to use on your podcast. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>277</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>277</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">c62005d4-98af-4ae2-a7c9-740572ff3f0a</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Can I Use ANY Music in My Podcast?]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Can I Use ANY Music in My Podcast?]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re asking the question &ldquo;can I use ANY music in my podcast?&rdquo; The short answer here is &ldquo;no&rdquo;. And any music you hear on the radio or on your favourite Spotify playlist is probably off-limits. Be wary of myths like &ldquo;it&rsquo;s fine if it&rsquo;s less than seven seconds&rdquo; and &ldquo;it&rsquo;s okay so long as you&rsquo;re not making money with your podcast&rdquo;. &ldquo;Fair Use&rdquo; gets quoted a lot, too. Fair use is a defence you can use if you get in trouble. But who wants to get in trouble? In short, avoid this altogether. Your podcast isn&rsquo;t going to live or die based on whether you have Bohemian Rhapsody as your theme tune. And if it does? Well, then we need to get back to the content planning stages, don&rsquo;t we? For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to http://ThePodcastHost.com/Copyright</p>]]></description><pubDate>Mon, 11 Dec 2023 05:15:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:00:56</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/c62005d4-98af-4ae2-a7c9-740572ff3f0a</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/c62005d4-98af-4ae2-a7c9-740572ff3f0a.mp3?t=1702271701000" length="899200" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[The short answer here is “no”. And any music you hear on the radio or on your favourite Spotify playlist is probably off-limits. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>276</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>276</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">6e785382-b7a9-4391-955a-5a2ede931c46</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Do I Need Podcast Music?]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Do I Need Podcast Music?]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re asking the question &ldquo;do I need podcast music?&rdquo; There&rsquo;s no rule to say that your show&nbsp;*must*&nbsp;have music. But many podcasters stick some at the beginning and end of the show to add that extra layer of professionalism and identity. Just be wary of letting music play on its own for any longer than ten seconds on your podcast. Whilst TV and film can get away with this because of their visual elements, it doesn&rsquo;t work that way in audio. Your listeners are plugging in to hear from you - not an extended version of your theme tune. You can also use music as transitions in-between segments, or as &ldquo;beds&rdquo; underneath speech. For most podcasters though, this is overkill, and you run the risk of annoying your listener rather than impressing them. For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to http://ThePodcastHost.com/music</p>]]></description><pubDate>Fri, 08 Dec 2023 05:15:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:06</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/6e785382-b7a9-4391-955a-5a2ede931c46</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/6e785382-b7a9-4391-955a-5a2ede931c46.mp3?t=1702012501000" length="1050752" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[There’s no rule to say that your show must have music. But many podcasters stick some at the beginning and end of the show to add that extra layer of professionalism and identity.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>275</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>275</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">49f1a70b-211e-48ff-8f00-3136a0f5f274</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Encouraging Guests to Share Your Episodes]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Encouraging Guests to Share Your Episodes]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about encouraging guests to share your episodes. Whether we like it or not, no guest is obliged to share your content with their audience. But if you follow the advice in the previous episodes, your chat should be memorable enough to make them want to. The key is to ask nicely, and to make it easy for them. Be sure to succinctly remind them why you think the conversation will be interesting and valuable to *their* audience. Some podcasters even pre-write a tweet so all the groundwork is done for them. If you go the extra mile and create some nice blog and social graphics around the interview, that&rsquo;s going to make it more shareable, too. Oh, and one final tip - why not have some branded podcast swag sent over to them via a service like GuestBoxLove? For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to http://ThePodcastHost.com/GuestSharing</p>]]></description><pubDate>Thu, 07 Dec 2023 05:14:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:18</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/49f1a70b-211e-48ff-8f00-3136a0f5f274</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/49f1a70b-211e-48ff-8f00-3136a0f5f274.mp3?t=1701926041000" length="1245312" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Whether we like it or not, no guest is obliged to share your content with their audience. But if you follow the advice in the previous episodes, your chat should be memorable enough to make them want to. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>274</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>274</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">973989f7-e6d5-4fb0-8665-80b1ab65ac13</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Powerful Podcast Interview Questions]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Powerful Podcast Interview Questions]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about &ldquo;super&rdquo; podcast interview questions. When you cover the basics well, you can go the extra mile to help make your guest stand out from everyone else. Here are some fun questions that can entertain your listener whilst still leaving them with a few useful insights, too. - What are you NOT Very Good at? - Tell me something that&rsquo;s true&nbsp;that almost nobody agrees with you on. - When did you last change your mind about something? - Room, desk and car &ndash; which do you clean first? - What&rsquo;s the very first thing you think about when you wake up in the morning? These questions allow for that essential human touch. They can throw up humility, authenticity, wisdom, and even, a wee bit of controversy. They&rsquo;ll leave a lasting impression in the minds of your listeners, and that&rsquo;s ultimately what gets them sharing your content, and keeps them coming back for more. For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to http://ThePodcastHost.com/questions</p>]]></description><pubDate>Wed, 06 Dec 2023 05:14:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:12</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/973989f7-e6d5-4fb0-8665-80b1ab65ac13</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/973989f7-e6d5-4fb0-8665-80b1ab65ac13.mp3?t=1701839641000" length="1147008" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[When you cover the basics well, you can go the extra mile to help make your guest stand out from everyone else. Here are some fun questions that can entertain your listener whilst still leaving them with a few useful insights, too. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>273</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>273</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">e8e440ea-2c3f-4949-92f0-6325d4ab887b</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Asking Core Questions About the Topic]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Asking Core Questions About the Topic]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about core questions around the conversation topic. Here we can dig in and explore by asking your guest some seemingly provocative questions. They&rsquo;ll usually be glad to answer these as it gives them a chance to counter claims they&rsquo;ll hear a lot. &ldquo;So, you&rsquo;re a Vegan Baking Specialist &ndash; isn&rsquo;t it really hard to bake without eggs?&rdquo; Or &ldquo;Doesn&rsquo;t home schooling just deprive kids of making friends?&rdquo; Here, you can pick out some common myths or misconceptions to talk through and clarify. You might also want to ask a question like &ldquo;what&rsquo;s the most common reason people fail at this?&rdquo; which sounds negative, but can throw up some really actionable answers. Then there&rsquo;s the classic &ldquo;what&rsquo;s the one thing you wish you knew when you were just getting started?&rdquo; which puts a much better spin on the old &ldquo;advice for folks just starting out&rdquo; question. For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to http://ThePodcastHost.com/questions</p>]]></description><pubDate>Tue, 05 Dec 2023 05:09:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:16</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/e8e440ea-2c3f-4949-92f0-6325d4ab887b</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/e8e440ea-2c3f-4949-92f0-6325d4ab887b.mp3?t=1701752941000" length="1224832" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Here we can dig in and explore by asking your guest some seemingly provocative questions. They’ll usually be glad to answer these as it gives them a chance to counter claims they’ll hear a lot. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>272</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>272</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">f5f83a11-8b12-4b92-ba6f-e37310e997fd</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Asking Core Questions About the Guest]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Asking Core Questions About the Guest]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about core questions to ask your guest. This is another wing to your storytelling angle. It lets the listener focus on the guest themselves. People love to hear things in context, after all. &ldquo;Believe in yourself and never give up!&rdquo; is all well and good. But people often can&rsquo;t see that applying to them&hellip; until they hear a story about it happening to someone else. Here are some examples of questions that can lead to engaging and insightful podcast interviews. - Which hurdles did you personally face and how did&nbsp;you overcome them? - Was it obvious or did you stumble upon the answers? - How did you get started? Talk me through it. - What compelled you to become a screenwriter? Again, this gives your listener a peek behind the curtain and shows them that the guest was once in a similar position as they are now. And what could be more encouraging than that? For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to http://ThePodcastHost.com/questions</p>]]></description><pubDate>Mon, 04 Dec 2023 05:08:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:20</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/f5f83a11-8b12-4b92-ba6f-e37310e997fd</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/f5f83a11-8b12-4b92-ba6f-e37310e997fd.mp3?t=1701666481000" length="1280128" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[This is another wing to your storytelling angle. It lets the listener focus on the guest themselves. People love to hear things in context, after all.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>271</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>271</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">a7f3de91-19a5-48f8-92de-30fee1499cc7</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Seek Out Stories in Your Interviews]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Seek Out Stories in Your Interviews]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about seeking out stories in podcast interviews. As we&rsquo;ve mentioned on the show before, stories are the original and best type of shareable content. There&rsquo;s a subtle but powerful difference between &ldquo;here&rsquo;s how to grow a business&rdquo; and &ldquo;here&rsquo;s how *I* grew *my* business&rdquo;. Stories are never just straightforward routes to success either. They&rsquo;re littered with setbacks, conflicts, emotions, and even seemingly &ldquo;all is lost&rdquo; moments. Your listener wants to live through these with you and learn from the experiences, not just the end product. It&rsquo;s worth asking your guest if they have any interesting or entertaining stories before you hit the record button, too. Don&rsquo;t let them actually tell you the story there and then. All you need is a heads up so you can prompt them about it during their interview, then, introduce it naturally. For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to ThePodcastHost.com/interviewprep</p>]]></description><pubDate>Fri, 01 Dec 2023 05:08:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:20</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/a7f3de91-19a5-48f8-92de-30fee1499cc7</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/a7f3de91-19a5-48f8-92de-30fee1499cc7.mp3?t=1701407281000" length="1280128" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[There’s a subtle but powerful difference between “here’s how to grow a business” and “here’s how I grew my business”. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>270</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>270</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">192f2521-88dd-4115-8874-5afc9c8b10c3</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Should I Send Questions in Advance?]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Should I Send Questions in Advance?]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re asking the question &ldquo;should I send questions over to guests in advance?&rdquo; You&rsquo;ll probably have a list of pre-written questions as a framework for your interviews. But as we&rsquo;ve covered already, you won&rsquo;t want to ask these in a linear &lsquo;game show host&rsquo; style. On top of that, sending a guest a list of questions in advance can cause them to overthink and rehearse answers. This doesn&rsquo;t make for a very engaging or authentic conversation. Certain questions *are* worth pre-warning about, though. These are what&rsquo;s known as &ldquo;thinkers&rdquo;. An example might be something like &ldquo;what&rsquo;s your favourite book?&rdquo; or &ldquo;what advice do you have for someone just starting out?&rdquo;. It&rsquo;s unlikely anyone can give genuine answers to questions like these on the spot, so they&rsquo;re definitely worth a heads up in advance. But - these are the exception to the rule. For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to http://ThePodcastHost.com/interviewprep</p>]]></description><pubDate>Thu, 30 Nov 2023 05:08:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:00:46</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/192f2521-88dd-4115-8874-5afc9c8b10c3</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/192f2521-88dd-4115-8874-5afc9c8b10c3.mp3?t=1701320881000" length="739456" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[You’ll probably have a list of pre-written questions as a framework for your interviews. But as we’ve covered already, you won’t want to ask these in a linear ‘game show host’ style. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>269</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>269</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">a60dbb9e-2e8f-43e5-98f4-f780d232d2ab</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Asking Follow-Up Questions]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Asking Follow-Up Questions]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about asking follow-up questions. So your guest just finishes telling you they built a time machine, travelled back 70 million years, and shot a T-Rex. You take a look at your next question and ask &ldquo;so, what&rsquo;s your favourite WordPress plugin?&rdquo;. Interviewers who actually listen to their guests and ask good follow-up questions often find the real gold. Questions like &ldquo;why do you think that?&rdquo; &ldquo;what was that like?&rdquo; Or, &ldquo;could you explain what this means?&rdquo; can lead you to some fantastic content. Sure, have a list of pre-written questions. But use these as a framework or backup if things fall flat. Always pick up on threads that seem interesting or curious. Even if you know the answer, your listener might not. And you&rsquo;re here to bring value to them, not to make them feel dumb, left out, or wanting more. For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to http://ThePodcastHost.com/podcastinterviews</p>]]></description><pubDate>Wed, 29 Nov 2023 05:08:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:00:56</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/a60dbb9e-2e8f-43e5-98f4-f780d232d2ab</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/a60dbb9e-2e8f-43e5-98f4-f780d232d2ab.mp3?t=1701234481000" length="897152" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Interviewers who actually listen to their guests and ask good follow-up questions often find the real gold. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>268</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>268</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">d0e95ae9-4a80-4542-86ea-c6ee800a7a51</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Introducing Podcast Guests]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Introducing Podcast Guests]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about introducing your podcast guests. It&rsquo;s those dreaded words &ldquo;so, tell us a bit about yourself&rdquo; that can lead to you waking up, six hours later, listening to an interviewee ramble on about his toy car collection. This isn&rsquo;t the guest's fault. They&rsquo;ve just been handed the mic and let off the leash with no real direction. They don&rsquo;t know your audience. But you do. And it&rsquo;s your job to succinctly introduce your guest to them with a quick rundown of who they are, and *why they&rsquo;re here.* Remember we talked about the value your guest will bring? Well, let your listener know that as soon as possible. Keep them engaged and tuned in. Sure, there&rsquo;s room to explore personal and off-topic stuff, but that should be done towards the end - after you&rsquo;ve given your listener the content they&rsquo;ve been promised. For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to http://ThePodcastHost.com/podcastinterviews</p>]]></description><pubDate>Tue, 28 Nov 2023 05:03:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:00:55</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/d0e95ae9-4a80-4542-86ea-c6ee800a7a51</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/d0e95ae9-4a80-4542-86ea-c6ee800a7a51.mp3?t=1701147781000" length="891008" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[It’s those dreaded words “so, tell us a bit about yourself” that can lead to you waking up, six hours later, listening to an interviewee ramble on about his toy car collection. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>267</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>267</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">b5348287-4724-4089-8c29-1c7b5f8321f4</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Why Is This Guest on My Show?]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Why Is This Guest on My Show?]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re asking the question &ldquo;why is this guest on my show?&rdquo;. Now that might sound a little rude, but don&rsquo;t worry, this is the question we ask ourselves *before* we even invite someone onto our podcast. In order to answer this question, you need to put yourself in the shoes&hellip; or earbuds&hellip; of your audience. Ask yourself &ldquo;what value can this person bring to my listener?&rdquo;. Will they teach them something? Motivate them? Make them laugh? Your listener&rsquo;s attention is precious, and you&rsquo;re one of the few people they trust with it. So once you know *why* you&rsquo;re bringing a person onto your show, you can prepare properly to make sure they get the maximum value from that time. Everyone wins here - your audience enjoys it, your guest sounds great, and your show has its desired impact which helps it to grow. For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to http://ThePodcastHost.com/podcastinterviews</p>]]></description><pubDate>Mon, 27 Nov 2023 05:04:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:00:55</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/b5348287-4724-4089-8c29-1c7b5f8321f4</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/b5348287-4724-4089-8c29-1c7b5f8321f4.mp3?t=1701061441000" length="886912" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[In order to answer this question, you need to put yourself in the shoes… or earbuds… of your audience. Ask yourself “what value can this person bring to my listener?”. Will they teach them something? Motivate them? Make them laugh? ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>266</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>266</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">7c2dab50-c948-462e-b1c7-b6cb752769df</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Finding Podcast Guests]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Finding Podcast Guests]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about finding podcast guests. If you run an interview podcast, it can be challenging to get folks to come on your show at first. A great starting point is to approach other podcasters in your niche. They already know how it all works, and you know they&rsquo;ll sound great, too. On top of that, if they share the episode with their own audience it&rsquo;s going to send some early traffic your way. Then, there are YouTubers, bloggers, or authors who&rsquo;re typically always up for a chat, too. There are even dedicated services to help you find interviewees. Or even, to get booked as a guest on other shows, too. Check out Podchaser Connect, PodcastGuests.com, or Matchmaker FM for three of our favourites. Or, get our full guide to this topic including links to the sites mentioned here, head on over to http://ThePodcastHost.com/guests</p>]]></description><pubDate>Fri, 24 Nov 2023 05:03:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:00:59</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/7c2dab50-c948-462e-b1c7-b6cb752769df</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/7c2dab50-c948-462e-b1c7-b6cb752769df.mp3?t=1700802181000" length="946304" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[If you run an interview podcast, it can be challenging to get folks to come on your show at first. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>265</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>265</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">2032586e-cc6c-40d0-bd80-0b6b098d26be</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Organising Guests or Co-Hosts]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Organising Guests or Co-Hosts]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about organising guests or co-hosts. If you think tech and equipment can be challenging, then you should try wrangling humans. Your guests or co-hosts could live in any time zones around the globe. They might be super-organised, but they might also be pretty shambolic, easily distracted, and forgetful. Then, there&rsquo;s the conversations themselves. How do you make people sound their best on your show? Even if they&rsquo;re giving you little more than one-word answers. OR, aren&rsquo;t letting you get a word in edgeways? On the next few episodes we&rsquo;re going to give you some essential tips on organising and talking to your guests and co-hosts, so make sure you&rsquo;re subscribed to Pocket-Sized Podcasting on your listening app of choice. You won&rsquo;t want to miss this. Finally, we always love to hear your feedback on the show. What do you like about it? And what might we do to make it even better? Be sure to let us know, quickly and easily, over at http://ThePodcastHost.com/PSP</p>]]></description><pubDate>Thu, 23 Nov 2023 05:02:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:04</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/2032586e-cc6c-40d0-bd80-0b6b098d26be</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/2032586e-cc6c-40d0-bd80-0b6b098d26be.mp3?t=1700715721000" length="1022080" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[If you think tech and equipment can be challenging, then you should try wrangling humans. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>264</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>264</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">bdd601f8-3fc3-4998-8789-c41c1002551d</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Booking Tools for Guests or Co-Hosts]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Booking Tools for Guests or Co-Hosts]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about booking tools for organising guests or co-hosts. Different time zones and scheduling conflicts can drop you into an endless cycle of messages where days and times are suggested but never agreed upon. If you&rsquo;re regularly trying to arrange suitable dates and times with others, it&rsquo;s well worth using a tool like Calendly or Book Like a Boss. These platforms can show folks all the times you&rsquo;re available, and they simply need to pick a slot that suits them. Another great tool is Doodle which comes in handy for organising groups of three or more. A Doodle poll lets people pick all their available times, and then you&rsquo;ll see - at a glance - the ones that everyone can manage. Again, those three tools are Doodle, Calendly, and Book Like a Boss. For a deeper dive on this topic, and for links to the platforms mentioned, head on over to ThePodcastHost.com/booking</p>]]></description><pubDate>Wed, 22 Nov 2023 05:02:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:00:55</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/bdd601f8-3fc3-4998-8789-c41c1002551d</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/bdd601f8-3fc3-4998-8789-c41c1002551d.mp3?t=1700629321000" length="880768" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[If you’re regularly trying to arrange suitable dates and times with others, it’s well worth using a tool like Calendly or Book Like a Boss. These platforms can show folks all the times you’re available, and they simply need to pick a slot that suits them. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>263</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>263</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">785ff386-ac01-44da-8284-37d2508a7620</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[What if I Make a Mistake When Recording?]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[What if I Make a Mistake When Recording?]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about making mistakes during recording. Stumbles and stammers are natural. But, if you always stop and start again, thinking &ldquo;I&rsquo;ll just edit that out&rdquo;, then your podcast is going to become time-consuming or expensive to create. With minor mistakes, just quickly correct yourself, make light of it, and press on. Of course, there are times when you&rsquo;ll want to get something spot on. Maybe you&rsquo;re presenting a fact, or making a very serious point. When you make a mistake here, just pause, click your fingers three times in front of the mic, then start again. If you do this, you&rsquo;ll quickly and easily spot essential edit points in the production phase. And as for the minor stuff, just let it go. You&rsquo;ll grow into a much more accomplished presenter over time this way, as opposed to the folks who use editing as a crutch in an attempt to make them sound flawless. For a deeper dive on this topic, head over to https://www.thepodcasthost.com/editfaster</p>]]></description><pubDate>Tue, 21 Nov 2023 05:56:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:06</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/785ff386-ac01-44da-8284-37d2508a7620</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/785ff386-ac01-44da-8284-37d2508a7620.mp3?t=1700546161000" length="1063040" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Stumbles and stammers are natural. But, if you always stop and start again, thinking “I’ll just edit that out”, then your podcast is going to become time-consuming or expensive to create. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>262</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>262</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">15e66fa8-514d-458a-af72-5afd7bb4e816</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Mic Technique]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Mic Technique]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about how it&rsquo;s not the size or the shape that matters, but how you use it. We&rsquo;re talking, of course, about mic technique. The optimal positioning of a mic depends on your own unique voice and style. A good starting point, though, is the distance between the tips of your thumb and pinkie on an outstretched hand. Then, adjust accordingly. Always try to mount your mic in a stand or boom arm, rather than holding it. This will give you a lot more consistency of sound, and prevent unwanted handling noise. Finally, use a windshield or pop filter on your mic, especially if you prefer to get right up close to it when talking. Using your mic well in a treated environment means you&rsquo;ll get good audio even with the most low-cost setup. So follow these quick steps and your podcast will sound much more professional. For a deeper dive on this topic, head over to http://thepodcasthost.com/mictechnique</p>]]></description><pubDate>Mon, 20 Nov 2023 05:54:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:04</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/15e66fa8-514d-458a-af72-5afd7bb4e816</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/15e66fa8-514d-458a-af72-5afd7bb4e816.mp3?t=1700459641000" length="1028224" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[We’re talking about how it’s not the size or the shape that matters, but how you use it. 

We’re talking, of course, about mic technique.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>261</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>261</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">3a463c52-f491-49a7-bd1f-c13a8410d649</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Minimising Recording Interruptions]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Minimising Recording Interruptions]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about minimising interruptions to your recording session. These are the low-hanging fruits of making your podcast easier to edit, sound better, and generally cause you less frustration. To deal with the digital side of things, you should close any apps that are going to ping or distract you when you&rsquo;re recording. I&rsquo;m looking at you, Slack. Then, it&rsquo;s worth telling anyone you live with that you&rsquo;re going to be recording for the next hour or so. An extreme measure might be a &ldquo;do not disturb&rdquo; sign on your door, but most people will only need a quick heads up. Finally, get that phone on silent and keep it away from you during the show. These are three quick and simple tips, but they really can make a world of difference. For a deeper dive on this topic, head over to http://thepodcasthost.com/noise</p>]]></description><pubDate>Fri, 17 Nov 2023 05:54:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:00:55</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/3a463c52-f491-49a7-bd1f-c13a8410d649</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/3a463c52-f491-49a7-bd1f-c13a8410d649.mp3?t=1700200441000" length="876672" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[These are the low-hanging fruits of making your podcast easier to edit, sound better, and generally cause you less frustration.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>260</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>260</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">0e225ace-c5f5-479b-96e2-d5d4d30fa85c</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Should I Eat Before Recording?]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Should I Eat Before Recording?]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about what you should eat before a recording session. It&rsquo;s worth saying right away, that, unless you run an ASMR podcast, you probably want to avoid eating *during* a recording session. Some podcasters feel they have more energy if they&rsquo;re in a bit of a fasted state when they get behind the mic. Others will snack beforehand on foods that aren&rsquo;t likely to dry out their mouth or cause brain fog. Many voice coaches swear by green apples for hydrating the mouth. Some other podcasters we know use liquorice to soothe their throats. Nuts and seeds also make for useful pre-recording snacks, whilst common things to avoid are dairy, overly-salty foods, and refined sugars. But, you should always get to know your own body and your own reaction to foods. Everyone&rsquo;s different, after all. So only ever do what works best for you. And, for a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to http://ThePodcastHost.com/food</p>]]></description><pubDate>Thu, 16 Nov 2023 05:53:01 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:09</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/0e225ace-c5f5-479b-96e2-d5d4d30fa85c</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/0e225ace-c5f5-479b-96e2-d5d4d30fa85c.mp3?t=1700113982000" length="1104000" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[It’s worth saying right away, that, unless you run an ASMR podcast, you probably want to avoid eating during a recording session. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>259</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>259</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">e818235a-bf07-4152-ad9d-63cbe43927f2</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[What Should I Drink Before or During Recording?]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[What Should I Drink Before or During Recording?]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about what you should drink before or during recording. Getting behind the mic whilst dehydrated is a bad idea for a couple of reasons. Firstly, you&rsquo;re just going to have less energy and feel a bit groggy. Secondly, you&rsquo;re going to make more dry lip-smacking mouth noises that&rsquo;ll have your listener reaching for the &lsquo;unsubscribe&rsquo; button. So be sure to have some water before and during your session. Don&rsquo;t go overboard, though, as over-hydration can lead to excessive mouth noises, too. Plus, There&rsquo;s nothing worse than needing a pee ten minutes into an engaging interview. For some podcasters, coffee is their superpower. For others, it can really dry out their mouths. Only you&rsquo;ll know best what camp you fall into here. In summary, though, a moderate amount of water before and during recording works best for the vast majority of podcasters. But, for a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to http://ThePodcastHost.com/drink</p>]]></description><pubDate>Wed, 15 Nov 2023 05:53:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:07</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/e818235a-bf07-4152-ad9d-63cbe43927f2</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/e818235a-bf07-4152-ad9d-63cbe43927f2.mp3?t=1700027581000" length="1071232" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Getting behind the mic whilst dehydrated is a bad idea for a couple of reasons. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>258</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>258</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">c9432897-a4b9-4598-9899-128d9cb08c19</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Pre-Recording Practicalities]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Pre-Recording Practicalities]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about pre-recording practicalities. This is the less glamorous but still vitally important side of recording. Your gear and environment aren&rsquo;t the only factors that&rsquo;ll determine whether you sound like a seasoned pro or a complete beginner. As the old saying goes - &ldquo;failing to prepare is preparing to fail&rdquo;. Or, here&rsquo;s a good one to test your mic&rsquo;s pop filter - &ldquo;prior preparation prevents poor performance.&rdquo; On the next few episodes, we&rsquo;ll take a look at things like mic technique, minimising interruptions, and even how what you eat or drink can affect your show&rsquo;s audio quality. Finally, we always love to hear your feedback on Pocket-Sized Podcasting. What do you like about the show? And what might we do to make it even better? Be sure to let us know, quickly and easily, over at http://ThePodcastHost.com/PSP</p>]]></description><pubDate>Tue, 14 Nov 2023 05:24:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:01</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/c9432897-a4b9-4598-9899-128d9cb08c19</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/c9432897-a4b9-4598-9899-128d9cb08c19.mp3?t=1699939441000" length="977024" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[This is the less glamorous but still vitally important side of recording. Your gear and environment aren’t the only factors that’ll determine whether you sound like a seasoned pro or a complete beginner. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>257</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>257</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">aa30999f-dd54-4ba0-bb3f-23c64e5e26b8</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[What to Include in Your Episode Outro]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[What to Include in Your Episode Outro]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about what to include in your podcast outro. Just like the podcast intro, there are no &ldquo;rules&rdquo; as such, but if you want to close your episode effectively, think about the following. Send them to ONE place - your website. Here they can find show notes with links to everything mentioned in the episode. Put transcriptions and follow-up resources here, too. Next, include ONE &lsquo;Call to Action&rsquo; - for example, &ldquo;subscribe to the podcast&rdquo;. If you give them too much to do, chances are, they won&rsquo;t do any of it. Other CTA options might be things like &ldquo;tell a friend&rdquo;, &ldquo;buy the book&rdquo;, or &ldquo;support the show&rdquo;. Finally, if possible, offer them a teaser for the next episode. Whet their appetite for what&rsquo;s in store, and keep your show fresh in their mind until a new one drops. For a deeper dive on this topic, head over to http://thepodcasthost.com/outros</p>]]></description><pubDate>Mon, 13 Nov 2023 05:24:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:06</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/aa30999f-dd54-4ba0-bb3f-23c64e5e26b8</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/aa30999f-dd54-4ba0-bb3f-23c64e5e26b8.mp3?t=1699853041000" length="1052800" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Just like the podcast intro, there are no “rules” as such, but if you want to close your episode effectively, think about the following. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>256</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>256</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">5963d688-b638-4474-8845-94a83b68268e</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[What Makes a Good Podcast Outro?]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[What Makes a Good Podcast Outro?]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re asking the question &ldquo;what makes a good podcast outro?&rdquo;. The final minute or two of your episode goes towards creating a lasting impression in the mind of your listener. You might have done a great job with the intro and main content. But if the show ends poorly, this can be the difference between a new listener hitting subscribe or not. The job of the outro is essentially to thank the listener for their time. Then, point them in the direction of any vital resources mentioned in the episode. It&rsquo;s also the part where you can ask for something in return. If a listener has stayed to the end they&rsquo;ve probably enjoyed the episode, so they might be more willing to respond to your request for something like a rating, review, or even a sale. For a deeper dive on this topic, head over to http://thepodcasthost.com/outros</p>]]></description><pubDate>Fri, 10 Nov 2023 05:24:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:00:57</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/5963d688-b638-4474-8845-94a83b68268e</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/5963d688-b638-4474-8845-94a83b68268e.mp3?t=1699593841000" length="907392" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[The final minute or two of your episode goes towards creating a lasting impression in the mind of your listener.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>255</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>255</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">4ab814ac-6887-4f1d-830a-d026836fab61</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Using Cold Opens]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Using Cold Opens]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about the &ldquo;Cold Open&rdquo;. You know when you sit down to watch your favourite TV show and the episode starts before you&rsquo;ve even opened your bag of Doritos? Then, after about five minutes, the intro kicks in? Well, that&rsquo;s what&rsquo;s known as a &ldquo;cold open&ldquo;. Many podcasters use cold opens at the beginning of their episodes. You&rsquo;ve probably heard them before. You hit play and immediately seem to have landed bang in the middle of a guest explaining &ldquo;&hellip;so it was at this point I decided to wear a diving suit made of sirloin steaks and go swimming with sharks.&rdquo; Obviously, the idea is that you think &ldquo;wait, how is this idiot still alive to tell the tale? I need to get the full story.&rdquo; And you keep on listening. Cold opens can be a compelling way to hook listeners. And, for a deeper dive on how to get the best from them, head over to http://ThePodcastHost.com/ColdOpens</p>]]></description><pubDate>Thu, 09 Nov 2023 05:23:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:01</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/4ab814ac-6887-4f1d-830a-d026836fab61</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/4ab814ac-6887-4f1d-830a-d026836fab61.mp3?t=1699507381000" length="979072" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[You know when you sit down to watch your favourite TV show and the episode starts before you’ve even opened your bag of Doritos? Then, after about five minutes, the intro kicks in? Well, that’s what’s known as a “cold open“.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>254</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>254</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">041a7922-ee73-4397-a48e-c96e14a5ddc6</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Hooking Your Listener Early]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Hooking Your Listener Early]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about hooking your listener early. Podcast listeners are selfish. I don&rsquo;t mean that in a bad way. It&rsquo;s just that everyone tunes into content with one question in mind - &ldquo;what&rsquo;s in this for me?&rdquo;. If anything is drawn out, confusing, or ambiguous, it&rsquo;s easy for them to lose interest and switch off. You always have creative freedom with your podcast. But here&rsquo;s a template you can use as a starting point. &ldquo;Hello and welcome to the *blank* Podcast. This is the show for *blank*, all about *blank*, and on this episode, have you ever struggled with *blank*? Well, that&rsquo;s exactly what we&rsquo;re going to help you with on this week&rsquo;s show, where you&rsquo;ll learn how to *blank*&rdquo; Your target listener hears this and thinks &ldquo;this is exactly what I&rsquo;ve been looking for&rdquo;. And then, all you need to do is deliver on your promise... For a deeper dive on this topic, head over to https://www.thepodcasthost.com/strongstarts</p>]]></description><pubDate>Wed, 08 Nov 2023 05:23:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:06</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/041a7922-ee73-4397-a48e-c96e14a5ddc6</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/041a7922-ee73-4397-a48e-c96e14a5ddc6.mp3?t=1699420981000" length="1056896" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Podcast listeners are selfish. I don’t mean that in a bad way. It’s just that everyone tunes into content with one question in mind - “what’s in this for me?”. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>253</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>253</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">c72baeb4-f32d-40a2-9ba2-ffc227a5529e</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[What to Include in Your Episode Intros]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[What to Include in Your Episode Intros]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about what to include in your episode intros. There are few &ldquo;rules&rdquo; in podcasting - it&rsquo;s a creative medium, after all. With that said, you can really optimise the intro of your episodes if you include the following things. Firstly, let the listener know who they&rsquo;re talking to. So, whether you go by your real name or a nickname - introduce yourself. Next, - the title of the show. You might assume they already know it. But they might be working through a huge playlist of new podcasts they&rsquo;re trying out. Then, crucially, tell them who it's for and what&rsquo;s in it for them. So, the overall podcast topic might be &ldquo;to learn Spanish&rdquo;, and the subject of this episode might be &ldquo;ordering at a restaurant&rdquo;. We&rsquo;re going to cover this in more detail on the next episode when we talk about hooking your listeners early. For a deeper dive on this topic, head over to https://www.thepodcasthost.com/strongstarts</p>]]></description><pubDate>Tue, 07 Nov 2023 05:46:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:06</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/c72baeb4-f32d-40a2-9ba2-ffc227a5529e</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/c72baeb4-f32d-40a2-9ba2-ffc227a5529e.mp3?t=1699335961000" length="1050752" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[There are few “rules” in podcasting - it’s a creative medium, after all. With that said, you can really optimise the intro of your episodes if you include the following things. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>252</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>252</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">e5066e6d-9252-4b34-9f6c-b50444318cc6</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Introducing & Ending Your Episodes]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Introducing & Ending Your Episodes]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about introducing and ending your episodes. Obviously, the most important part of any podcast episode is its main content. But the way you open and close your episodes is vital when it comes to listeners even getting to that stage. Think about it, each episode you release is going to be someone&rsquo;s first impression of your show. On top of that, you only have five minutes to &ldquo;hook&rdquo; a third of all podcast listeners. That&rsquo;s according to recent data from our Podcast Discoverability survey. So you need to leave them in absolutely no doubt that this episode is a must-listen. Then, after you&rsquo;ve delivered on your promise, you need to finish strongly enough that they&rsquo;ll come back for more. On the following episodes, we&rsquo;ll have some tips and pointers to help you do just that. For a deeper dive on this topic, head over to https://www.thepodcasthost.com/strongstarts And, remember to leave your feedback for Pocket-Sized Podcasting at http://ThePodcastHost.com/PSP</p>]]></description><pubDate>Mon, 06 Nov 2023 05:46:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:09</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/e5066e6d-9252-4b34-9f6c-b50444318cc6</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/e5066e6d-9252-4b34-9f6c-b50444318cc6.mp3?t=1699249561000" length="1112192" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Obviously, the most important part of any podcast episode is its main content. But the way you open and close your episodes is vital when it comes to listeners even getting to that stage.  ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>251</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>251</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">7071eb68-6802-4b04-adb4-0b0e6eaadf7c</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Rough Podcast Scripts]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Rough Podcast Scripts]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about the rough podcast script. This one is near the &lsquo;make-it-up-as-you-go-along&rsquo; end of the scripting spectrum. Here, you&rsquo;ll mainly use bullet points to remind you where you&rsquo;re going. You&rsquo;re relying on your expert knowledge on the subject to fill in the gaps. This leads to the most conversational type of podcast and is often the most engaging. When you&rsquo;re speaking from experience, your voice becomes a lot more active, and a lot less monotone. The problem, of course, is that there&rsquo;s a chance that you&rsquo;ll miss stuff out or maybe even get something wrong. So the time you might&rsquo;ve saved in doing a more detailed script can easily be spent on extra editing or re-recording. For an in-depth look at podcast scripting, go to http://ThePodcastHost.com/scripting And on top of that, we&rsquo;d love your feedback on Pocket-Sized Podcasting, which you can quickly and easily leave for us at http://ThePodcastHost.com/PSP</p>]]></description><pubDate>Fri, 03 Nov 2023 05:46:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:06</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/7071eb68-6802-4b04-adb4-0b0e6eaadf7c</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/7071eb68-6802-4b04-adb4-0b0e6eaadf7c.mp3?t=1698990361000" length="1067136" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[This one is near the ‘make-it-up-as-you-go-along’ end of the scripting spectrum. 
Here, you’ll mainly use bullet points to remind you where you’re going. You’re relying on your expert knowledge on the subject to fill in the gaps.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>250</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>250</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">7d1e98b4-37cc-4ac7-919a-d51689cf15b2</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Detailed Podcast Scripts]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Detailed Podcast Scripts]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about the &lsquo;detailed episode plan&rsquo; podcast script. This is the most common way of scripting a podcast. It&rsquo;s a great alternative to the word-for-word method. Here, you can write down every point you want to hit, every resource you want to mention, and every story you want to cover. You&rsquo;re not trying to script every single word, though, so you still have that freedom to talk naturally *with* your listener, instead of reading *at* them. Your personality can shine through here, without the risk of going off-track or forgetting something. For an in-depth look at podcast scripting, go to http://ThePodcastHost.com/scripting On top of that, we&rsquo;d love your feedback on Pocket-Sized Podcasting, which you can quickly and easily leave for us at http://ThePodcastHost.com/PSP</p>]]></description><pubDate>Thu, 02 Nov 2023 05:45:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:00:56</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/7d1e98b4-37cc-4ac7-919a-d51689cf15b2</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/7d1e98b4-37cc-4ac7-919a-d51689cf15b2.mp3?t=1698903901000" length="905344" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[This is the most common way of scripting a podcast. It’s a great alternative to the word-for-word method. Here, you can write down every point you want to hit, every resource you want to mention, and every story you want to cover. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>249</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>249</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">80ec37c0-d53f-4f3b-8292-b263b3c6898e</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Word-For-Word Podcast Scripts]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Word-For-Word Podcast Scripts]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about the word-for-word podcast script. This method is great because you&rsquo;ll never forget or leave anything out. It can also help a lot if you lack the confidence to speak for any length of time. But, there are big cons, too. Scripting a show this way takes ages. Few podcasters can also pull off word-for-word reading and make it sound conversational. You run the risk of your episodes being a bit flat and monotone. By all means, give it a shot. But it&rsquo;s likely not going to be the best option for you in the long run. For an in-depth look at podcast scripting, go to http://ThePodcastHost.com/scripting On top of that, we&rsquo;d love your feedback on Pocket-Sized Podcasting, which you can quickly and easily leave for us at http://ThePodcastHost.com/PSP</p>]]></description><pubDate>Wed, 01 Nov 2023 10:45:15 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:00</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/80ec37c0-d53f-4f3b-8292-b263b3c6898e</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/80ec37c0-d53f-4f3b-8292-b263b3c6898e.mp3?t=1698835516000" length="970880" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[This method is great because you’ll never forget or leave anything out. It can also help a lot if you lack the confidence to speak for any length of time.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>248</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>248</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">f345cedb-f38e-40b5-98ec-4fed26ee6c16</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Writing a Podcast Script]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Writing a Podcast Script]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about writing a podcast script. Podcast scripting is&nbsp;a very personal thing. Some hosts script their whole show, word for word. Other hosts write down the episode title and just ad-lib it from there.&nbsp;Neither way is right or wrong and, in reality, most people go for something in-between. Scripting can be viewed as a spectrum, with `fully-scripted` and `not-even-slightly-scripted` covering each end. That means it&rsquo;s impossible to tell you exactly how to do it. But, we can tell you a&nbsp;*few ways*&nbsp;to do it. You can try each way out, and tweak them for your needs. With a bit of trial and error, you&rsquo;ll find the type of scripting that best suits you. We&rsquo;ll cover the three main options for scripting your show in the following episodes, so be sure to subscribe to Pocket-Sized Podcasting and get new tips delivered daily!</p>]]></description><pubDate>Tue, 31 Oct 2023 05:01:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:00:59</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/f345cedb-f38e-40b5-98ec-4fed26ee6c16</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/f345cedb-f38e-40b5-98ec-4fed26ee6c16.mp3?t=1698728461000" length="942208" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Podcast scripting is a very personal thing. Some hosts script their whole show, word for word. Other hosts write down the episode title and just ad-lib it from there. Neither way is right or wrong and, in reality, most people go for something in-between.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>247</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>247</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">fb19f4e5-de3b-4d90-beac-19f8806ea242</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[The How-To - Creating Shareable Content]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[The How-To - Creating Shareable Content]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about the how-to method, when it comes to creating shareable content. This is the classic problem-solution pairing. What are your audience struggling with? What do they need help with? You might already have a decent idea of this, based on our recent &lsquo;Question Research&rsquo; episode. Starting your title with, &ldquo;How to&rdquo; is arguably the most effective way of getting folks to click on it. You might say &ldquo;well, that&rsquo;s just clickbait&rdquo;. But is it really &ldquo;just clickbait&rdquo; if it delivers what it promises? Some examples of &lsquo;how-to&rsquo; episodes that&rsquo;ll have their target audience hitting play without a second thought are - &lsquo;How to become a scratch golfer&rsquo; - &lsquo;How to improve your sleep quality&rsquo; - &lsquo;How to talk to your kids about grief&rsquo; - And, &lsquo;How to pass your driving test&rsquo; For an in-depth look at creating shareable content, head on over to http://ThePodcastHost.com/shareable</p>]]></description><pubDate>Mon, 30 Oct 2023 05:01:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:00</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/fb19f4e5-de3b-4d90-beac-19f8806ea242</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/fb19f4e5-de3b-4d90-beac-19f8806ea242.mp3?t=1698642061000" length="968832" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[This is the classic problem-solution pairing. What are your audience struggling with? What do they need help with?]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>246</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>246</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">0f38360c-6d48-4386-b956-237423d6aa7a</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Case Studies - Creating Shareable Content]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Case Studies - Creating Shareable Content]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about the case study method, when it comes to creating shareable content. Case studies use examples of people doing things, or events taking place. For example, a biking podcast might do a deep dive into how one rider prepared for and won a big tournament. Or a football podcast might chronicle the journey of a team of underdogs from a small village who won a national trophy. You can almost think of it as a movie. It&rsquo;s a great opportunity to tell a story - and stories are the ultimate and oldest form of shareable content. Try to answer questions like &ldquo;what&rsquo;s their main motivation?&rdquo;, &ldquo;what are their biggest obstacles?&rdquo;, and &ldquo;what are they doing differently?&rdquo;. This is going to leave your listener feeling clued up, motivated, and inspired! For an in-depth look at creating shareable content, head on over to http://ThePodcastHost.com/shareable</p>]]></description><pubDate>Fri, 27 Oct 2023 04:01:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:04</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/0f38360c-6d48-4386-b956-237423d6aa7a</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/0f38360c-6d48-4386-b956-237423d6aa7a.mp3?t=1698379262000" length="1032320" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Case studies use examples of people doing things, or events taking place. 

For example, a biking podcast might do a deep dive into how one rider prepared for and won a big tournament.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>245</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>245</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">52db4edb-7861-42e8-8f24-5aacd5177f1b</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Costs - Creating Shareable Content]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Costs - Creating Shareable Content]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about the cost method, when it comes to creating shareable content. When people buy things these days, they do their research online first. So here&rsquo;s where you can help your target audience get the info they need. What cost-related questions do you think they might commonly type into Google? For example, a nutritional therapy podcast might run an episode titled &ldquo;how much does a food intolerance test cost?&rdquo;. Or a show about living off-grid might run one about, &ldquo;how much does a wood burning stove cost?&rdquo;. You might even do a costs list where you compare your own product or service to your competitors. This honest approach can help build trust and authority, too. To sum up, cost episodes are helpful, discoverable, and highly shareable. For an in-depth look at creating shareable content, head on over to http://ThePodcastHost.com/shareable</p>]]></description><pubDate>Thu, 26 Oct 2023 04:00:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:01</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/52db4edb-7861-42e8-8f24-5aacd5177f1b</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/52db4edb-7861-42e8-8f24-5aacd5177f1b.mp3?t=1698292801000" length="974976" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[When people buy things these days, they do their research online first. So here’s where you can help your target audience get the info they need. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>244</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>244</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">47c75199-96f0-4834-899b-dd8eb909ab02</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[The Comparison - Creating Shareable Content]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[The Comparison - Creating Shareable Content]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about the comparison method, when it comes to creating shareable content. Mac versus PC, Pepsi versus Cola, Nike versus Adidas. This is the celebrity death match episode format where you&rsquo;re going to throw two rivals into the arena and see who comes out on top. Here, you&rsquo;d tend to look at key relevant factors such as cost, quality, and ease of use. This is almost like the review method but you&rsquo;re looking at two things, rather than one. We&rsquo;ve created these ourselves in the past where we&rsquo;ve had showdowns between popular mics or audio software programmes. Again, this is totally topic dependent. Do you podcast about mountain biking? Well, let&rsquo;s hear your take on the two most popular brands of tyres. Are you more of a business coach? Then maybe your listeners would like your help deciding on one of two popular types of accounting software. For an in-depth look at creating shareable content, head on over to http://ThePodcastHost.com/shareable</p>]]></description><pubDate>Wed, 25 Oct 2023 04:00:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:07</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/47c75199-96f0-4834-899b-dd8eb909ab02</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/47c75199-96f0-4834-899b-dd8eb909ab02.mp3?t=1698206401000" length="1077376" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Mac versus PC, Pepsi versus Cola, Nike versus Adidas. This is the celebrity death match episode format where you’re going to throw two rivals into the arena and see who comes out on top. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>243</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>243</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">fd5943bd-7257-45f1-b98b-9be1f1063a92</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[The Review - Creating Shareable Content]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[The Review - Creating Shareable Content]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about the review method, when it comes to creating shareable content. Before people try or buy things themselves, they generally like to hear the opinions of others. You probably do this yourself each time you nip on to Amazon. Reviewing products, services, or other topic-relevant things can help your listeners to make more informed decisions. They&rsquo;ll really appreciate you for this, and they&rsquo;ll want to share these episodes with others each time they see this particular thing being discussed in future, too. It&rsquo;ll always depend on exactly what you&rsquo;re reviewing, but common points to hit are factors like cost, quality, and ease of use. Can you write up a list of four or five things you think would make for great review episodes on your own show? This is another super-shareable type of content, and it can be handy for SEO, too. For an in-depth look at creating shareable content, head on over to http://ThePodcastHost.com/shareable</p>]]></description><pubDate>Tue, 24 Oct 2023 04:20:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:05</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/fd5943bd-7257-45f1-b98b-9be1f1063a92</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/fd5943bd-7257-45f1-b98b-9be1f1063a92.mp3?t=1698121201000" length="1036416" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Before people try or buy things themselves, they generally like to hear the opinions of others. You probably do this yourself each time you nip on to Amazon. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>242</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>242</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">e2259d05-2737-4557-9ba8-a88548797d59</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[The List - Creating Shareable Content]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[The List - Creating Shareable Content]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about the list method, when it comes to creating shareable content. Let&rsquo;s face it, we all love lists. There&rsquo;s something compelling about content that promises knowledge like &ldquo;the top 7 guitarists of all time&rdquo;, or &ldquo;the best 11 beers in the world right now&rdquo;. So it&rsquo;s just a case of taking this method and re-working it for your own topic. You can base this on products your listeners might use, places they might visit, recipes they might cook-up, or movies they might watch. Don&rsquo;t get overly hung up on the word &ldquo;best&rdquo;, too. Just be clear that this is your personal opinion, and that you welcome all feedback and differing viewpoints. The engagement these episodes brings is all part of the fun - and, the wider benefit! For an in-depth look at creating shareable content, head on over to http://ThePodcastHost.com/shareable</p>]]></description><pubDate>Mon, 23 Oct 2023 04:20:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:00:59</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/e2259d05-2737-4557-9ba8-a88548797d59</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/e2259d05-2737-4557-9ba8-a88548797d59.mp3?t=1698034802000" length="944256" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Let’s face it, we all love lists. There’s something compelling about content that promises knowledge like “the top 7 guitarists of all time”, or “the best 11 beers in the world right now”.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>241</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>241</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">3f854fdd-5fc6-44d5-bf87-d05e61417e32</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[How to Create Shareable Content]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[How to Create Shareable Content]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about how to create shareable content. Word of mouth is one of the most effective ways to grow your podcast. According to our Discoverability survey, over 33% of listeners find new shows to listen to based on what others have shared or recommended. So how do you make your podcast episodes shareable, or &ldquo;recommendable&rdquo;? There are actually six frameworks you can build your episode around. And, after hearing them, your listeners will be dying to tell others about them, too. These frameworks are - lists, comparisons, reviews, case studies, how-tos, and costs. Over the next six episodes, we&rsquo;re going to take a look at each one and see how you might best use it in your own podcast. So make sure you&rsquo;re subscribed to or following Pocket-Sized Podcasting in your app of choice - trust me, you won&rsquo;t want to miss these! And, for an in-depth look at creating shareable content, head on over to http://ThePodcastHost.com/shareable</p>]]></description><pubDate>Fri, 20 Oct 2023 04:19:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:08</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/3f854fdd-5fc6-44d5-bf87-d05e61417e32</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/3f854fdd-5fc6-44d5-bf87-d05e61417e32.mp3?t=1697775541000" length="1095808" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[So how do you make your podcast episodes shareable, or “recommendable”? There are actually six frameworks you can build your episode around. And, after hearing them, your listeners will be dying to tell others about them, too. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>240</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>240</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">e49884d7-7313-47a5-8c9a-48e8c4c7edd5</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Doing Question Research]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Doing Question Research]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about doing question research. One of the best ways to come up with episode ideas is simply to answer the common questions your audience is asking. But what if you don&rsquo;t have an audience yet? Well, there are a couple of handy and free ways to find these questions. The first is simply to type something you think your avatar would ask into google, then scroll down to the bottom and you&rsquo;ll see suggestions of what they&rsquo;re also asking. Another is a service called http://Answerthepublic.com - here, you just type in your main topic, let&rsquo;s say, &ldquo;sharks&rdquo;, and it&rsquo;ll spit out every single question people ask around that thing. From &ldquo;what do sharks eat?&rdquo; and &ldquo;where sharks are found&rdquo;, to &ldquo;how sharks sleep&rdquo; and &ldquo;were sharks before dinosaurs?&rdquo;. Your listeners will love these episodes, and they&rsquo;ll throw up some great compelling episode titles, too. By the way, are you enjoying Pocket-Sized Podcasting so far? If so, could we ask a quick favour that you give us a rating and review on your listening app of choice? That would really make our day, here at this humble wee podcast. Cheers!</p>]]></description><pubDate>Thu, 19 Oct 2023 04:19:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:36</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/e49884d7-7313-47a5-8c9a-48e8c4c7edd5</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/e49884d7-7313-47a5-8c9a-48e8c4c7edd5.mp3?t=1697689141000" length="1534080" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[One of the best ways to come up with episode ideas is simply to answer the common questions your audience is asking. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>239</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>239</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">4f6fda51-54cf-4e3f-8e0e-0118ea31826f</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Coming Up With Episode Ideas]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Coming Up With Episode Ideas]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about coming up with episode ideas. As is often the case in podcasting, this depends a lot on your topic. But there are some common themes we see with podcasters coming up with episode ideas. Maybe a recent personal experience or funny anecdote can tie in to your subject or topic. Maybe there&rsquo;s a lesson to be learned from a book you&rsquo;ve just read, or a movie you&rsquo;ve just watched. Or maybe there&rsquo;s something in the news right now that your audience would be interested to hear your take on. It&rsquo;s a good idea to keep a document of all the evergreen episode ideas you think of, too. That way, you know you&rsquo;ve always got something to fall back on if you go through a challenging creative period in the future. For a deeper dive on how to come up with fresh podcast episode ideas, go to http://ThePodcastHost.com/ideas</p>]]></description><pubDate>Wed, 18 Oct 2023 04:19:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:00:58</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/4f6fda51-54cf-4e3f-8e0e-0118ea31826f</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/4f6fda51-54cf-4e3f-8e0e-0118ea31826f.mp3?t=1697602741000" length="923776" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[As is often the case in podcasting, this depends a lot on your topic. But there are some common themes we see with podcasters coming up with episode ideas.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>238</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>238</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">2ba037cd-2fc5-4023-aa7d-54b707807683</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Planning Your Episodes]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Planning Your Episodes]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about planning your episodes. Great podcasters and terrible podcasters both have one thing in common - they make it sound like they haven&rsquo;t planned their episodes. For the great podcasters, it&rsquo;s because they plan them so well. For the terrible podcasters, it&rsquo;s because they don&rsquo;t plan them at all. An episode plan doesn&rsquo;t need to be an in-depth dissertation or treatment. It&rsquo;s more about asking some top-level questions like &ldquo;Why this topic right now?&rdquo;, &ldquo;What problem will this solve for my audience?&rdquo;, and &ldquo;How will this provide value?&rdquo;. When we cover scripting, we&rsquo;ll talk more about how you bring that plan to the recording booth. But before then, we want to take a look in the next few episodes about fleshing out those ideas. You want to create compelling and shareable content that your listeners will love, right? Well, make sure you&rsquo;re subscribed to Pocket-Sized Podcasting in your listening app of choice, and those episodes will drop into your feed the minute they&rsquo;re published!</p>]]></description><pubDate>Tue, 17 Oct 2023 04:31:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:16</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/2ba037cd-2fc5-4023-aa7d-54b707807683</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/2ba037cd-2fc5-4023-aa7d-54b707807683.mp3?t=1697517061000" length="1212544" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Great podcasters and terrible podcasters both have one thing in common - they make it sound like they haven’t planned their episodes. 

For the great podcasters, it’s because they plan them so well. 

For the terrible podcasters, it’s because they don’t plan them at all.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>237</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>237</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">2604cf5b-fde9-479b-96de-e933733cb47d</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[How to Link to and Share Your Podcast]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[How to Link to and Share Your Podcast]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about how to link to and share your podcast. This is a big mistake many podcasters make when they promote their content - they share a link to somewhere like Apple or Spotify. Sure, these places are where a lot of podcast listening happens. But remember, there are hundreds of other apps and directories, too. You definitely can&rsquo;t link to them all, especially not in a tweet, so what do you do? Quite simply, you send them to one place - your website. We&rsquo;re going to take a deeper dive into making your podcast website on a future episode, but you already have one as soon as you&rsquo;ve signed up for your hosting account. You can even buy a domain name and have it point to that whilst you work on setting up something a bit more personalised. And, for an in-depth look at how to link to your show, head on over to http://ThePodcastHost.com/sharing</p>]]></description><pubDate>Mon, 16 Oct 2023 04:30:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:13</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/2604cf5b-fde9-479b-96de-e933733cb47d</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/2604cf5b-fde9-479b-96de-e933733cb47d.mp3?t=1697430601000" length="1171584" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[This is a big mistake many podcasters make when they promote their content - they share a link to somewhere like Apple or Spotify.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>236</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>236</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">4d42e4ec-adc7-4495-8c1c-c1bf4fc839b1</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Getting Listed in All Other Podcast Directories]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Getting Listed in All Other Podcast Directories]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about getting listed in any directories and apps your show isn&rsquo;t yet appearing in. As we mentioned before, the fact that you&rsquo;re in Apple Podcasts means you&rsquo;re automatically in a hundred other places. Google Podcasts will start noticing you without you needing to do anything, either. Well, they are in the search business, after all! But, there are three other platforms you&rsquo;ll want to log in to or create an account for, in order to submit your RSS feed to. Those are Stitcher, TuneIn, Amazon, and Audible. I know, I know, that&rsquo;s actually four. But if you&rsquo;re in Amazon, you&rsquo;re in Audible, and vice-versa. We&rsquo;ve got full guides on submitting to each of these platforms, which you can find at http://ThePodcastHost.com/directories</p>]]></description><pubDate>Fri, 13 Oct 2023 04:31:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:13</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/4d42e4ec-adc7-4495-8c1c-c1bf4fc839b1</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/4d42e4ec-adc7-4495-8c1c-c1bf4fc839b1.mp3?t=1697171461000" length="1167488" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[As we mentioned before, the fact that you’re in Apple Podcasts means you’re automatically in a hundred other places. Google Podcasts will start noticing you without you needing to do anything, either. Well, they are in the search business, after all!  ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>235</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>235</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">8a64dd69-ae7b-460a-8a54-17e0813b518d</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Getting Your Show in Spotify]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Getting Your Show in Spotify]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about getting listed in Spotify. Spotify is hot on the heels of Apple when it comes to global podcast consumption. You&rsquo;ll definitely want to get your show listed here. And, it&rsquo;s even easier than submitting to their fruit-loving rivals. Most hosting providers have simple one-click &ldquo;submit to Spotify&rdquo; buttons in their distribution sections. What&rsquo;s more, some of our recently launched shows have appeared on Spotify less than an hour after submitting. You can easily submit manually, too, if your host doesn&rsquo;t have a one-click button. Just copy your RSS feed link, go to http://podcasters.spotify.com and paste it to the &lsquo;Add a Podcast&rsquo; section. The novel thing about the Spotify podcasters portal is that you&rsquo;ll see some data on what music your listeners tend to enjoy. Can you imagine the irony of your death metal podcast throwing up &ldquo;favourite artists&rdquo; like The Cheeky Girls and S Club 7? By the way - if that happens to you, please let us know! And, for a deeper dive on submitting your show to Spotify, go to http://ThePodcastHost.com/getonspotify</p>]]></description><pubDate>Thu, 12 Oct 2023 04:30:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:17</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/8a64dd69-ae7b-460a-8a54-17e0813b518d</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/8a64dd69-ae7b-460a-8a54-17e0813b518d.mp3?t=1697085001000" length="1239168" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Spotify is hot on the heels of Apple when it comes to global podcast consumption. You’ll definitely want to get your show listed here. And, it’s even easier than submitting to their fruit-loving rivals. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>234</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>234</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">9ad4b781-6835-403c-9cc0-37a6d55a400f</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Getting Your Show in Apple Podcasts (AKA iTunes)]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Getting Your Show in Apple Podcasts (AKA iTunes)]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about getting listed in Apple Podcasts - AKA, iTunes. Apple has always been - and remains - the number one place where podcasts are consumed. We also know that, by being listed here, your show will automatically pop up in a trillion other apps you&rsquo;ve never heard of. To submit to Apple you just need to create a free Apple ID. Or, you might have one already. Bottom line, you need to log in to [PodcastsConnect.Apple.com](http://PodcastsConnect.Apple.com) and click on the &lsquo;Add&rsquo; button. Then, just copy and paste your RSS feed from your hosting account, check the details, and submit. It can take 2-3 days for your podcast to appear in Apple Podcasts, so don&rsquo;t panic if you don&rsquo;t see it in there right away. Apple will email you if there&rsquo;s any issues, too! For a deeper dive on submitting to iTunes, including screenshots and a video, go to http://ThePodcastHost.com/ApplePodcasts</p>]]></description><pubDate>Wed, 11 Oct 2023 04:30:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:07</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/9ad4b781-6835-403c-9cc0-37a6d55a400f</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/9ad4b781-6835-403c-9cc0-37a6d55a400f.mp3?t=1696998601000" length="1071232" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Apple has always been - and remains - the number one place where podcasts are consumed. We also know that, by being listed here, your show will automatically pop up in a trillion other apps you’ve never heard of.  ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>233</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>233</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">2750efcd-8f0e-498f-8df4-37d15f8a0fe8</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Getting Listed in Podcast Directories]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Getting Listed in Podcast Directories]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about getting listed in podcast directories. People listen to podcasts on hundreds of different apps and platforms. In a previous episode, we learned that you only need to upload your content to one place - your hosting account - and it&rsquo;ll appear in all these places automatically. But how do we make sure these directories know our podcast exists in the first place? For this, we use a unique URL called an RSS feed. You&rsquo;ll get one of these when you create your show in your hosting account. You can easily submit this to any directory or app you like. And because Apple Podcasts and Spotify account for about 65% of global podcast listening, you&rsquo;re over halfway there simply by being listed in those two. And there&rsquo;s more good news. Being listed in Apple Podcasts means you&rsquo;ll automatically be listed in almost all of the other apps and directories out there. So what initially might&rsquo;ve looked like a mammoth task is really just a few minutes of work! For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to ThePodcastHost.com/directories</p>]]></description><pubDate>Tue, 10 Oct 2023 04:00:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:15</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/2750efcd-8f0e-498f-8df4-37d15f8a0fe8</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/2750efcd-8f0e-498f-8df4-37d15f8a0fe8.mp3?t=1696910401000" length="1202304" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[On this episode, we’re talking about getting listed in podcast directories. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>232</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>232</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Matthew McLean</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">bc3b1e20-dd9b-4057-86a0-41de89e1a674</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Is My Podcast “Launch” Important?]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Is My Podcast “Launch” Important?]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about the myth of the podcast &ldquo;launch&rdquo;. The term &ldquo;launch&rdquo; is ambiguous, because, creating your show and publishing your first episode means you&rsquo;re &ldquo;launching&rdquo; your podcast. But we might also think of our launch as something glitzy and hyped-up, like the release of the latest iPhone or Xbox console. When new tech, or even new books are released, they only have a few weeks to &ldquo;sink or swim&rdquo; because of how sales and charts work in these fields. The good news? This has absolutely nothing in common with podcasting whatsoever. Some of the most successful podcasters spent months or even years talking to tiny audiences, before their consistency and hard work eventually paid off. So, sure, promote and market your new pod as best you can when it&rsquo;s released. But the most important thing isn&rsquo;t how much hype you drum up - it&rsquo;s how soon you get back to work on your next episode! For a deeper dive on your podcast launch, head on over to http://ThePodcastHost.com/yourlaunch</p>]]></description><pubDate>Mon, 09 Oct 2023 04:00:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:11</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/bc3b1e20-dd9b-4057-86a0-41de89e1a674</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/bc3b1e20-dd9b-4057-86a0-41de89e1a674.mp3?t=1696824001000" length="1138816" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[The term “launch” is ambiguous, because, creating your show and publishing your first episode means you’re “launching” your podcast. But we might also think of our launch as something glitzy and hyped-up, like the release of the latest iPhone or Xbox console. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>231</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>231</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">4ff99646-49d3-4c44-b21a-53c3e2377add</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Why Make an Episode Zero?]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Why Make an Episode Zero?]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about why you might make an &lsquo;Episode Zero&rsquo;. This is the name given to a type of introductory or &ldquo;pre-launch&rdquo; podcast episode. It isn&rsquo;t&nbsp;*essential*&nbsp;to create an Episode Zero. But many podcasters do &ndash; and there&rsquo;s a few good reasons why it might be worth considering for your own show. An Episode Zero can be similar to a promo trailer in the way it introduces your show and your topic. The main difference is length. An Episode Zero would ideally still err on the shorter side of, say, 3-6 minutes. But that still gives you a lot more time than a 30-second trailer. One of the biggest benefits of an Episode Zero is that it gives you that &ldquo;one published episode&rdquo; needed to submit your show everywhere. That means your podcast can be fully set up and ready to go by the time you publish your first &ldquo;proper&rdquo; episode. For a deeper dive on this topic, head on over to http://ThePodcastHost.com/epzero</p>]]></description><pubDate>Fri, 06 Oct 2023 04:00:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:07</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/4ff99646-49d3-4c44-b21a-53c3e2377add</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/4ff99646-49d3-4c44-b21a-53c3e2377add.mp3?t=1696564801000" length="1075328" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[This is the name given to a type of introductory or “pre-launch” podcast episode. It isn’t essential to create an Episode Zero. But many podcasters do – and there’s a few good reasons why it might be worth considering for your own show.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>230</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>230</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">a14800e7-bdbf-4202-b880-913f5597ef9a</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[How to Create a Podcast Trailer]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[How to Create a Podcast Trailer]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about creating a trailer for your show. A promo trailer can help you win over potential new listeners by giving them a flavour of your podcast. They can easily be played on other shows, too, which can help you grow your audience. A podcast trailer should be between 30 seconds and 1 minute. The shorter, the better. There are certain things you *definitely* want to mention in your podcast trailer. What&rsquo;s the show called? What&rsquo;s it about? Who is it for? And where can we find it? If you can add a bit of creative tone, personality, and production, too, then great. But these things are &ldquo;icing&rdquo; and shouldn&rsquo;t go in at the expense of the key details. A podcast trailer is also useful because you need at least one published episode on your feed before you can list your show in places like Spotify and Apple. As far as these platforms are concerned, even a short trailer counts as &ldquo;an episode&rdquo;. Another option here is to create an Episode Zero, which we&rsquo;re going to look at next. In the meantime, for a deeper dive on creating your trailer, go to http://ThePodcastHost.com/promotrailer</p>]]></description><pubDate>Thu, 05 Oct 2023 04:00:01 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:17</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/a14800e7-bdbf-4202-b880-913f5597ef9a</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/a14800e7-bdbf-4202-b880-913f5597ef9a.mp3?t=1696478402000" length="1226880" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[A promo trailer can help you win over potential new listeners by giving them a flavour of your podcast.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>229</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>229</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">a7a98d4c-b60c-4930-bdbf-8432010ae87f</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Where to Publish Your Podcast]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Where to Publish Your Podcast]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about podcast hosting options. Your podcast hosting provider - also known as your &ldquo;podcast host&rdquo; - is *the* place you create your show and upload all of your episodes to. There are plenty great hosting options out there catering to all needs and budgets. Hosting providers will offer you stats so you can see how popular your show is. Some of these go really in-depth and can give you geographic and device stats, too. Hosting providers will also give you a basic website for your show. Some offer tools for monetization, growth, and even for creating private &ldquo;members only&rdquo; podcasts. A few of our favourite podcast hosts are Captivate, Transistor, and Castos. You&rsquo;ll find a full rundown of these services and their offerings at [http://ThePodcastHost.com/Hosting](http://thepodcasthost.com/Hosting) And, our podcast-maker tool Alitu also has hosting included in your subscription. That means you only need one login to record, edit, and publish your podcast, which keeps things cost-effective, and super simple. Thanks very much for listening to Pocket-Sized Podcasting. And, for a deeper look at podcast hosting, and a full range of options, features, and prices, head on over to [http://ThePodcastHost.com/Hosting](http://thepodcasthost.com/Hosting)</p>]]></description><pubDate>Wed, 04 Oct 2023 04:00:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:24</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/a7a98d4c-b60c-4930-bdbf-8432010ae87f</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/a7a98d4c-b60c-4930-bdbf-8432010ae87f.mp3?t=1696392001000" length="1341568" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Your podcast hosting provider - also known as your “podcast host” - is the place you create your show and upload all of your episodes to. There are plenty great hosting options out there catering to all needs and budgets. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>228</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>228</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">6aade922-4bb0-4e9c-81b5-baadf9decc8a</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[How to Publish Your Podcast]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[How to Publish Your Podcast]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about publishing your podcast. This stage can cause some confusion for new podcasters. You might think that you need to upload your episodes to listening platforms like Apple and Spotify, but that isn&rsquo;t the case. Instead, you create an account with a podcast hosting provider. That&rsquo;s the place your podcast &ldquo;lives&rdquo;. Your cover art, your show description, and your episodes all go in there. Then, there are a couple of small steps needed to &ldquo;tell&rdquo; platforms like Spotify and Apple that your podcast exists. After that, your show will be listed there, as will each episode you publish within your podcast hosting account. So you only ever need to upload to one single place to have your episodes pushed out to hundreds of listening platforms. To use an analogy, if your podcast was a magazine, your hosting provider would be the printing press, whilst all of the listening apps and directories would be the shops that your magazine could be found in. For a deeper dive on how to publish a podcast, head on over to http://ThePodcastHost.com/upload</p>]]></description><pubDate>Tue, 03 Oct 2023 05:00:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:13</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/6aade922-4bb0-4e9c-81b5-baadf9decc8a</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/6aade922-4bb0-4e9c-81b5-baadf9decc8a.mp3?t=1696309201000" length="1169536" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[This stage can cause some confusion for new podcasters. You might think that you need to upload your episodes to listening platforms like Apple and Spotify, but that isn’t the case. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>227</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>227</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">99f57007-360c-4e96-86fc-b37e380c83e1</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Where to Get Your Podcast Transcribed]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Where to Get Your Podcast Transcribed]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about where to get your podcast transcribed. There are two types of transcription service out there - human, and AI. The AI options are cheaper, but generally less accurate, especially if you speak with a Scottish accent. An AI transcription might take a wee bit more time to run through and correct manually. Our podcast-maker tool Alitu now automatically generates transcriptions of all your episodes, so that&rsquo;s one single place you can go to record, edit, publish, and transcribe your show. Alternatively, if it&rsquo;s human transcription you&rsquo;re after, then our favourite option here is Rev, which you can find at [ThePodcastHost.com/rev](http://thepodcasthost.com/rev) Obviously, with any human service, it&rsquo;ll take up to a few days to get your transcriptions back, whereas, AI can do it almost immediately. There&rsquo;s no right or wrong approach here, though. Only what works best for you. For a deeper dive on podcast transcriptions, with a full range of options, head on over to [http://ThePodcastHost.com/transcription](http://thepodcasthost.com/transcription)</p>]]></description><pubDate>Mon, 02 Oct 2023 05:00:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:11</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/99f57007-360c-4e96-86fc-b37e380c83e1</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/99f57007-360c-4e96-86fc-b37e380c83e1.mp3?t=1696222801000" length="1136768" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[There are machine learning options out there that’ll do transcriptions for a few cents a minute. Some will even do it for free. This is a big bonus if you’ve little or no budget. The downside is that the accuracy can be quite low - especially if you speak with a Scottish accent! So be warned that these AI transcriptions can take a bit of time to go through and correct manually.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>226</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>226</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">8db6962d-982c-474b-a784-b32a0b01a18d</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Why Use Transcription?]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Why Use Transcription?]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about why you should be providing transcriptions of your episodes. Podcasting *is* predominantly an audio medium, and so, word-for-word episode transcriptions were traditionally seen as a luxury form of bonus content. These days, however, things are different. Podcasters should *always* be providing transcripts for each new episode they publish. This is for two main reasons. Firstly - accessibility. Millions of people out there are deaf or hard of hearing. Providing a transcription means that you&rsquo;re not shutting them out from any insights or info on your show that could potentially benefit them. Secondly - you&rsquo;re keeping yourself on the right side of the law. We&rsquo;ve seen recent examples of podcasters facing legal action over their failure to provide transcriptions. It goes without saying that you don&rsquo;t want to risk joining that club. Transcriptions can be pasted directly into your shownotes, or, you can link clearly to them on a separate page on your site. Some hosting providers even offer dedicated sections where you can publish your transcriptions. Fortunately, there are plenty of options for getting your show transcribed, too - as we&rsquo;re going to cover on the next episode. In the meantime, for a deeper dive on this, head on over to http://ThePodcastHost.com/transcription</p>]]></description><pubDate>Fri, 29 Sep 2023 05:00:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:27</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/8db6962d-982c-474b-a784-b32a0b01a18d</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/8db6962d-982c-474b-a784-b32a0b01a18d.mp3?t=1695963601000" length="1392768" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Podcasting is predominantly an audio medium, and so, word-for-word episode transcriptions were traditionally seen as a luxury form of bonus content. These days, however, things are different. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>225</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>225</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">79c20ff3-53fb-4e38-b771-e758a327e574</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[‘Podcast Maker’ Tools]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[‘Podcast Maker’ Tools]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about, funnily enough, Podcast Maker tools. A &lsquo;Podcast Maker&rsquo; is basically an app or tool that brings everything like recording, editing, production, and publishing together into one place. They can be less flexible and powerful than having a dedicated tool for every job, but so much more simpler, convenient, and cost-effective. Naturally, because we run Alitu, we&rsquo;re a bit biased and think it&rsquo;s the best option out there. We certainly strive to be. But that said, we recognise that there are a few other great options out there too, and we always want to help you make up your own mind. Podcast hosting giants Podbean, Spreaker, and Anchor each have their own Podcast Maker tools. Their editing and production options can be a bit more limited, but they really shine for those looking to do live shows with real-time audience interaction. We can&rsquo;t speak for the other platforms here, but we&rsquo;re constantly working on new tools and features in Alitu to make it the world&rsquo;s best all-in-one podcasting software. We&rsquo;d love you to be part of this journey too, so be sure to try us out free for 7 days by going to [Alitu.com](http://Alitu.com) And, for a deeper dive on all the best Podcast Maker options, go to http://ThePodcastHost.com/maker</p>]]></description><pubDate>Thu, 28 Sep 2023 05:00:01 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:39</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/79c20ff3-53fb-4e38-b771-e758a327e574</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/79c20ff3-53fb-4e38-b771-e758a327e574.mp3?t=1695877202000" length="1581184" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[A ‘Podcast Maker’ is basically an app or tool that brings everything like recording, editing, production, and publishing together into one place. They can be less flexible and powerful than having a dedicated tool for every job, but so much more simpler, convenient, and cost-effective. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>224</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>224</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">b7ab9001-1989-45af-8c7a-c6bccbe6c038</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[What Are DAWs? Digital Audio Workstations]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[What Are DAWs? Digital Audio Workstations]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re going to talk about Digital Audio Workstations, AKA - DAWs. A DAW is a term used to describe software that you use to record, edit, and produce audio. Most of them are designed and built with music production in mind, but can work brilliantly to create spoken-word content if you know what you&rsquo;re doing. A famous free DAW is Audacity. Audacity is popular because of its price, or lack of one. It has everything you need to record and produce a podcast, but it suffers from looking a bit clunky and dated. Adobe Audition, Reaper, and Hindenburg are 3 other popular options amongst podcasters. These are all paid DAWs, but they&rsquo;re a definite improvement on Audacity. The downside of DAWs tends to be their steep learning curve. Because they&rsquo;re so powerful and flexible, they can take a lot of time and effort to learn, at even a basic level. Most DAWs don&rsquo;t work as remote call recorders either, unless you have lots of extra equipment. If you&rsquo;re looking for the simplest DAW that&rsquo;s designed with the spoken-word in mind, then Hindenburg is worth checking out. Or, if you&rsquo;d prefer to avoid DAWs altogether, then be sure to have a go with our very own Alitu &lsquo;Podcast Maker&rsquo;. For a deeper dive into DAWs, go to http://ThePodcastHost.com/DAWS</p>]]></description><pubDate>Wed, 27 Sep 2023 05:00:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:43</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/b7ab9001-1989-45af-8c7a-c6bccbe6c038</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/b7ab9001-1989-45af-8c7a-c6bccbe6c038.mp3?t=1695790801000" length="1644672" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[A DAW is a term used to describe software that you use to record, edit, and produce audio. Most of them are designed and built with music production in mind, but can work brilliantly to create spoken-word content if you know what you’re doing. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>223</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>223</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">9862ffab-131f-435d-9ea2-fcddb43026d7</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Remote Call Recording Options]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Remote Call Recording Options]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking remote recording software. Many podcasters run interview or co-hosted shows, and with call recording software, location is no barrier to who you can chat with. Online call recorders do exactly what they say on the tin. Two of the most popular options out there are Squadcast and Riverside. These are what&rsquo;s known as &ldquo;double ender&rdquo; tools which record each participant locally, on their own computer. This makes them safer from wonky wifi connections, crashes, and the sound quality is generally better, too. They also both record video, as well as audio. On top of that, our own Alitu has a call recorder feature - one that we&rsquo;re constantly working on and improving. The big benefit of using Alitu is that it handles all of the syncing, processing, cleaning up, and volume levelling automatically. Its editing tools are also powerful, but at the same time, stupidly simple to use. Of course, everyone on the planet has spent the past few years using Zoom, and you can use that to record remote calls too. You just need to have the right software and know-how to edit and produce them into decent-sounding episodes, afterwards. Why not give Alitu&rsquo;s call recorder a spin on your next podcast episode, though? You can try it out free for 7 days by going to [Alitu.com](http://Alitu.com) And, for a deeper look at remote recording software options, go to http://ThePodcastHost.com/Onlinerecording</p>]]></description><pubDate>Tue, 26 Sep 2023 05:00:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:47</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/9862ffab-131f-435d-9ea2-fcddb43026d7</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/9862ffab-131f-435d-9ea2-fcddb43026d7.mp3?t=1695704401000" length="1714304" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Online call recorders do exactly what they say on the tin. Two of the most popular options out there are Squadcast and Riverside. These are what’s known as “double ender” tools which record each participant locally, on their own computer. This makes them safer from wonky wifi connections, crashes, and the sound quality is generally better, too. They also both record video, as well as audio. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>222</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>222</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">aa0fd25a-7ecf-4fa7-9dfc-ace0b2545406</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Podcast Software]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Podcast Software]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re going to start thinking about podcasting software. The term &ldquo;podcast software&rdquo; is pretty general. It could be used to describe the programme or app you use to record, edit, or publish your episodes. Some platforms only focus on one of these aspects, whilst others will do all 3. It&rsquo;s common for editing software to double up as recording software. Prime examples of these are Audacity, Adobe Audition, and our own Alitu. Many online call recorders don&rsquo;t have editing functions though - or, if they do, they tend to be really basic. Podcast publishing or hosting software might also offer some basic recording and editing features. We&rsquo;re going to take a deeper dive into some options here in a future episode. Transcription is also important from an accessibility and legal point of view. There&rsquo;s plenty of software options on that front, too, as we&rsquo;ll soon find out. You might even think of your project management or scheduling tools as podcast software. These are tools like Trello, Asana, Notion, Calendly, and Book Like a Boss. For a deeper look at podcasting software in the meantime, go to http://ThePodcastHost.com/software</p>]]></description><pubDate>Mon, 25 Sep 2023 05:00:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:32</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/aa0fd25a-7ecf-4fa7-9dfc-ace0b2545406</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/aa0fd25a-7ecf-4fa7-9dfc-ace0b2545406.mp3?t=1695618001000" length="1470592" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[The term “podcast software” is pretty general. It could be used to describe the programme or app you use to record, edit, or publish your episodes. Some platforms only focus on one of these aspects, whilst others will do all 3. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>221</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>221</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">81bb4321-78bd-4793-ae74-253508501253</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Should You Record Outdoors?]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Should You Record Outdoors?]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re answering the question &ldquo;should you record your podcast outdoors?&rdquo; On the previous few episodes, we&rsquo;ve talked about the importance of good recording environments. Well, one of the best is actually right outside your window. I&rsquo;m talking, of course, about the great outdoors. If you&rsquo;re plagued by reverb, loud distracting background noise, or a simple lack of space, then I&rsquo;d encourage you to try recording your next episode whilst out on a walk, or sitting on your favourite park bench. Sure, there can be plenty &ldquo;noise&rdquo; outside. But this often works in an ambient sense, rather than a distracting or annoying one. Recording outdoors can also help with your presentation style. If you&rsquo;re out a walk, the blood is flowing and you tend to feel more energetic, too. This is especially good if you suffer a bit from &ldquo;mic fright&rdquo;, or lack of confidence. Equipment-wise, your smartphone can work well, with the right recording app. Or, you might want to get yourself a digital recorder and lavalier mic. We take a deeper dive into some gear recommendations, additional tips, and case studies at http://ThePodcastHost.com/Outdoors</p>]]></description><pubDate>Fri, 22 Sep 2023 05:00:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:22</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/81bb4321-78bd-4793-ae74-253508501253</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/81bb4321-78bd-4793-ae74-253508501253.mp3?t=1695358801000" length="1310848" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[If you’re plagued by reverb, loud distracting background noise, or a simple lack of space, then I’d encourage you to try recording your next episode whilst out on a walk, or sitting on your favourite park bench. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>220</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>220</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">93f8df04-1823-43cb-a371-603f274d7012</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Background Noise: Sound Treatment Vs Sound Proofing]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Background Noise: Sound Treatment Vs Sound Proofing]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about background noise. Let&rsquo;s clear up a bit of confusion amongst podcasters - the difference between sound treatment, and sound *proofing*. On the last episode we talked about reverb, and that&rsquo;s very much in the sound *treatment* camp. But many folks mistakenly believe that, once they&rsquo;ve stuck up some acoustic tiles, they have sound *proofed* their room. If Dave Grohl was to move into the flat next door and start playing his drums, you&rsquo;d quickly find out that your room hasn&rsquo;t been sound proofed at all, though. Eliminating unwanted background noise can be harder than *treating* the sound of a room, for obvious reasons. There are some low-hanging fruits, though. Getting rid of that annoying clock, closing a window, or giving Dave next door a crisp 20 to nip down the pub for the next hour. The good news is that most unwanted background noise will be too minimal to be picked up by your mic and cause any distraction on your audio. A dynamic, cardioid microphone like the Samson Q2U, for example, does a great job of rejecting unwanted sounds around you. So do your best to minimise background noise, but don&rsquo;t obsess over it. Conditions will rarely be perfect, after all. And you can&rsquo;t let them get in the way of your progress as a podcaster. For a more detailed look at dealing with background noise in podcasting, go to http://thepodcasthost.com/noise</p>]]></description><pubDate>Thu, 21 Sep 2023 05:00:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:26</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/93f8df04-1823-43cb-a371-603f274d7012</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/93f8df04-1823-43cb-a371-603f274d7012.mp3?t=1695272401000" length="1384576" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Let’s clear up a bit of confusion amongst podcasters - the difference between sound treatment, and sound proofing. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>219</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>219</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">fb896547-689f-497b-a53c-27402feee4c1</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[How to Eliminate Reverb in Any Room]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[How to Eliminate Reverb in Any Room]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about reverb or echo - and - how to get rid of it. Excess reverb can make even the best podcast sound amateur. This unwanted echo effect happens in smaller, boxy rooms with a lot of hard surfaces. Here, the soundwaves of your voice will bounce around the room like a ball. Typically poor-sounding environments include caves, the bottoms of wells, and in the average person&rsquo;s bathroom. It&rsquo;s unlikely you plan to record in any of these, but the room you&rsquo;ve set aside for your recordings might actually sound like it&rsquo;s one of them. So, what can we do about it? Well, you could simply record somewhere else. Typically, bedrooms are softer sounding environments. Some podcasters swear by recording in their closets, for example. Alternatively, you can create temporary recording havens by using duvets, towels, or dedicated acoustic blankets. The beauty of these is that they can be tidied away afterwards, if space is at a premium in your home. If you have the luxury of a more permanent setup, you can buy acoustic foam tiles at a reasonable price and stick them to the walls, and even, the roof of your room. The thing is, though, you don&rsquo;t actually need to sound treat entire rooms - you only need to deal with the small area where you and your mic are set up. Our favourite trick here is to buy a cat bed. You&rsquo;ll get one of these in the pet shop for less than $15, and they make excellent little &ldquo;studios&rdquo; to place your mic in. Then, you just talk into it, and your audio will be free from reverb - even if you *are* recording down a well. For a more detailed look at podcast recording environments, go to http://thepodcasthost.com/homestudio</p>]]></description><pubDate>Wed, 20 Sep 2023 05:00:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:50</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/fb896547-689f-497b-a53c-27402feee4c1</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/fb896547-689f-497b-a53c-27402feee4c1.mp3?t=1695186001000" length="1767552" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Excess reverb can make even the best podcast sound amateur. This unwanted echo effect happens in smaller, boxy rooms with a lot of hard surfaces. Here, the soundwaves of your voice will bounce around the room like a ball.  ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>218</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>218</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">e64d36aa-aaf6-4ea2-912c-4e63fb943f7f</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Why Does Your Recording Environment Matter?]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Why Does Your Recording Environment Matter?]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about your recording environment. It&rsquo;s easy to think that your audio quality is determined by your equipment - and, to an extent, that&rsquo;s true. But the room or place you record in has a much bigger impact on how your content&rsquo;s going to sound. There are 2 main factors when it comes to your environment affecting your audio. Firstly, there&rsquo;s the &ldquo;sound&rdquo; of the room itself. Echo or reverb can be a real problem for podcasters, and we&rsquo;re going to take a look at it in more depth in the next episode - including - a tip to kill it in *any* room, for less than $15. The other factor is noise. Now, we&rsquo;re not saying for a minute that you should have complete and utter silence when you record - very few people have that luxury - and, in the right context, a bit of gentle background noise can add ambience and atmosphere. We&rsquo;ll talk more about this in an upcoming episode, too. The key is, though, that background noise should never be distracting, or compete with your actual voice. Your listeners should always be able to hear and focus on the content and message they&rsquo;ve turned up for. If they can&rsquo;t do that, after all, then the whole thing&rsquo;s going to fall apart. For a more detailed look at podcast recording environments, go to http://thepodcasthost.com/homestudio</p>]]></description><pubDate>Tue, 19 Sep 2023 05:00:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:24</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/e64d36aa-aaf6-4ea2-912c-4e63fb943f7f</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/e64d36aa-aaf6-4ea2-912c-4e63fb943f7f.mp3?t=1695099601000" length="1343616" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[It’s easy to think that your audio quality is determined by your equipment - and, to an extent, that’s true. But the room or place you record in has a much bigger impact on how your content’s going to sound. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>217</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>217</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">20c38ab0-da92-4f63-9f91-3b822ee58100</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[What Are Polar Patterns?]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[What Are Polar Patterns?]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re going to answer the question &ldquo;what are polar patterns?&rdquo; These are also sometimes called &ldquo;pickup patterns&rdquo;, and they&rsquo;re essentially the settings that determine the area a mic will focus on when recording sound. To think about this visually, imagine your mic as a torch or laser. The area it shines light on is the area it&rsquo;s &ldquo;hearing&rdquo; your voice. Most microphones you&rsquo;ll come across - including the Samson Q2U - have a &lsquo;Cardioid&rsquo; polar pattern which means they&rsquo;re designed to record one person at one time. Other polar patterns include: Omnidirectional - for recording multiple people. Bi-directional, or, Stereo - for recording 2 people. And Shotgun - for a laser-focused pickup of an audio source that blocks out everything else around it. Think of a news reporter, chatting away in a busy street, but you can still hear them clear as day. Polar patterns are represented by easy to understand diagrams. For example, Cardioid is heart-shaped, whilst Omnidirectional is a circle. These are like birds-eye views of where the pattern is picking up sound. To get a look at these diagrams, and to learn more about polar patterns in general, head on over to http://thepodcasthost.com/patterns</p>]]></description><pubDate>Mon, 18 Sep 2023 05:00:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:21</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/20c38ab0-da92-4f63-9f91-3b822ee58100</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/20c38ab0-da92-4f63-9f91-3b822ee58100.mp3?t=1695013201000" length="1306752" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[These are also sometimes called “pickup patterns”, and they’re essentially the settings that determine the area a mic will focus on when recording sound.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>216</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>216</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">4e506629-ae21-4e99-b743-e5e24fa991f9</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[What is a Dynamic Microphone?]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[What is a Dynamic Microphone?]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re going to answer the question &ldquo;what is a Dynamic microphone?&rdquo;. Dynamic mics tend to be&nbsp;tougher and more durable&nbsp;than their Condenser counterparts. A Dynamic mic can be looked at as something you&rsquo;d typically use in &ldquo;live&rdquo; environments, and rougher &ldquo;on-the-go&rdquo; settings. If you record live, on-location, or just like having a mic on you at all times for ad-hoc recordings, then a Dynamic mic is a great option. Most Dynamic mics only have a&nbsp;Cardioid polar pattern, however. This means they&rsquo;re generally designed for single person use. We&rsquo;re going to talk more about polar patterns and why they matter on the next episode, so make sure you&rsquo;re subscribed on your listening app of choice and that&rsquo;ll be delivered to you, automatically. Bottom line, though, if you&rsquo;re using Dynamics for in-person interviews then you&rsquo;d either need to get two, or, hold one in your hand and constantly point it back and forward between you and your guest. Dynamic mics are powered by whatever they&rsquo;re plugged into, meaning the recording signal isn&rsquo;t quite as strong as it would be with a Condenser. This means you either need to turn the gain up more, or, bring the recording level up in the editing phase. Either way, that&rsquo;s going to raise the level of hiss in your audio. But, this is far from a deal-breaker, and often, the pros outweigh the cons with Dynamic mics in podcasting. Our most recommended mic, the Samson Q2U, is a Dynamic model, which means it&rsquo;s durable, flexible, and doesn&rsquo;t require a perfect environment to sound good either. That&rsquo;s what makes it such a good option for beginners on a limited budget! For a deeper dive on this subject, go to http://ThePodcastHost.com/dynamicvcondenser</p>]]></description><pubDate>Fri, 15 Sep 2023 05:00:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:51</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/4e506629-ae21-4e99-b743-e5e24fa991f9</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/4e506629-ae21-4e99-b743-e5e24fa991f9.mp3?t=1694754001000" length="1779840" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Dynamic mics tend to be tougher and more durable than their Condenser counterparts. A Dynamic mic can be looked at as something you’d typically use in “live” environments, and rougher “on-the-go” settings.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>215</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>215</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">9f565b9f-db06-44d0-b166-47ea7b11ace9</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[What is a Condenser Microphone?]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[What is a Condenser Microphone?]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re going to answer the question &ldquo;what is a Condenser microphone?&rdquo;. &ldquo;Condenser&rdquo; and &ldquo;Dynamic&rdquo; are two of the most common types of mic. The terms refer to how they&rsquo;re built, and how they function. We can get really technical with stuff like this, but I&rsquo;d rather keep things simple. That means I&rsquo;ll make some generalisations that aren&rsquo;t&nbsp;*always*&nbsp;the rule &ndash; now and then you&rsquo;ll find exceptions. But here&rsquo;s a good starting point for differentiating between the two. A Condenser mic can be looked at as primarily something you&rsquo;d use to record vocals in a professional studio environment. Condenser microphones can often be more sensitive, and easier to break. Their sensitivity means they tend to pick up more sounds from around your recording environment. This can be a pro or a con depending on what you&rsquo;re trying to do. Most are designed for more permanent setups on mic stands or boom arms, as opposed to being carried around, and shoved in and out of boxes or bags. A Condenser mic is powered either by having its own battery, or by using a function called&nbsp;*Phantom Power*&nbsp;on your mixer, preamp, or recorder. This is why Condenser mics can usually record at a much lower gain than dynamics. Gain is essentially your input recording volume. The outcome is that lower gain means less hiss in your recording. Condenser mics often have multiple&nbsp;polar pattern&nbsp;options, making them versatile for different types of recording needs and setups. On the next episode, we&rsquo;re going to take a look at Dynamic mics and how they compare to their Condenser alternatives. In the meantime though, for a deeper dive on this subject, go to http://ThePodcastHost.com/dynamicvcondenser</p>]]></description><pubDate>Thu, 14 Sep 2023 05:00:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:41</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/9f565b9f-db06-44d0-b166-47ea7b11ace9</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/9f565b9f-db06-44d0-b166-47ea7b11ace9.mp3?t=1694667601000" length="1624192" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[“Condenser” and “Dynamic” are two of the most common types of mic. The terms refer to how they’re built, and how they function. 

We can get really technical with stuff like this, but I’d rather keep things simple. That means I’ll make some generalisations that aren’t *always* the rule – now and then you’ll find exceptions.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>214</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>214</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">1046dbe2-0775-4f85-bed3-ae5d7502c7f5</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Podcast Equipment for Multiple Local Participants]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Podcast Equipment for Multiple Local Participants]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re going to talk about podcast equipment for recording multiple people, locally. If getting people in the same room together is the key for your podcast, then there are a few different options out there. On the previous 2 episodes, we&rsquo;ve mentioned the Samson Q2U mic and the Zoom PodTrak P4 podcast recorder. Get yourself a PodTrak P4 and then a Q2U for each person you&rsquo;ll be recording, and you&rsquo;ll have a brilliant set up for only a few hundred dollars. With the PodTrak P4 you don&rsquo;t need a computer as it records independently. If you&rsquo;d prefer to record into a computer, though, then you could get a USB audio interface and plug your mics into that. Our favourite USB audio interface is the Focusrite Scarlett 2i2, but be mindful that this only runs 2 mics at any one time. A couple of the more high-end options if you have a bit of budget behind you are the Zoom H6 digital recorder, and the Rodecaster Pro podcast recorder. These are premium options and if you pair them with mics like the Rode Procaster or Shure SM7B then you&rsquo;ll have a better setup than 99% of other podcasters out there. Of course, there&rsquo;s no need to spend a fortune on your podcasting kit, so for most folks, a handful of Samson Q2Us running into a Zoom PodTrak P4 will be more than good enough. For a more detailed look at choosing the right kit for you and your podcast, go to http://ThePodcastHost.com/equipment</p>]]></description><pubDate>Wed, 13 Sep 2023 05:01:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:28</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/1046dbe2-0775-4f85-bed3-ae5d7502c7f5</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/1046dbe2-0775-4f85-bed3-ae5d7502c7f5.mp3?t=1694581261000" length="1407104" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[If getting people in the same room together is the key for your podcast, then there are a few different options out there. On the previous 2 episodes, we’ve mentioned the Samson Q2U mic and the Zoom PodTrak P4 podcast recorder. Get yourself a PodTrak P4 and then a Q2U for each person you’ll be recording, and you’ll have a brilliant set up for only a few hundred dollars. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>213</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>213</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">a22a6395-be60-42f4-8293-50ceea5810e1</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Podcast Equipment for Online Interviews or Co-Hosts]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Podcast Equipment for Online Interviews or Co-Hosts]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re going to talk about podcast equipment for online interviews or co-hosts. Typically, the set up here is exactly the same as if you were podcasting on your own. If you listened to the previous episode, then you&rsquo;ll have heard me talk about the Samson Q2U. This works just as well for remote recordings as it does on the solo podcasting front. You&rsquo;d then either need online recording software or additional equipment to link up with your guests or co-hosts. We&rsquo;ll cover software in-depth in a future episode, but you can easily record calls with Alitu, which also does all the cleaning up and volume levelling automatically for you. For a 7-day free trial go to alitu.com, that&rsquo;s A-L-I-T-U dot com, and check it out for yourself. Back to the equipment though - if you&rsquo;d rather use hardware than software for remote recording then you might want to check out the Zoom PodTrak P4. This is a great wee podcast recorder that lets you plug in multiple mics, record online calls AND phone calls, and you can even play music and sound effects &ldquo;as live&rdquo; in your recordings, too. For most people, though, using call recording software such as Alitu is the best option because of its pure simplicity. But, if you *do* fancy getting yourself a Zoom PodTrak P4, they&rsquo;re usually available for less than $200 on Amazon. For a more detailed look at choosing the right kit for you and your podcast, go to http://ThePodcastHost.com/equipment</p>]]></description><pubDate>Tue, 12 Sep 2023 05:00:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:29</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/a22a6395-be60-42f4-8293-50ceea5810e1</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/a22a6395-be60-42f4-8293-50ceea5810e1.mp3?t=1694494801000" length="1425536" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Typically, the set up here is exactly the same as if you were podcasting on your own. If you listened to the previous episode, then you’ll have heard me talk about the Samson Q2U. This works just as well for remote recordings as it does on the solo podcasting front. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>212</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>212</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">57923c0b-8374-4189-83a4-e3de4bd7ef73</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Podcast Equipment for Solo Shows]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Podcast Equipment for Solo Shows]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re going to talk about podcast equipment for solo shows. If you&rsquo;re podcasting on your own then this makes choosing equipment easy. You&rsquo;re just going to need a USB mic and some headphones. I say &ldquo;headphones&rdquo; but even your trusty earbuds will do the trick here. You&rsquo;ll use these to &ldquo;monitor&rdquo; yourself as you record. That way, you can hear exactly *what* you record, as it&rsquo;s recorded, and pick up on any sound issues there and then. On the USB mic front, it seems like there are hundreds of quality and good value options on the market these days. This can make choosing one tricky. With that in mind, we&rsquo;re just going to recommend the one we think is ideal for 98% of aspiring and early-stage podcasters - the Samson Q2U. The Q2U can usually be bought brand new on Amazon for less than $70. You can also buy it in a special podcasting bundle along with headphones and a boom arm for around $95 - which is an excellent deal. Aside from being a great sounding budget mic, the Q2U works in both USB AND XLR form, so, if you want to upgrade to a mixer or digital recorder further down the line, you won&rsquo;t need to spend more money on a new mic. The Samson Q2U&rsquo;s availability varies depending on where you are in the world, but an almost identical mic is the ATR2100, so keep that in mind if you have trouble getting your hands on a Q2U. For a more detailed look at the Samson Q2U as the ideal solo podcaster mic, go to http://ThePodcastHost.com/solo</p>]]></description><pubDate>Mon, 11 Sep 2023 05:00:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:36</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/57923c0b-8374-4189-83a4-e3de4bd7ef73</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/57923c0b-8374-4189-83a4-e3de4bd7ef73.mp3?t=1694408401000" length="1544320" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[If you’re podcasting on your own then this makes choosing equipment easy. You’re just going to need a USB mic and some headphones. I say “headphones” but even your trusty earbuds will do the trick here. You’ll use these to “monitor” yourself as you record. That way, you can hear exactly what you record, as it’s recorded, and pick up on any sound issues there and then. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>211</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>211</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">1f88ebca-f375-447a-9e4f-fbff1f53c169</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[What’s the Deal With Podcast Equipment?]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[What’s the Deal With Podcast Equipment?]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And over the next few episodes, we&rsquo;re going to talk about the gear you need to actually record your show. When we hear the term &ldquo;podcast equipment&rdquo; it&rsquo;s easy to imagine a pro-level studio filled with lots of intimidating and very expensive kit. But for the vast majority of podcasters, this looks nothing like their own recording setup. You can break podcast equipment down into categories, based on how you record and capture your voice, from mic to mixer to recorder to computer. The recording process can be made as simple or as complicated as you like. You can record right into your computer, ridding yourself of the need for a mixer or a recorder. Or you can go the full studio route, and use it all. If you use very little kit, the process will be simple, but you&rsquo;ll also have less flexibility and control. This isn&rsquo;t an issue for most aspiring podcasters though, as they&rsquo;ve no intention of becoming an audio engineer &ndash; they just want to get their message out there. There is no &ldquo;one-size-fits-all&rdquo; podcast equipment recommendation. As we covered earlier in the series, there are a few different podcast format options, and the format you choose will have a bearing on what gear you need. As will, of course, your budget. So over the next few episodes, we&rsquo;re going to take a look at some common use-cases and give you some recommendations for each of them. On top of that, we&rsquo;re going to give you some easy-to-understand explanations of common gear-related terms you&rsquo;ll likely come across, too. For a more detailed look at choosing the right kit for you and your podcast, go to http://ThePodcastHost.com/equipment</p>]]></description><pubDate>Fri, 08 Sep 2023 05:00:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:37</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/1f88ebca-f375-447a-9e4f-fbff1f53c169</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/1f88ebca-f375-447a-9e4f-fbff1f53c169.mp3?t=1694149201000" length="1558656" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[When we hear the term “podcast equipment” it’s easy to imagine a pro-level studio filled with lots of intimidating and very expensive kit. But for the vast majority of podcasters, this looks nothing like their own recording setup.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>210</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>210</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">74f97a92-ac38-4b04-a4c7-bb61172f9e23</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[How to Get Good Podcast Cover Art]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[How to Get Good Podcast Cover Art]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about your show&rsquo;s cover art, sometimes known as your artwork or your podcast logo. Just like your episode titles, first impressions are everything. Having attractive cover art that stands out is so vital when your show lines up against thousands of others in apps like Apple Podcasts and Spotify. Your artwork should be at least 1400 x 1400 pixels, in JPG form, and it needs to be under 500kb in size. Apple actually recommends 3000 x 3000-pixel files, but we&rsquo;ve found because they&rsquo;re much weightier, those big files can cause issues with your RSS feeds further down the line. So I&rsquo;d usually opt for the smaller formats to help avoid running into the same problem. Your artwork will normally be viewed as a thumbnail - pretty small on-screen, often on a phone - so don&rsquo;t cram any small text onto it. In fact, the *only* text on there would ideally be your podcast name. Another reason your name should be descriptive... I often think that simpler is better with artwork. Your podcast title, covering practically the whole space, maybe with your brand colours and a background image, or a really small illustration alongside. You can create decent cover art for free on Canva, which I use all the time. They even have podcast logo templates on there. Or, you might want to hire a freelancer on a platform like Fiverr if you&rsquo;d like someone to do it for you. The benefit of working with a designer is that they can help you to encapsulate your branding. Cover art is a bit like choosing a podcast name, in many ways. You&rsquo;re trying to find that balance between descriptiveness, cleverness, and quirkiness, all in one static image - and it all still needs to work well when viewed as a thumbnail on a phone screen. For a more detailed look at designing your perfect podcast logo, go to http://ThePodcastHost.com/art</p>]]></description><pubDate>Thu, 07 Sep 2023 05:00:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:02:17</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/74f97a92-ac38-4b04-a4c7-bb61172f9e23</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/74f97a92-ac38-4b04-a4c7-bb61172f9e23.mp3?t=1694062801000" length="2199680" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Just like your episode titles, first impressions are everything. Having attractive cover art that stands out is so vital when your show lines up against thousands of others in apps like Apple Podcasts and Spotify.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>209</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>209</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">3e3f8a80-9269-4a3e-a3db-27189ec2d36f</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[What Should Go In My Podcast Description?]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[What Should Go In My Podcast Description?]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about your show&rsquo;s description. Did you know that this is THE most important thing potential new listeners will judge your show on? This is in that crucial period where they&rsquo;ve found it, but haven&rsquo;t hit play yet. By the way, this isn&rsquo;t my opinion - it&rsquo;s right from the horse&rsquo;s mouth, via our Podcast Discovery Survey, which you can find at [ThePodcastHost.com/discovery](http://ThePodcastHost.com/discovery) So, a quick bit of clarity on what&rsquo;s meant by &ldquo;podcast description&rdquo; - this is the summary of your podcast in its entirety. So don&rsquo;t confuse it with the shownotes that accompany each episode. Podcast descriptions are often written as an afterthought, but they&rsquo;re worth spending a good bit of time on. In them, you should talk about *who* the show is for and what they can expect from it. We&rsquo;ve covered this already in our &ldquo;who&rdquo; and &ldquo;why&rdquo; episodes, so you&rsquo;ve done the groundwork, here - now, you just need to make it clear to your would-be listeners. You&rsquo;ll also want to let them know what to expect in terms of format and schedule. Do new episodes drop each Friday? Or do new seasons run every second month? Of course, you probably want to mention a bit about yourself, too. For example, who you are, what your angle is and why you&rsquo;re doing this show. Credibility is good, but the big key here is to make it all about *them -* the listeners. Just imagine someone reading it and thinking to themselves &ldquo;what&rsquo;s in this for *me*?&rdquo;. For a more detailed look at writing the perfect summary for your show, go to http://ThePodcastHost.com/description</p>]]></description><pubDate>Wed, 06 Sep 2023 05:00:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:42</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/3e3f8a80-9269-4a3e-a3db-27189ec2d36f</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/3e3f8a80-9269-4a3e-a3db-27189ec2d36f.mp3?t=1693976401000" length="1632384" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Did you know that your podcast description is THE most important thing potential new listeners will judge your show on? This is in that crucial period where they’ve found it, but haven’t hit play yet. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>208</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>208</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">a857a049-f46d-495c-8a27-78426169a812</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[How Should I Name my Podcast Episodes?]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[How Should I Name my Podcast Episodes?]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about how to name your podcast *episodes.* We spent a bit of time earlier on talking about what to call your podcast as a whole. But how you title your episodes can be just as - or maybe even more - important! The biggest mistake when it comes to naming your episodes is to pop in meaningless details. Like Episode 1: This time I talk with... blah blah blah. You&rsquo;ve already lost them by the time they hit the 5th word. Instead, you need to front-load the title with value, really give them a reason to listen What&rsquo;s the meat of the episode? What problem are you solving? What solution are you offering? This is a big clue as to what your episode title should be. That&rsquo;s what draws people in. We find a lot of good *and* bad examples of episode titles with interview shows. If you have a guest on, don&rsquo;t just call the episode &ldquo;A chat with Jane Smith&rdquo;. If your listener has never heard of Jane, why would they care? But as it happens, Jane could be an expert on something they&rsquo;re really struggling with, so this would be the perfect episode for them. It&rsquo;s your duty as a host to signpost the value to them as much as possible. Without meaning to blow our own trumpet, take a look at the episode titles for this very podcast. I&rsquo;d like to think they&rsquo;re clear and deliver on what we promise here. The added benefit of descriptive episode titles is that they&rsquo;ll show up in search in most listening apps. So if someone types in a &ldquo;how to&rdquo; question on your own topic, and you have an episode on it, then there&rsquo;s a much better chance of them finding your show. Everyone wins! For a more detailed look at naming your podcast episodes, go to http://ThePodcastHost.com/episodetitles</p>]]></description><pubDate>Tue, 05 Sep 2023 04:00:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:47</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/a857a049-f46d-495c-8a27-78426169a812</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/a857a049-f46d-495c-8a27-78426169a812.mp3?t=1693886401000" length="1712256" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[What’s the meat of the episode? What problem are you solving? What solution are you offering? This is a big clue as to what your episode title should be. That’s what draws people in. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>207</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>207</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">c070b534-d58e-4e3a-9ba0-40884e2b6649</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Why Podcast in Seasons?]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Why Podcast in Seasons?]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about releasing podcast episodes in seasons. On the last episode, we talked about the tricky balance of finding your ideal release frequency. So, what if the podcast you&rsquo;d like to create is a really in-depth, highly produced show, that goes out every single week? But, you know that, in the long run, that weekly schedule is a bit unsustainable? The ideal answer could be to take a leaf out of your favourite TV show&rsquo;s book, and podcast in seasons. Here, a &ldquo;season&rdquo; represents a block of episodes. The &ldquo;How many&rdquo; is up to you. For some, it&rsquo;ll be 6, for others, it&rsquo;ll be upwards of 20. This means that you can really throw yourself into creating some great content, and then, take a well-deserved rest before going on to tackle the next season. The beauty of this approach is that seasons can be &ldquo;themed&rdquo;, which makes your show really accessible and appealing to new listeners. Our fitness podcaster, for example, might do an entire season on upper body strength, whilst our zombie podcaster could do one on post apocalyptic video games. Podcasters who take this &ldquo;themed season&rdquo; approach also benefit from repurposing and monetising their content. We&rsquo;ve seen many ebooks and courses created from them, because a lot of the work in the planning, structure, and organisation, has already been done. One common critique of seasons is that listeners will &ldquo;forget about you&rdquo; during your breaks. This doesn&rsquo;t need to be the case. So long as you make it clear to them how the show works and how long the break is - then they&rsquo;ll know what to expect. You&rsquo;re also asking them to subscribe on their listening app of choice, too. So they never need to &ldquo;remember&rdquo; you&rsquo;ve come back - your next episode will be delivered to them automatically, without any effort on their part. Sell that benefit to them, and all will be well! For a more detailed look at podcasting in seasons, go to http://ThePodcastHost.com/seasons</p>]]></description><pubDate>Mon, 04 Sep 2023 04:00:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:02:16</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/c070b534-d58e-4e3a-9ba0-40884e2b6649</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/c070b534-d58e-4e3a-9ba0-40884e2b6649.mp3?t=1693800001000" length="2177152" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Should you take a leaf out of your favourite TV show’s book, and podcast in seasons?]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>206</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>206</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">3c3cc277-a878-457e-a8bb-9ecad067f9cf</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[How Often Should I Release Podcast Episodes?]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[How Often Should I Release Podcast Episodes?]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking how often! As in how frequently should you be releasing podcast episodes? Just like the &ldquo;ideal length&rdquo; question, there&rsquo;s no one-size-fits-all answer here. The best podcast release schedule is really the most regular one that *you* can stick to, on a consistent basis. So, if you can only manage once a month, that&rsquo;s fine. If you can manage every 2 weeks, even better. If you can manage weekly, then that&rsquo;s about ideal. You can still have a big impact with a fortnightly, or monthly show, but people plan their lives around what day of the week it is. It&rsquo;s the routine at the forefront of our lives, so tapping into a weekly release schedule can be powerful, and build a strong habit in your listeners. Now, what about daily, though, like this show? Daily podcasts tend to have shorter episodes, and you can often batch it - plan, record, and schedule a week or two&rsquo;s worth in just one day. So they can actually be *more* sustainable in certain cases. But, as always, it depends entirely on what works best for *you, and for your listeners. Do they really want what you&rsquo;re offering, every day? Or would they prefer something deeper, once a week?* Ultimately, remember that it&rsquo;s down to quality. Sticking to a deadline which reduces the quality of your episodes, is pointless. You&rsquo;ll have a bigger impact if you put out one excellent episode a month instead of a totally average episode every week, or even - every day. If you&rsquo;re still totally undecided on this, too, then don&rsquo;t worry. We&rsquo;ve got a tip for you on the next episode that can help you find the perfect work-life balance, so be sure to join us again for that. In the meantime, for a more detailed look at how often you should podcast, go to http://ThePodcastHost.com/frequency</p>]]></description><pubDate>Fri, 01 Sep 2023 04:00:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:46</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/3c3cc277-a878-457e-a8bb-9ecad067f9cf</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/3c3cc277-a878-457e-a8bb-9ecad067f9cf.mp3?t=1693540801000" length="1706112" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Just like the “ideal length” question, there’s no one-size-fits-all answer here. The best podcast release schedule is really the most regular one that you can stick to, on a consistent basis.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>205</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>205</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">726db265-c385-47eb-b94f-069b8a287a6f</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[How Long Should my Podcast Episodes Be?]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[How Long Should my Podcast Episodes Be?]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about how long your podcast episodes should be. Here&rsquo;s the bottom line - podcast length depends solely on content. Don&rsquo;t cut down good content - or, pad out succinct work! How long does your episode need to be to get the message out? Then that&rsquo;s the ideal length for you. If you asked most podcast listeners, a &ldquo;short&rdquo; episode would probably be anything under 15 minutes. And a &ldquo;long&rdquo; episode would probably be anything over an hour. Anything from 20 to 45 minutes seems to be the &ldquo;typical&rdquo; episode length, but again, let your content dictate. Just try to aim for some ballpark consistency from episode to episode. Doing 5mins one week then 2 hours the next is going to be a bit jarring for your audience. Podcast listeners like to know what to expect! For a more detailed look at podcast episode lengths, go to http://ThePodcastHost.com/length</p>]]></description><pubDate>Thu, 31 Aug 2023 04:00:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:05</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/726db265-c385-47eb-b94f-069b8a287a6f</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/726db265-c385-47eb-b94f-069b8a287a6f.mp3?t=1693454401000" length="1042560" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[How long does your episode need to be to get the message out? Then that’s the ideal length for you. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>204</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>204</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">6ed35b99-6235-422f-9f76-5c1352e6ff6a</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Using Your Own Name in Your Podcast Name]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Using Your Own Name in Your Podcast Name]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about using your own name in or as your podcast&rsquo;s name. If you&rsquo;ve heard of Tim Ferriss or Joe Rogan, then you&rsquo;ll know what we&rsquo;re talking about here. Podcasts that are named after their hosts generally have one thing in common &ndash; the host already had an audience&nbsp;*before*&nbsp;they started the podcast. These names offer no hints about the show's content. If you've never heard of Tim Ferris, his show could be about literally anything. As it happens, the podcast is about &ldquo;interviewing world-class performers&rdquo; in all fields, linking together the similarities and routines that connect them. If nobody knew Tim Ferris, he'd probably have put a bit more description into his title. Something like &ldquo;How to be World Class&rdquo; would certainly catch the eye of his target audience. Bottom line? If you already have a strong personal brand then this can work well for you. If you&rsquo;re a bit more early-stage, though, then opt for a more descriptive podcast name instead. For a more detailed look at choosing a name for your show, go to http://ThePodcastHost.com/Names</p>]]></description><pubDate>Wed, 30 Aug 2023 04:00:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:13</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/6ed35b99-6235-422f-9f76-5c1352e6ff6a</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/6ed35b99-6235-422f-9f76-5c1352e6ff6a.mp3?t=1693368001000" length="1165440" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Podcasts that are named after their hosts generally have one thing in common – the host already had an audience *before* they started the podcast.

These names offer no hints about the show's content. If you've never heard of Tim Ferris, his show could be about literally anything.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>203</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>203</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">b077a240-4ec9-4422-86de-177fff046541</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Choosing a Clever, Quirky, or Mysterious Podcast Name]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Choosing a Clever, Quirky, or Mysterious Podcast Name]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about clever, quirky, or even, mysterious podcast names. Famous examples here include The Moth, and 99% Invisible. Creative or &ldquo;clever&rdquo; names are often built around puns, plays on words or in-jokes from the show's topic or niche. Many of these names make sense when you look deeply enough into them. But others are just plain abstract and offer no hint into the show's actual content. If you already have an audience, a reputation as a good content creator, or a big marketing budget, then this won't necessarily hold you back. If enough people check out your show and enjoy it, then you'll do fine. But if you're starting completely from scratch then you need to ask yourself what your target audience are searching for online &ndash; and if your podcast name is going to show up in these searches. Does this sound more like your own situation? If so, then you might want to opt for the descriptive naming route instead! For a more detailed look at choosing a name for your show, go to http://ThePodcastHost.com/Names</p>]]></description><pubDate>Tue, 29 Aug 2023 04:00:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:09</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/b077a240-4ec9-4422-86de-177fff046541</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/b077a240-4ec9-4422-86de-177fff046541.mp3?t=1693281601000" length="1104000" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Creative or “clever” names are often built around puns, plays on words or in-jokes from the show's topic or niche.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>202</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>202</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">fcaeb5ba-7343-4a19-8528-0bd8e3c7374d</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Choosing a Descriptive Podcast Name]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Choosing a Descriptive Podcast Name]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>**Choosing a Descriptive Podcast Name** Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about &ldquo;descriptive&rdquo; podcast names. Famous examples of descriptive names are&nbsp;The Property Podcast and&nbsp;Football Weekly. This type of name can be described as &ldquo;doing exactly what it says on the tin&rdquo;. You might think of this as the &ldquo;boring&rdquo; option, but as long as your content isn't boring, nobody's going to care. Descriptive podcast names are immediately identifiable to their target audience. And they're easier to find because they perform better in searches. However, if you have a really creative or clever name picked out for your show and are desperate to use it, you can always find a way to merge it with a descriptive title, too. Is there a pun or reference in your niche that you could work into your show&rsquo;s name somehow? For a more detailed look at choosing a name for your show, go to http://ThePodcastHost.com/Names</p>]]></description><pubDate>Mon, 28 Aug 2023 04:00:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:00:53</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/fcaeb5ba-7343-4a19-8528-0bd8e3c7374d</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/fcaeb5ba-7343-4a19-8528-0bd8e3c7374d.mp3?t=1693195201000" length="843904" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Descriptive podcast names are immediately identifiable to their target audience. And they're easier to find because they perform better in searches.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>201</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>201</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">c78b2417-143e-4fb5-8fa3-e215e4a1f21d</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[How to Name Your Podcast]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[How to Name Your Podcast]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about one of the biggest decisions made by new podcasters - naming your show. There are 3 main camps when it comes to naming your show - you might simply use your own name, or, you might opt for something clever or descriptive. We&rsquo;re going to look at each option, in more depth, over the next few episodes. Start by creating a shortlist of potential podcast names. Then, do a search in a directory or app like Apple Podcasts to see if any of them are taken. If your perfect show name is being used by a podcast that stopped publishing episodes 10 years ago, then this can be frustrating. There are plenty of shows out there with the same name as one another - however, it&rsquo;s better not to cause confusion to your audience by joining their ranks. So try to come up with something new and unique, here. That&rsquo;s ultimately going to give your podcast the best chance of being discovered and growing to its maximum potential. For a more detailed look at choosing a name for your show, go to http://ThePodcastHost.com/Names</p>]]></description><pubDate>Fri, 25 Aug 2023 04:00:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:07</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/c78b2417-143e-4fb5-8fa3-e215e4a1f21d</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/c78b2417-143e-4fb5-8fa3-e215e4a1f21d.mp3?t=1692936001000" length="1073280" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[There are 3 main camps when it comes to naming your show - you might simply use your own name, or, you might opt for something clever or descriptive. We’re going to look at each option, in more depth, over the next few episodes. ]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>200</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>200</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">f01003f3-a33a-497f-b9ee-e98f2fac49db</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[The Documentary or Fiction Podcast Format]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[The Documentary or Fiction Podcast Format]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about documentary-style and fiction podcast formats. Documentary podcasts are often referred to as &ldquo;BBC-style&rdquo; or &ldquo;NPR-style&rdquo;. These shows mix in multiple voices, musical elements, and actuality to add an extra layer of production and storytelling. The end product can sound great, but the time and work needed to put them together will increase drastically. Another high-production format is the fiction podcast. These come in many forms, from &ldquo;audiobook style&rdquo; to fully soundscaped audio dramas, where every footstep is accounted for. Again, the end result can be fantastic, but running a fiction podcast is a big time investment, especially if you want to publish episodes on a regular basis. Of course, the reward for such a heavy workload is that these shows can *really* stand out, which helps them to grow fanatical audiences. They also make great showcases for a multitude of skillsets, from writing and storytelling, to recording and production. Some fiction podcasts have even been adapted into TV shows! For a more detailed look at which podcast format is the best fit for you, go to http://ThePodcastHost.com/Formats</p>]]></description><pubDate>Thu, 24 Aug 2023 04:00:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:09</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/f01003f3-a33a-497f-b9ee-e98f2fac49db</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/f01003f3-a33a-497f-b9ee-e98f2fac49db.mp3?t=1692849601000" length="1110144" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[Documentary podcasts are often referred to as “BBC-style” or “NPR-style”. These shows mix in multiple voices, musical elements, and actuality to add an extra layer of production and storytelling. The end product can sound great, but the time and work needed to put them together will increase drastically.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>199</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>199</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">991ee6e5-ac69-42f5-acd8-ae537766a22d</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[The Roundtable Podcast Format]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[The Roundtable Podcast Format]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about the roundtable podcast format. A &ldquo;roundtable&rdquo; refers to the idea of getting a larger number of participants together to discuss a set topic. Normally there would be at least one regular host, if not two or three. Then the rest of the &lsquo;table&rsquo; is made up of guests who are experts in the topic at hand. Your job as host is to direct the roundtable, asking questions and steering the topic, so that everyone gets a turn and contributes to a great conversation. The roundtable format can be a good way to build authority in your niche. This allows you to invite prominent guests to the show who&rsquo;ll share their wisdom and experience. That said, organising multiple guests and finding suitable recording times can be a big challenge. Each person you add to the mix adds another layer of complexity. Only the most organised of people can pull this off in the long run. For a more detailed look at which podcast format is the best fit for you, go to http://ThePodcastHost.com/Formats</p>]]></description><pubDate>Wed, 23 Aug 2023 04:00:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:09</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/991ee6e5-ac69-42f5-acd8-ae537766a22d</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/991ee6e5-ac69-42f5-acd8-ae537766a22d.mp3?t=1692763201000" length="1104000" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[A “roundtable” refers to the idea of getting a larger number of participants together to discuss a set topic. Normally there would be at least one regular host, if not two or three. Then the rest of the ‘table’ is made up of guests who are experts in the topic at hand.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>198</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>198</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">b42780f6-f60a-443c-a191-ac241b1fcf8a</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[The Interview Podcast Format]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[The Interview Podcast Format]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about the interview podcast format. This is where you &lsquo;borrow&rsquo; the expertise or entertainment value of others. With this style of podcast format, a huge benefit is getting to talk to your heroes. Here, you&rsquo;ll have the opportunity to have a chat with people in your space that you&rsquo;ve always looked up to. On top of that, your guests will have their own audiences who may listen to the interview and end up subscribing to your show. If done right, you can really grow an audience this way. On the flip side, interviewing is a skill that you&rsquo;ll need to hone through practice, so don&rsquo;t approach the A-listers in your field straight away. There are other challenges, too. You&rsquo;ll need to constantly find and approach potential guests, schedule interviews, and rely on others to show up &ndash; either in-person or digitally. And, you&rsquo;ll also need to rely on the technology to work properly throughout each call. For a more detailed look at the interview podcast format, go to http://ThePodcastHost.com/podcastinterviews</p>]]></description><pubDate>Tue, 22 Aug 2023 05:00:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:04</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/b42780f6-f60a-443c-a191-ac241b1fcf8a</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/b42780f6-f60a-443c-a191-ac241b1fcf8a.mp3?t=1692680401000" length="1032320" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[A huge benefit of the interview podcast format is getting to talk to your heroes.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>197</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>197</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">e0645140-62f1-4144-9437-90ed25715d74</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[The Co-Hosted Podcast Format]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[The Co-Hosted Podcast Format]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. On this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about the co-hosted podcast format. This is when you present your show alongside another regular host - whether it's a friend or a colleague. This is a great format for anyone, but particularly early podcasters. It reduces that &lsquo;mic fright&rsquo; you get when recording solo, or the possibility of being a bit monotone. Instead, find the right co-host and you can have a totally natural conversation. Someone to bounce off, debate with, or even take mickey out of. The best co-hosted podcasts have great chemistry between the presenters. You end up being a fly on the way of a great, funny, informative conversation. That creates a first-class listening experience. As always, though, there are challenges. Suddenly you have to coordinate with someone else's calendar when you arrange to record, for example. Then, there&rsquo;s the question of ownership: who&rsquo;s podcast is it? Do you split any future income 50/50? And what happens if your co-host loses interest or just can't do it in the future? So if you do opt for this style of show, definitely have that conversation with your co-host up front, before hitting record on that first episode. For a more detailed look at which podcast format is the best fit for you, go to http://ThePodcastHost.com/Formats</p>]]></description><pubDate>Mon, 21 Aug 2023 05:00:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:40</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/e0645140-62f1-4144-9437-90ed25715d74</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/e0645140-62f1-4144-9437-90ed25715d74.mp3?t=1692594001000" length="1605760" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[On this episode, we’re talking about the co-hosted podcast format. This is when you present your show alongside another regular host - whether it's a friend or a colleague.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>196</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>196</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">cb24b284-32d7-4c3a-b126-ddfe283f3d1e</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[The Solo Podcast Format]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[The Solo Podcast Format]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about the solo podcast format, AKA - the monologue. Each podcast format comes with its own pros and cons. The big benefit of a solo show is that you don&rsquo;t need to rely on anyone else to record your episodes. On top of that, it&rsquo;s YOU who&rsquo;s building a reputation as the authority on your subject. The podcast is also exclusively yours, so you can make all the calls on sponsorship and monetization. And you don&rsquo;t need to split the profits with anyone. There are potential downsides too, though. A solo podcast is perhaps the most intimidating style of show for a beginner. One of the biggest challenges of flying solo is getting over the feeling that you&rsquo;re &lsquo;talking to yourself&rsquo; and realising that you&rsquo;re actually talking to your listener. For a more detailed look at which podcast format is the best fit for you, go to ThePodcastHost.com/Formats</p>]]></description><pubDate>Fri, 18 Aug 2023 05:00:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:00:59</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/cb24b284-32d7-4c3a-b126-ddfe283f3d1e</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/cb24b284-32d7-4c3a-b126-ddfe283f3d1e.mp3?t=1692334801000" length="944256" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>195</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>195</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">caedba07-6b90-4da6-96b6-9cd22f170c1e</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Choosing a Format for Your Podcast]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Choosing a Format for Your Podcast]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about choosing a format for your episodes. The format you choose is really personal, and depends on who&rsquo;s involved. If it&rsquo;s just you, you&rsquo;re not doing a co-hosted show any time soon, for example None of this is set in stone, either. So whilst it&rsquo;s good to have an &lsquo;average&rsquo; format, so your listeners know what to expect, you don&rsquo;t have to stick to it every single time. You might do your first few episodes using a certain format &ndash; for example, solo - then decide it isn&rsquo;t for you. In this case, you could pivot and start doing interviews. Or, you could bring on a regular co-host. The first format you try might feel perfectly natural to you, in which case, great. Or you might opt for a &lsquo;mixed bag&rsquo; approach where you never stick to any one set format. The beauty of it is that it&rsquo;s *your* podcast, and you get to make the rules. We&rsquo;re going to dig into the pros and cons of each podcast format in the next few episodes, so make sure you&rsquo;re subscribed to the show on your listening app of choice!</p>]]></description><pubDate>Thu, 17 Aug 2023 05:00:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:22</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/caedba07-6b90-4da6-96b6-9cd22f170c1e</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/caedba07-6b90-4da6-96b6-9cd22f170c1e.mp3?t=1692248401000" length="1308800" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:summary><![CDATA[The format you choose is really personal, and depends on who’s involved. If it’s just you, you’re not doing a co-hosted show any time soon, for example.]]></itunes:summary><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>194</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>194</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">9f72dc29-449f-45c7-810a-fbc20fdf245c</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Niches and Narrow Podcast Topics]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Niches and Narrow Podcast Topics]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about niches (nitches?) and narrow topics. There&rsquo;s a bit of a misconception in podcasting that, the wider and more open your topic, the bigger your audience will be. I know, it makes sense because covering lots of ground means there's loads more people who *might* be interested in your show. The reality, though, is that listeners love podcasts that feel like they were made *just for them*. So instead of our personal trainer doing a podcast about general health, diet, or exercise, it might be &ldquo;the fitness podcast for single parents&rdquo;, or &ldquo;the keto diet podcast for vegetarians&rdquo;. In other areas, niche podcasts could be &ldquo;The travel podcast, for D&amp;D players&rdquo;, or &ldquo;The business startup podcast, for military veterans&rdquo;. You might have a fear that this'll limit your audience, but, actually, the opposite is true. When your target listeners find your show, and see how closely it scratches their itch, they&rsquo;ll think &ldquo;this is perfect!&rdquo;, hit subscribe, and go on to become fanatical fans. On the other hand, if keep it general, everyone just sees it, goes 'meh' and moves on. When you try to target everyone, you really target no-one in particular. So what would you rather have - a tight, defined group of fanatical listeners, or a big group who just *might* be interested in listening? For a really detailed look at defining your niche topic, go to http://ThePodcastHost.com/topic</p>]]></description><pubDate>Wed, 16 Aug 2023 05:00:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:49</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/9f72dc29-449f-45c7-810a-fbc20fdf245c</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/9f72dc29-449f-45c7-810a-fbc20fdf245c.mp3?t=1692162001000" length="1749120" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>193</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>193</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">d1d57159-fa34-4503-aba9-51ae11ac3560</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Why Should They Listen?]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Why Should They Listen?]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re talking about giving your audience a no-brainer reason to listen. This, my friend, is all about supplying value in your very own unique way. But what does that *actually* mean? Well, let&rsquo;s take the example of our personal trainer, I mentioned last time. If they&rsquo;re serving up content that helps their listeners to, let's say, complete a couch to 5k, then they're providing value. If they can help a listener lose a few stone, or run a faster race, then that's a LOT of value! Or what about our zombie podcaster? They might do an in-depth interview with a top author in the space. They'll dig in to unearth some anecdotes and insights that you've never heard anywhere else before from that writer. In that, they're providing some really unique value. If you do something similar on your show, not only have you given your audience a reason to listen, you've also given them a reason to come back for more, every week. This is absolutely vital for you to think about in the planning stages. So can you write down 10-15 potential episodes that you think your target audience would love to listen to? If you're teaching, it's often about considering the most common problems you can help them solve. And if it's entertainment, it's finding new content, or entertainment that scratches that person's personal itch. And, for a more detailed look at giving them a reason to listen, go to http://ThePodcastHost.com/unique</p>]]></description><pubDate>Tue, 15 Aug 2023 05:00:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:43</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/d1d57159-fa34-4503-aba9-51ae11ac3560</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/d1d57159-fa34-4503-aba9-51ae11ac3560.mp3?t=1692075601000" length="1654912" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>192</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>192</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">8ee8ff08-5912-444c-b5fc-27e01b6c959c</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Who is Your Podcast For?]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Who is Your Podcast For?]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. On this episode, we&rsquo;re asking a big question:&nbsp;Who&nbsp;are you making your podcast for? The thing is, unless you know exactly&nbsp;*who*&nbsp;you&rsquo;re making your show for, and&nbsp;*why*&nbsp;you&rsquo;re doing it, you&rsquo;ve got no chance of growing an audience. Let&rsquo;s imagine a personal trainer who&rsquo;s making a health and fitness podcast to market their business. Their target audience might be people who are interested in healthy eating, weight loss, or HIIT training, or bodybuilding. Or, let&rsquo;s imagine a hobbyist who loves zombies and post-apocalyptic fiction. Their target audience would simply be folks with the same really specific passion. They might be fans of TV shows like&nbsp;The Walking Dead, and video games like&nbsp;Resident Evil. It's a good idea to sketch out what&rsquo;s known as your &ldquo;avatar&rdquo;. An avatar is a made up person that represents your ideal listeners in the real world. You make this detailed - with a name, age, job, background, likes, dislikes. You make this as real as you can, so it's someone you can know, deeply. The benefit then is that, with each episode you plan out, you can ask yourself the question &ldquo;would Jane (my avatar) like this?&rdquo; Asking that question is the key to making really compelling content, every time. For a really detailed look at how to create your avatar, and a bunch of examples, go to http://ThePodcastHost.com/listener</p>]]></description><pubDate>Mon, 14 Aug 2023 07:00:00 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:35</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/8ee8ff08-5912-444c-b5fc-27e01b6c959c</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/8ee8ff08-5912-444c-b5fc-27e01b6c959c.mp3?t=1691996401000" length="1523840" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>191</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>191</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item><item><guid isPermaLink="false">8cf5c3f3-cce0-4176-b6e7-33fbe7e8922d</guid><itunes:title><![CDATA[Why Are You Doing a Podcast?]]></itunes:title><title><![CDATA[Why Are You Doing a Podcast?]]></title><description><![CDATA[<p>Welcome to Pocket-Sized Podcasting, brought to you by Alitu: The Podcast Maker. And on this episode, we&rsquo;re asking the question &ldquo;Why?&rdquo; Why&nbsp;do you want to make a podcast? Are you a freelancer?&nbsp;&nbsp;A business?&nbsp;Or working for a company?&nbsp;Whatever you do, you'll know that podcasting's a great way to build trust and authority. Plus, of course, give your customers or your audience a whole bunch of valuable and entertaining content. The other option is that you're in podcasting as a hobbyist?&nbsp;That could mean&nbsp;you'll be creating a&nbsp;show in your spare time, and on a&nbsp;subject you're passionate about. Anything from knitting, to craft beer, to horror movies. Either way, figure out your why. It could be making more sales. Or growing a community. Or getting famous! They're all valid. And they're important to keep in mind so that you can stay motivated, even when life throws you those inevitable curveballs. Podcasting isn&rsquo;t always easy, but if your &ldquo;Why&rdquo; is worth it, you&rsquo;ll push on through.</p>]]></description><pubDate>Fri, 11 Aug 2023 09:37:44 GMT</pubDate><itunes:duration>00:01:29</itunes:duration><link>https://psp.alitu.com/episode/8cf5c3f3-cce0-4176-b6e7-33fbe7e8922d</link><enclosure url="https://feeds.alitu.com/59376958/8cf5c3f3-cce0-4176-b6e7-33fbe7e8922d.mp3?t=1691746665000" length="1419392" type="audio/mpeg"></enclosure><itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType><itunes:episode>190</itunes:episode><podcast:episode>190</podcast:episode><itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit><itunes:author>Alitu: The Podcast Maker</itunes:author></item></channel></rss>